[ { "topic": 1, "question_num": 1, "stem": "You are setting up Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management for a client. The client plans to add several items to the Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management system. You are required to ensure that the client can configure the items as either company owned or consignment when the client creates the items. Which two of the following actions should you take? NOTE: Each correct answer is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "You should enable batch dimension." }, { "label": "B", "text": "You should enable owner dimension." }, { "label": "C", "text": "You should allocate a moving average costing inventory model." }, { "label": "D", "text": "You should allocate a standard costing inventory model." } ], "answer": "BD" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 2, "stem": "Your company uses a Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management system. You have been tasked with configuring an agreement that gives clients a specified discount per unit if they buy a certain amount of a particular item. The parameters are as follows: \u0000 51 to 100 `\" 10 %/unit \u0000 101 and more `\" 15 %/unit You configure a purchase agreement. Does the action achieve your objective?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes, it does" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No, it does not" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 3, "stem": "Your company uses a Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management system. You have been tasked with configuring an agreement that gives clients a specified discount per unit if they buy a certain amount of a particular item. The parameters are as follows: \u0000 51 to 100 `\" 10 %/unit \u0000 101 and more `\" 15 %/unit You configure a sales agreement. Does the action achieve your objective?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes, it does" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No, it does not" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 4, "stem": "Your company uses a Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management system. You have been tasked with configuring an agreement that gives clients a specified discount per unit if they buy a certain amount of a particular item. The parameters are as follows: \u0000 51 to 100 `\" 10 %/unit \u0000 101 and more `\" 15 %/unit You configure a trade agreement. Does the action achieve your objective?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes, it does" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No, it does not" } ], "answer": "A" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 5, "stem": "Your company recently implemented a Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management system. You are currently configuring costing methods for items in inventory. You need to make use of a method normally used for items that have a limited shelf life. Which of the following is the costing method you should use?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Standard" }, { "label": "B", "text": "FIFO" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Average" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Specific" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 6, "stem": "SIMULATION - Your company makes use of a Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management system. The company has many distribution warehouses across the USA. You have been tasked with setting up barcodes to allow for scanning. These barcodes will be entered automatically. Access the Dynamics 365 portal to achieve this goal. See explanation below. 1. Go to Product information management > Products > Released products. 2. In the list, find and select the desired record. 3. On the Action Pane, select Manage inventory. 4. Select Bar codes. 5. Select New. 6. Mark the selected row that is created in the list below. 7. In the Barcode setup field, enter or select a value. 8. In the Bar code field, enter or select a value. 9. In the Bar code field, type a value. 10.In the Quantity field, enter a number. 11.Select Save. 12.Close the page. Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/pim/tasks/create-bar-code-product", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 7, "stem": "During testing of your company's new implementation of the Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management procurement module, you notice that, when an item is received, transactions aren't posted to the product receipt journal. You need to resolve this issue. Which of the following actions should you take on the Item model group setup form?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "You should consider un-checking the Include physical value checkbox." }, { "label": "B", "text": "You should consider checking the Include physical value checkbox." }, { "label": "C", "text": "You should consider un-checking the Accrue liability on product receipt checkbox." }, { "label": "D", "text": "You should consider checking the Accrue liability on product receipt checkbox." } ], "answer": "D" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 8, "stem": "A manufacturing establishment makes use of a Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management system. To accelerate setup, they use bill of materials (BOM) templates. Which of the following is TRUE with regards to template BOMs? (Choose all that apply.)", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "You can only apply a single template BOM to a service object." }, { "label": "B", "text": "You can apply many template BOMs to a service object." }, { "label": "C", "text": "You can modify or delete lines in a BOM template regardless of whether the template has been associated to a service object, or not." }, { "label": "D", "text": "You can modify or delete lines in a BOM template as long as the template has not been associated to a service object." } ], "answer": "AD" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 9, "stem": "Your company makes use of a Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management system. After implementing warehouse locations, you are tasked with configuring location directives for inventory movement. You need to make use of a location directive that allows for the identification of similar items in the warehouse. Which of the following is the strategy you should use?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Match packing quantity" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Location aging FIFO" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Location aging LIFO" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Consolidate" } ], "answer": "D" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 10, "stem": "SIMULATION - Your company's distribution center supplies a large number of retail stores. After procuring a big shipment of a new line of products, you have been tasked with configuring buyer push functionality so that the product is equally distributed to the retail stores. You need to create the transfer order. Access the Dynamics 365 portal to achieve this goal. See explanation below. 1. Click Retail > Common > Replenishment > Buyer's push. 2. Press Ctrl+N or click New, and then, in the Description field, enter a description. 3. In the Site field, select a site, and then in the Warehouse field, select the warehouse to transfer products from. 4. On the Lines FastTab, click Added reference to add a single product to the transfer order, or click Add products to add multiple products. 5. Do one of the following: 6. To specify a total quantity for the transfer orders, enter the quantity in the Additional quantity to push field. The quantity must be less than the quantity in the Remaining available quantity to push field. The quantity that you enter is distributed proportionately among the products. 7. To manually specify a quantity for each product, enter each quantity in the Pushed quantity column. The quantity must be less than the quantity in the On hand column. 8. On the Warehouse FastTab, select one of the following distribution methods: 9. Replenishment rules ג Distribute quantities based on replenishment rules. 10.Location weight ג Distribute quantities based on the proportional weights that are assigned to the stores. 11.Fixed quantity for all ג Distribute quantities equally among the stores. 12.If you selected Location weight or Fixed quantity for all, you can select a hierarchy of stores in the Replenishment hierarchy field. These are the stores that will receive the transferred products. 13.To distribute the products to only the stores that have the products in their assortments, select the Respect assortments check box. 14.Regardless of the distribution method you select, one transfer order is created for each store. 15.To update quantities, click Calculate quantities. 16.To create the transfer orders, click Create order. 17.To view the orders, on the Warehouse FastTab, select a store in the list, and then click Order. Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamicsax-2012/appuser-itpro/use-buyer-s-push-to-distribute-products", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 11, "stem": "You need to consider the underlined segment to establish whether it is accurate. A quarantine order that a status of Started, means that the item is not yet in the quarantine warehouse.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "No adjustment required." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Created" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Reported as finished" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Ended" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 12, "stem": "You need to consider the underlined segment to establish whether it is accurate. Inventory adjustment journals allow for adding cost to an item when you add inventory, and then automatically posts the additional cost to be a specific general ledger account.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "No adjustment required." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Tag counting" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Movement" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Transfer" } ], "answer": "A" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 13, "stem": "Your company makes use of a Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management system. You are tasked with amending inventory. Additionally, the existing item posting configuration must be overridden. You make use of the inventory adjustment journal. Does the action achieve your objective?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes, it does" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No, it does not" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 14, "stem": "Your company makes use of a Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management system. You are tasked with amending inventory. Additionally, the existing item posting configuration must be overridden. You make use of the counting journal. Does the action achieve your objective?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes, it does" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No, it does not" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 15, "stem": "Your company makes use of a Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management system. You are tasked with amending inventory. Additionally, the existing item posting configuration must be overridden. You make use of the movement journal. Does the action achieve your objective?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes, it does" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No, it does not" } ], "answer": "A" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 16, "stem": "Your company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage its warehouse. Users report that the inventory for several items in the warehouse is inaccurate. You are required to ensure that users in the warehouse can verify and rectify the on-hand inventory. Which of the following actions should you take?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "You should implement the production input journal type." }, { "label": "B", "text": "You should implement the movement journal type." }, { "label": "C", "text": "You should implement the counting journal type." }, { "label": "D", "text": "You should implement the item arrival journal type. C Counting journals let you correct the current on-hand inventory that is registered for items or groups of items, and then post the actual physical count, so that you can make the adjustments that are required to reconcile the differences. Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/inventory/inventory-journals" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 17, "stem": "A corporation has two subsidiary businesses, set up as separate legal entities. The one business will be purchasing a new item from the other, and has negotiated for a discount for the first six months of the deal. You are required to make sure that system will apply the discount for the time stipulated. Which of the following is the type of agreement you should configure?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Sale Agreement." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Service Agreement." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Purchase Agreement." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Trade Agreement." } ], "answer": "D" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 18, "stem": "Your company makes use of a Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management system. You are in the process of configuring royalty agreement. You are currently identifying the royalty agreement ledger accounts. Which two of the following ledger accounts should be identified?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Accounts receivable" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Accrual" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Inventory" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Expense" } ], "answer": "BD" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 19, "stem": "Your company makes use of a Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management system. You are in the process of configuring royalty agreement. You need to make sure that royalty claim is generated every time a sales order is fulfilled. Which two of the following is the option you should choose for the Cumulate sales by field?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Invoice" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Fulfilled" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Active" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Shipped" } ], "answer": "A" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 20, "stem": "Your company manages sales projections via Dynamics 365 Sales. You are creating a customer record for a new customer in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. You have to make use of a current quote to generate a sales order. You are preparing to define the customer, and create the sales order. Which of the following is a combination of the actions you should take?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "You should create Customer from Lead, and confirm the quote." }, { "label": "B", "text": "You should convert Lead to Customer, and confirm the sales order." }, { "label": "C", "text": "You should create Customer from Lead, and confirm the sales order." }, { "label": "D", "text": "You should convert Lead to Customer, and confirm the quote." } ], "answer": "D" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 21, "stem": "SIMULATION - You work for a distribution warehouse that makes use of a Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management system. As soon as lines are automatically released to the warehouse, the warehouse completes work. You want to make sure that waves allow for automatic work creation. Access the Dynamics 365 portal to achieve this goal. See explanation below. 1. Go to Navigation pane > Modules > Warehouse management > Setup > Waves > Wave templates. 2. Select New. 3. In the Wave template name field, type a value. 4. In the Wave template description field, type a value. 5. In the Site field, enter or select a value 6. In the Warehouse field, enter or select a value. 7. Set the Automate wave creation field to Yes. Select this option to automatically create a wave when a sales order, production order, or kanban is released to the warehouse. 8. Set the Process wave at release to warehouse option to Yes. Select this option to automatically process the wave and create work when a line is released to the warehouse. 9. Set the Automate wave release option to Yes. Select this option to automatically release the wave. The picking work is created and made available on mobile devices. 10.Set the Assign to open waves option to Yes. Lines are assigned to waves based on the query filter for the wave template. 11.Set the Process wave automatically at threshold option to Yes. Select this option to automatically process the wave when its values reach the thresholds for weight, shipment, and lines specified in the Wave thresholds field group. This option is available only if Shipping is selected in the Wave template type field. 12.Set the Automate replenishment work release option to Yes. Select this option to create demand-based replenishment work and release it automatically. You must add the replenishment wave method to the wave template, and create a replenishment template using the Wave demand type. 13.Use settings in the Default values filed group to assign wave attributes. 14.Expand the Methods section and set the actions taken by the wave template. 15.Select Save. 16.Close the page. 17.Go to Warehouse management > Setup > Warehouse management parameters. 18.Expand the Wave processing section. 19.In the Wave processing batch group field, enter or select a value. 19.In the Wave processing batch group field, enter or select a value. 20.Set the Process waves in batch option to Yes. 21.In the Wait for lock (ms) field, enter a number. Enter the time, in milliseconds, that an allocation step will wait for a system resource that is locked by another allocation step. When this time is exceeded, the wave is not processed and an error message is displayed. 22.Select Save. 23.Close the page. 24.Go to Navigation pane > Modules > Production control > Setup > Production control parameters. 25.In the Release to warehouse field, select an option. 26.Close the page. Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/warehousing/tasks/configure-wave-processing", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 22, "stem": "You work for a shipping concern that make use of a Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management system. The business makes use of quite a few freight transporters. The cost of the freight is determined by the distance travelled between the source and the destination. Which two of the following transportation management engines should you include?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Freight bill type" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Mileage" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Zone" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Rate" }, { "label": "E", "text": "Transit time engine" } ], "answer": "BD" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 23, "stem": "You work for a distribution warehouse that makes use of a Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management system. After taking in a sizable quantity of stock that has a limited shelf life, you are required to distribute the stock to retail outlets at the earliest opportunity. You plan to make use of Buyer's push. Which of the following is the option you should take?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "You should generate a sales order." }, { "label": "B", "text": "You should generate transfer orders." }, { "label": "C", "text": "You should generate service agreements." }, { "label": "D", "text": "You should generate trade agreements." } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 24, "stem": "You have been tasked with configuring inventory cycle counting for a client that makes use of Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. You need to make of a cycle counting method that allows a worker to count items in a warehouse location at any time, without creating cycle counting work. Which of the following is the option you should use?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "User directed" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Cycle count grouping" }, { "label": "C", "text": "System directed" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Spot cycle counting D Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/warehousing/cycle-counting" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 25, "stem": "You work for a distribution company that makes use of a Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management system. You are responsible for planning. When you notice that planned orders for a specific item is increasing, you plan to track the source of the planned orders and release them according to their demand. You want to make sure that a unique planned purchase order is created by the master planning batch job for each new demand requirement for the item. You configure the use of the Per period coverage code as the lot-sizing method. Does the action achieve your objective?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes, it does" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No, it does not B Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/master-planning/coverage-settings" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 26, "stem": "You work for a distribution company that makes use of a Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management system. You are responsible for planning. When you notice that planned orders for a specific item is increasing, you plan to track the source of the planned orders and release them according to their demand. You want to make sure that a unique planned purchase order is created by the master planning batch job for each new demand requirement for the item. You configure the use of the Min/Max coverage code lot-sizing method. Does the action achieve your objective?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes, it does" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No, it does not" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 27, "stem": "You work for a distribution company that makes use of a Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management system. You are responsible for planning. When you notice that planned orders for a specific item is increasing, you plan to track the source of the planned orders and release them according to their demand. You want to make sure that a unique planned purchase order is created by the master planning batch job for each new demand requirement for the item. You configure the use of the Per requirement coverage code lot-sizing method. Does the action achieve your objective?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes, it does" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No, it does not" } ], "answer": "A" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 28, "stem": "You make use of planning optimization in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management, with automatic firming enabled. As a result of certain planned purchase orders not firming according to plan, inventory planners have to process planned purchase orders manually. You want to make sure that the planned purchase orders are incorporated in automatic firming. You access the Records to include FastTab. Does the action achieve your objective?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes, it does" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No, it does not" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 29, "stem": "You make use of planning optimization in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management, with automatic firming enabled. As a result of certain planned purchase orders not firming according to plan, inventory planners have to process planned purchase orders manually. You want to make sure that the planned purchase orders are incorporated in automatic firming. You configure the Automatic firming time fence (days). Does the action achieve your objective?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes, it does" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No, it does not" } ], "answer": "A" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 30, "stem": "You make use of planning optimization in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management, with automatic firming enabled. As a result of certain planned purchase orders not firming according to plan, inventory planners have to process planned purchase orders manually. You want to make sure that the planned purchase orders are incorporated in automatic firming. You configure the Lead Time. Does the action achieve your objective?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes, it does" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No, it does not" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 31, "stem": "SIMULATION - You work for a manufacturing firm that makes use of a Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management system. You have been tasked with making sure that inventory of certain finished good items never reaches critically low levels. You also want production orders to be created automatically when inventory reaches a specific level. Access the Dynamics 365 portal to achieve this goal. See explanation below. Create a new safety stock journal name 1. In the Navigation pane, go to Master planning > Setup > Safety stock journal names. 2. Click New. 3. In the Name field, type 'Material'. 4. In the Description field, type 'Material'. 5. Close the page. Create a safety stock journal - 1. In the Navigation pane, go to Master planning > Master planning > Run > Safety stock calculation. 2. Click New. 3. In the Name field, enter or select a value. Select the safety stock journal name that you created, for example, Material. 4. Click Create lines. 5. In the From date field, enter a date. 6. In the To date field, enter a date. 7. Click OK. This will create lines for the dimensions that have inventory transactions. Calculate proposal - 1. Click Calculate proposal. 2. Select the Use average issue during lead time option. 3. Set Multiplication factor to '10'. The Multiply factor is used to adjust the proposal. Because demo data only has a few transactions, you will need to set the factor to get a realistic proposal. 4. Click OK. Scroll down to find M0002 and M0003. View the Calculated minimum quantity column. Update minimum quantity - 1. In the New minimum quantity field, enter a number. Update the New minimum quantity to match the value in the Calculated minimum quantity. If the Calculated minimum is zero, you can enter the desired future value. For example, you can enter the Calculated minimum Calculated minimum is zero, you can enter the desired future value. For example, you can enter the Calculated minimum quantity in this field for M0002 that has warehouse 12. 2. In the list, find and select the desired record. For example, you can select M0002 that has warehouse 12. 3. In the New minimum quantity field, enter a number. Update the New minimum quantity to match the value in the Calculated minimum quantity. If the Calculated minimum is zero you can enter the desired future value. Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/production-control/tasks/use-safety-stock-journal-update- minimum-coverage", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 32, "stem": "You are making use of planning optimization in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. When a planning optimization job, which is configured with the wrong runtime filters, is accidentally triggered from the user interface, you are tasked with fixing the problem. Which of the following actions should you take?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "You should access the plan history to cancel the job." }, { "label": "B", "text": "You should access the dialog box to cancel the job." }, { "label": "C", "text": "You should access the plan history to rectify runtime filters." }, { "label": "D", "text": "You should access the dialog box to rectify runtime filters. A Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/master-planning/planning-optimization/cancel-planning-job" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 33, "stem": "You work for a distribution company that makes use of a Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management system. In an effort to improve the consistency of forecasting data, you plan to employ demand forecasting. You have to make sure that your strategy allows for planned orders to be created automatically in the master planning process according to the need or end date. Which of the following actions should you take?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "You should push data into the staging table." }, { "label": "B", "text": "You should make use of safety stock calculations." }, { "label": "C", "text": "You should generate a statistical baseline forecast." }, { "label": "D", "text": "You should make use of demand forecast details. C Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/master-planning/introduction-demand-forecasting https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/master-planning/manual-adjustments-baseline-forecast" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 34, "stem": "You work for a distribution company that makes use of a Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management system. You are responsible for planning. You want to make use of a planning engine that allows for orders to be firmed automatically according to the order date. Which of the following is the option you would use?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Capacity planning" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Production planning" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Planning Optimization" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Master planning" } ], "answer": "C" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 35, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company obtains packaging cartons in metric tons and sells them as individual items. The packaging cartons come in various sizes and are maintained as product variants. You need to configure unit conversion for the packaging cartons. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Enable unit of measure conversions in the product master. Configure the standard unit conversion feature in the Organization administration module." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Disable unit of measure conversions in the product master. Configure the inter-class unit conversion feature in the Organization administration module." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Enable unit of measure conversions in the product master. Configure the standard unit conversion feature in the released products." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Enable unit of measure conversions in the product master. Configure the intra-class unit conversion feature in the released products." } ], "answer": "C" }, { "topic": 1, "question_num": 36, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company obtains packaging cartons in metric tons and sells them as individual items. The packaging cartons come in various sizes and are maintained as product variants. You need to configure unit conversion for the packaging cartons. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Enable unit of measure conversions in the product master. Configure the standard unit conversion feature in the Organization administration module." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Enable unit of measure conversions in the product master. Configure the inter-class unit conversion feature in the released product." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Enable unit of measure conversions in the product master. Configure the standard unit conversion feature in the released products." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Enable unit of measure conversions in the product master. Configure the intra-class unit conversion feature in the released product." } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 1, "stem": "A company creates several item costing versions. All new and existing items have costs associated with them. After defining the costs, the company notices the activation date has not been updated. You need to update the items to the current date for activation. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Set the item cost record status to Active" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Set the form date to today and leave the item cost record status at Pending" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Set the item cost record status to Pending" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Set the cost price and date of price on the released product A Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/unified-operations/supply-chain/cost-management/costing-versions" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 2, "stem": "An employee at a company releases a new product from the Released product maintenance workspace. An employee in another department is unable to add the product to a sales order. You determine that dimension groups have not been applied to the product. You need to ensure that the product can be added to the sales order. Which two inventory dimension groups should you add to the product? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Tracking dimension group" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Coverage group" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Product dimension group" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Storage dimension group" } ], "answer": "AD" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 3, "stem": "DRAG DROP - You are the product manager at a distribution company. You are responsible for managing product compliance standards and reporting. Chemical product C0001 can be sold in all parts of the United States except for the state of California. You need to set up these compliance requirements for C0001. Which four actions should be performed in sequence? To answer, move the appropriate actions from the list of actions to the answer area and arrange them in the correct order. Select and Place:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 4, "stem": "An employee at a company needs to lay out the various component to build custom bicycles. You need to identify which constraints the employee should use to set up the bicycles. Which two types of constraints the employee use? Each correct answer presents a complete solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "table constraints that are used generically among product configuration models" }, { "label": "B", "text": "expression constraints that are used generically among product configuration models" }, { "label": "C", "text": "expression constraints that are unique to each product configuration model" }, { "label": "D", "text": "table constraints that are always unique to each product configuration model AC References: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/unified-operations/supply-chain/pim/expression-constraints-table- constraints-product-configuration-models" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 5, "stem": "HOTSPOT - You are configuring pricing for a new item. Wholesale customers must pay $10.00 for order quantities of up to 9 units. All other customers receive a static price of $14.00 regardless of quantity. You need to configure sales trade agreements. In Trade Agreement Setup, which actions should you perform? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area: References: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/unified-operations/supply-chain/sales-marketing/tasks/create-new-trade- agreement", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 6, "stem": "HOTSPOT - . An airport uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. You purchase new baggage-sorting hardware You must add both the hardware and the service contract for the hardware to the product hierarchy. You need to configure the category node. What should you do? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 7, "stem": "A company manufactures and sells speaker boxes. The speaker boxes can be silver or black with a basic or upgraded wiring harness assembly. The speaker box must be created in the item master so that the variables for colors and harness type can be assigned at order entry. You need to create a new item that supports multiple variables. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Create a new product. Select predefined variant as the configuration technology." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Create a new product master. Select constraint-based configuration as the configuration technology." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Create a new product. Select constraint-based configuration as the configuration technology." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Create a new product master. Select predefined variant as the configuration technology." } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 8, "stem": "A company has items in inventory with two costing methods: FIFO and Standard. The company needs to calculate the cost of all items at month end and provide a total inventory value to the finance department. You need to determine the total value of inventory. Which costing method requires running the inventory close?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "FIFO and Standard Cost items" }, { "label": "B", "text": "FIFO items only" }, { "label": "C", "text": "LIFO, Moving Average, and Date Weighted Average items" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Standard Cost items only" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 9, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. You are the purchasing manager at a manufacturing company that makes audio equipment. You sign an agreement with a vendor to purchase 5,000 speaker cables, item C0001, at a discounted rate of $3.00 per cable. This agreement expires in exactly one year. You need to set up pricing information and track the fulfillment of the agreement. Solution: \u0000 Create a purchase agreement of type Product value commitment. \u0000 Add a line for item C0001. \u0000 Enter a product value of $15,000 and enter an expiration date of one year. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 10, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. You are the purchasing manager at a manufacturing company that makes audio equipment. You sign an agreement with a vendor to purchase 5,000 speaker cables, item C0001, at a discounted rate of $3.00 per cable. This agreement expires in exactly one year. You need to set up pricing information and track the fulfillment of the agreement. Solution: On the released product, set a price of $3.00. Add the vendor to the vendor account field on the Purchase fast tab. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No B References: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/procurement/purchase-agreements" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 11, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. You are the purchasing manager at a manufacturing company that makes audio equipment. You sign an agreement with a vendor to purchase 5,000 speaker cables, item C0001, at a discounted rate of $3.00 per cable. This agreement expires in exactly one year. You need to set up pricing information and track the fulfillment of the agreement. Solution: Create a purchase agreement for the vendor that specifies a product quantity commitment. Include the quantity, the price, and the expiration date. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No" } ], "answer": "A" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 12, "stem": "A distribution company wants to set up barcodes in their Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management system for warehouse scanning. Barcodes will be entered manually. You need to minimize the risk of errors on barcode entry. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Create a new barcode, enter the value, select the type, and enter the mask." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Select an item, select the barcode type, select max length, and enter the value." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Select an item and set up security on the barcode field." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Create a new barcode, enter the value, select the type, and enter the size and max length." } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 13, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management for purchasing and sales operations across three different sites. The default order settings for products are configured as shown in the following table. You need to determine which scenarios allow transactions. Which transactions are allowed? To answer, drag the appropriate allowed options to the correct scenarios. Each allowed option may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Select and Place: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/production-control/default-order-settings", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 14, "stem": "A company sells jars of sliced or whole pickles. The company produces jars of various sizes. You need to set up the item to ensure that pickles have a single item number for all container sizes. What are two possible ways to achieve this goal? Each correct answer presents a complete solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Setup the size, color, and style in each legal entity. Go to the products form, create a new product and assign it to each dimension." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Create a new product master with predefined variant configuration technology and release to the legal entities. Use the product dimensions to define the size, color, and style." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Create and release a product to the legal entities. Use the storage dimensions to define the size, color, and style." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Create a new product master with dimension-based configuration technology and release to the legal entities. Use the configuration to define the size, color, and style. BD Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/pim/product-identifiers" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 15, "stem": "A company manufactures street, mountain, and racing bicycles. The company wants to use product variants to control bicycle configuration. You need to configure the bicycles in the system. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Create mountain, street, and racing bicycles as separate configuration models." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Use one item number for all types of bicycles. Use a separate configuration number for each type of bicycle." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Use different item numbers for mountain, street, and racing bicycles." } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 16, "stem": "A company implements the Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management procurement module. During testing, you observe that no transactions are posted to the product receipt journal when an item is received. You need to configure the system to show the appropriate transactions in the product receipt journal. Which two actions should you perform? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "On the Item group setup form, enter account information in the Purchase, accrual and Purchase expenditure, un-invoiced account fields." }, { "label": "B", "text": "On the Item model group setup form, select Include physical value." }, { "label": "C", "text": "On the Item group setup form, enter account information in the Purchase, accrual and Purchase expenditure for product fields." }, { "label": "D", "text": "On the Item model group setup form, select Accrue liability on product receipt." } ], "answer": "AD" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 17, "stem": "SIMULATION - You are a functional consultant for a company named Contoso Entertainment System USA (USMF). You plan to trade a product named Professional Speaker Cable in the color gray. You need to release all the available variants of Professional Speaker Cable in gray. To complete this task, sign in to Dynamics 365 portal. See explanation below. 1. Click Product information management > Common > Products > Product masters. 2. Select a product master, and then click Release products in the Product authorization group on the Action Pane. 3. Select all product variants in the Product variants group for the color gray. 4. Leave the defaults on the Select companies link. 5. Click OK to open the Product release session batch dialog box. 6. Select the Show Infolog upon failure check box to be notified if the release is not completed. 7. If the product master of the variants has not already been released to the company, select the Include product master check box. Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamicsax-2012/appuser-itpro/key-tasks-release-products", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 18, "stem": "SIMULATION - You are a functional consultant for a company named Contoso Entertainment System USA (USMF). You need to post a new trade agreement that will contain the following prices: \u0000 Surface Pro 128GB: 750 US dollars for orders of 50 units or less \u0000 Surface Pro 128GB: 720 US dollars for orders from 50 units to 100 units The agreement must be valid for the 2020 calendar year only. To complete this task, sign in to Dynamics 365 portal. See explanation below. 1. Go to Navigation pane > Modules > Sales and marketing > Prices and discounts > Trade agreement journals. 2. Click New. 3. In the Name field, click the drop-down button to open the lookup. 4. In the list, select S_Price (Sales Price Adjustment). 5. On Action Pane, click Lines. 6. In the Account code, select 'All' (for All customers) 7. In the Item code field, select 'Table'. This will allow you to select a specific item. 8. In the Item relation field, click the drop-down button to open the lookup. 9. Select the Surface Pro 128GB. 10.In the From field, enter a minimum quantity (1). 11.In the To field, enter a maximum quantity (50). 12.In the Amount in currency field, enter a price (750) and select US Dollars in the Currency field. 13.Configure another price bracket with a minimum of 51 units, a maximum of 100 units and a price of 720 US Dollars. 14.Under the Details section, in the From date field, enter a date from which this agreement will be valid (January 1 2020). st 15.In the To date field, enter a date to which this agreement will be valid (December 31 2020). st 16.Click Save. 17.Click Validate. 18.Click Validate selected lines. 19.Click OK. 20.Click Post. 21.Click OK. 21.Click OK. Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/sales-marketing/tasks/create-new-trade-agreement", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 19, "stem": "SIMULATION - You are a functional consultant for a company named Contoso Entertainment System USA (USMF). You need to copy the bill of materials (BOM) of item number T0012 to a new BOM. To complete this task, sign in to Dynamics 365 portal. See explanation below. 1. Open item number T0012. 2. Go to Engineer >BOM>Lines and select the BOM for the item. 3. Click on Create BOM. 4. Select the Copy option. 5. Ensure the Add option is selected to create a new BOM rather than overwrite the existing BOM. 6. Click OK.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 20, "stem": "A company creates a new bill of materials (BOMs). The company subcontracts with a vendor to manufacture one component for the BOM. You need to ensure that only the production manager is permitted to approve BOMs. Which two actions should you perform? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Assign security permissions to approve the BOM version but not the related BOM." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Assign security permissions to the user for the approval form." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Assign security permissions to the Vendor portal." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Set up the approver as a vendor." }, { "label": "E", "text": "Set up the approver as an employee. BE" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 21, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. You are the purchasing manager at a manufacturing company that makes audio equipment. You sign an agreement with a vendor to purchase 5,000 speaker cables, item C0001, at a discounted rate of $3.00 per cable. This agreement expires in exactly one year. You need to set up pricing information and track the fulfillment of the agreement. Solution: \u0000 Create a trade agreement journal of type Price (purch.). \u0000 Add a line for item C0001 for the vendor. \u0000 Enter a unit price of $3,00 for a quantity up to 5,000 and enter an expiration date for next year. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 22, "stem": "You are implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management for a company that uses bill of materials (BOM) templates to expedite setup in the system. A line must be removed from the BOM, but the system does not allow this. You need to determine why you are unable to perform this deletion. Why are you unable to delete the line?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "The BOM template version has already been saved." }, { "label": "B", "text": "The local version of the BOM template has been associated to a service object." }, { "label": "C", "text": "The local version of the BOM template has been modified." }, { "label": "D", "text": "The BOM template has been associated to a service object. D Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/service-management/template-boms" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 23, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company is designing a new bicycle by using a dimension-based Bill of materials (BOM). The configuration groups have been defined and created. You need to set up a BOM for the new bicycle. Which four actions should you perform in sequence? To answer, move the appropriate actions from the list of actions to the answer area and arrange them in the correct order. Select and Place: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/pim/dimension-based-product-configuration", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 24, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company obtains packaging cartons in metric tons and sells them as individual items. The packaging cartons come in various sizes and are maintained as product variants. You need to configure unit conversion for the packaging cartons. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Enable unit of measure conversions in the product master. Configure the intra-class unit conversion feature in the Organization administration module." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Disable unit of measure conversions in the product master. Configure the inter-class unit conversion feature in the Organization administration module." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Enable unit of measure conversions in the product master. Configure the inter-class unit conversion feature in the released products." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Enable unit of measure conversions in the product master. Configure the intra-class unit conversion feature in the released products." } ], "answer": "C" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 25, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company needs to maintain item bar codes. You need to set up bar codes for the items. Which option should you use for each requirement? To answer, drag the appropriate options to the correct requirements. Each option may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Select and Place: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamicsax-2012/appuser-itpro/use-bar-codes-in-warehouse-operations", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 26, "stem": "A company that has two legal entities is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Products do not contain variants. One legal entity will use advanced warehouse management and the other legal entity will not use it. The same product will be sold in both legal entities but require different setup due to the warehousing requirements. You need to set up the product in both legal entities without duplicating efforts or item numbers. Which method should you use?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "released product data entity" }, { "label": "B", "text": "product master" }, { "label": "C", "text": "released product" }, { "label": "D", "text": "item template" }, { "label": "E", "text": "product E" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 27, "stem": "DRAG DROP - You create and maintain items in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. You create a product master named S`\"001 for metal screws. Screws come in three different lengths and two styles. You want to release only five of the six possible combinations. You need to set up variants for the screw. Which three actions should you perform in sequence? To answer, move the appropriate actions from the list of actions to the answer area and arrange them in the correct order. Select and Place: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/pim/tasks/create-predefined-product-variants", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 28, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company does not use variants and sells items only out of a single legal entity. You need to configure the system to avoid unnecessary product creation overhead. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Create a released product master" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Create a personal template for unreleased products" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Create a released product" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Create an unreleased product and release the product" }, { "label": "E", "text": "Create a shared template for unreleased products" } ], "answer": "C" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 29, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Inventory value is standard and updated only once per year. The company wants to convert costing from standard to moving average. You need to convert the items from standard to moving average. Which three actions must you perform? Each answer presents a partial solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Change the Item Group" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Adjust the inventory quantity to zero" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Adjust the inventory cost to zero" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Run inventory close" }, { "label": "E", "text": "Change the Item Model Group BCE" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 30, "stem": "A company needs to create new items that can be company owned or vendor owned. You need to create and set up the items so that they can be used as company owned or consignment. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Assign a non-stock service item model group" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Assign a moving average costing inventory model" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Activate batch dimension and assign a standard costing inventory model" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Activate owner dimension and assign a standard costing inventory model" } ], "answer": "D" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 31, "stem": "DRAG DROP - You manage a Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management system for a company. You need to configure agreements in the system. Which agreement types should you use? To answer, drag the appropriate agreement types to the appropriate scenarios. Each agreement type may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Select and Place:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 32, "stem": "A company uses trade agreements for their customers. Prices for some customers must round to the nearest US dollar. A customer reports that prices do not round to the nearest US dollar as required. You need to resolve the issue. In Trade agreement journals, which option should you use?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Adjustment" }, { "label": "B", "text": "View smart rounding" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Validate all lines" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Apply smart rounding" } ], "answer": "D" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 33, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company manufactures wood furniture. Customers can purchase cabinets on sales orders. Customer can select different wood finishes including oak and maple. You need to configure a product attribute to characterize the types of cabinet finishes. Which three actions should you perform in sequence? To answer, move the appropriate actions from the list of actions to the answer area and arrange them in the correct order. Select and Place: References: References: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/unified-operations/retail/attribute-attributegroups-lifecycle", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 34, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to sell automobile tires. The company sells different models of tires. Each model is available in different diameter sizes. The combination of a model and its diameter represents an individual stock keeping unit (SKU). The manufacturer’s suggested retail price (MSRP) and purchase prices can vary between variants. The purchase price for the variants will change over time, but the MSRP will never change once it is configured. All price changes must be documented systematically. The MSRP must be the default selling price for the item if no other pricing is available. You need to configure the prices for the tires. Which configurations should you use? To answer, drag the appropriate configurations to the correct requirements. Each configuration may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 35, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A cosmetics company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. You configure a single legal entity. Items must be created for a new product line of lipsticks. The lipsticks will have similar characteristics and will be sold in two sizes: trial size and full size. The lipsticks will also have colors and product lines assigned to item numbers. Each lipstick must be assigned a unique item number. Historically, users manually entered items for new product lines and incorrectly and inconsistently set up the associated values. You need to define the setup for the items and configurations. What should you configure? To answer, drag the appropriate configurations to the correct requirements. Each configuration may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 36, "stem": "DRAG DROP - An energy sustainability company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company sells raw materials to contractors working on a pipeline project by using special pricing. The company plans to sell raw materials to non-pipeline contractors; however, those sales will not be eligible for the special pricing, any discounts, or price breaks. The non-pipeline contractor pricing may change over time. The price history must be retained. You need to configure the system for the pricing requirements. What should you configure? To answer, drag the appropriate configurations to the correct pricings. Each configuration may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 37, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company has two sites at ports of entry, one in Atlanta and one in San Francisco. Due to supply chain constraints and cost fluctuations, the company must change from one standard cost for all products to two standard cost structures, one for Atlanta and one for San Francisco. A costing manager for each site will manage and approve the costing. The historical costs must be retained for analytical purposes. Costs are revised annually. You need to configure the system. What should you configure? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 38, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A manufacturing company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company wants to change inventory valuation to standard costing. Manufactured items must have an active cost breakdown in total but still capture the variance amount on any production substitutions. You need to define the inventory management parameters. Which inventory parameter options should you use? To answer, drag the appropriate options to the correct parameters. Each option may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 39, "stem": "A caulking manufacturer is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. When caulking is produced, it is sold by tubes, 1-gallon cans, 5-gallon buckets, 55-gallon drums, or 330-gallon totes with potential to add other sizes. The manufacturer wants to ensure that when new units are added, only one conversion is set up that does not require conversions between each unit of measure. You need to configure the unit of measure to meet the requirement. What should you use?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Unit class" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Conversion formula" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Formula layout" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Base unit" } ], "answer": "D" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 40, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management in one legal entity that contains one site, which contains Warehouse1 and Warehouse2. A customer routinely orders an item that the company usually stocks in Warehouse1. The customer requires the company to ship orders from Warehouse2 due to shipping cost agreements. You need to configure the system to meet the request. Which configuration should you set up?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Set the item default order settings to Warehouse1 only." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Set the customer default to Warehouse1 and set the item default order settings to Warehouse2." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Set the customer default to Warehouse2 and the item default order settings to Warehouse1." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Set the customer default to Warehouse1 and set the item default order settings to Warehouse1." }, { "label": "E", "text": "Set the customer default to Warehouse2 only." } ], "answer": "C" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 41, "stem": "A company is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company manages inventory by using a just-in-time approach. A purchase order arrives for an item. The system must allow sales order shipments of the item to be posted before the purchase order invoice is received. You must ensure that the item model group configuration allows for shipment of the items. Which parameter should you enable?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Physical negative inventory" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Registration requirements" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Include physical value" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Financial negative inventory" }, { "label": "E", "text": "Location profile negative inventory" } ], "answer": "D" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 42, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company uses a Business Unit financial dimension. The dimension is required on items and posted on transactions. The company wants to update item costs but exclude the required financial dimension. The change must include a warning to users before the update. The costing method should be calculated based on the expected, calculated cost to produce an item. You must configure the system to meet the requirements. Which actions should you perform? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 43, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. You create a product by using an incorrect product dimension group. The product has not yet been released to the legal entities. You need to determine whether you can change the product dimension group. Which two conditions must be met? Each answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Dimensions must not be specified for the product master." }, { "label": "B", "text": "The item must not already be validated." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Dimensions must be specified that match the original but not the new product dimension group." }, { "label": "D", "text": "The product master must not be released to any legal entities." } ], "answer": "AD" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 44, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A distribution company that uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management values inventory through standard cost. The company does not manufacture any products. Some items require incremental updates to the standard cost. The original costs must be retained for reporting purposes. You need to update the standard costs of the items. What should you configure? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 45, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company uses subcontracted services on its bills of material (BOMs). You must set up and release a subcontractor item so that it can be included on the BOM and subcontractor charges are included in the BOM calculation. Because the subcontractor is a step included in a BOM but not a tangible item, inventory for the item must not be tracked in the warehouse. You need to set up the subcontractor item and release the item to the company. What should you configure? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 46, "stem": "A company is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management in one legal entity that contains Site1 and Site2. ItemA is a configured item, with configurations ConfigA and ConfigB. The business decides to stop buying ItemA ConfigB into Site2 but will still buy it at Site1. You must configure ItemA to ensure the buying rules are implemented. What should you configure?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Variant group" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Select product variants to release" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Variant suggestions" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Default order setting rules" } ], "answer": "D" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 47, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company obtains packaging cartons in metric tons and sells them as individual items. The packaging cartons come in various sizes and are maintained as product variants. You need to configure unit conversion for the packaging cartons. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Enable unit of measure conversions in the product master. Configure the intra-class unit conversion feature in the Organization administration module." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Disable unit of measure conversions in the product master. Configure the inter-class unit conversion feature in the Organization administration module." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Enable unit of measure conversions in the product master. Configure the standard unit conversion feature in the released products." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Disable unit of measure conversions in the product master. Configure the intra-class unit conversion feature in the released products." } ], "answer": "C" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 48, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. A large item fits only one item per pallet. A purchase order for the item must be a minimum of 24. Additional line quantities for the item must be in multiples of 24. An incorrect setup for the item allows entry of multiples of 50. This setup error causes purchase order entry overrides. You must configure the system to enforce a match of default quantities during setup. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Select the Strict option." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Select the Standard option." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Configure Warehouse management options." } ], "answer": "A" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 49, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A donut company is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company wants to set up and maintain formula items for donut production. If the formula quantity changes, all ingredients must automatically adjust with no manual edits. You must configure the formula features. Which features should you use? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 50, "stem": "DRAG DROP - Case study - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Trey Research is a multinational manufacturer of health and dietary supplements based in Seattle, Washington. The company is experiencing a rapid expansion not only in its supplements but as a lifestyle brand that also sells apparel. The supplements is experiencing a rapid expansion not only in its supplements but as a lifestyle brand that also sells apparel. The supplements and apparel businesses operate independently but manufacture and operate in the same legal entity. Current environment - Current environment. Technology Trey Research is migrating from an outdated, on-premises version of Dynamics AX to Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company wants to retain a lot of its current data structures and processes but adopt new efficiencies when the benefit is obvious. The company uses a third-party e-commerce site that is custom developed by an internal developer. Current environment. Items - Product numbering - All items are numbered by using a smart numbering format: [Product SKU+Size+Color+Style]. For reporting, items are queried for sales and inventory reports by using the first six digits of the item number or until the first dash is encountered. • A t-shirt could be 01001-S-Red for item 1001 in a size small with the color red. • A single energy drink could be 02001-12oz or 02001-20oz for the different sizes that product 02001 is sold in. Product attributes - • All clothing shares the same set of product attributes. • Supplements may share the same Product SKU but can have different attributes for the different size, color, or style variations of the product. • Product attributes that are unnecessary for an item should be excluded from the item. Pricing - • All items always have a default price. This price will not expire. • An item will have four different prices created for it every month, one for each customer tier, as detailed later in this section. The pricing expires at the end of the month. If no special pricing is created, the default item price will be used. • The monthly sales price in which the additional price breaks are determined is based on the estimated cost of the manufactured items. • Customers are categorized into four pricing tiers (A, B, C, and D) based on sales volume over the past 12 months. • Customers can negotiate special pricing for items in 30-day, 60-day, and 90-day increments. Quantity restrictions may be placed, depending on the item discount and promotion. • Promotional pricing is not used today. Pricing is restricted to monthly prices and customer-specific contract pricing. Cost - Items use a FIFO costing model today in their current Dynamics AX 2009 environment; however, using the FIFO costing method has created problems. Current environment. Warehouse and inventory • Warehouse requirements are simplistic. There is only one site. The site has two warehouses. • Trey Research needs to make sure that any energy drinks and nutritional supplements are manufactured and packaged with the highest standards. Trey Research automatically inspects products when all products are reported as finished. All products are inspected again when the items are picked. • Energy drinks require independent tests to check for dents in packaging, carbonation levels, and fill level. • Nutritional supplements require separate tests for packaging, expiration date, product seal, and product labeling. • Government compliancy and consistency testing are handled outside of the Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) system. • Resalable products are placed on one of two racks in the warehouse. Requirements - Requirements. Technology - • Trey Research will integrate all pricing and discount capabilities to its e-commerce website. Requirements. Items - • Reporting on products should be streamlined as much as possible. • The item numbering does not have to equate to the actual item number. • The future costing methods adopted must be commonly accepted for manufacturers. • Inventory costing should be done after a full inventory valuation is complete. It should take into consideration the direct materials, direct labor, and overhead that goes into an item. • Any costing method used needs the ability to track cost records about an item, cost categories, and calculation formulas for indirect costs. • The profitability for nutritional supplements manufacturing processes needs to be expressed in terms of the cost categories for routing operations and the calculation formulas for manufacturing overheads. • If a vendor can no longer deliver the raw materials for the energy drinks due to supply chain issues, the costs for using an alternative vendor to source the raw materials should be used to determine the impact on profits. • Apparel items will not be upgraded to the new costing method until after the go-live date due to resourcing and implementation limitations from the apparel team. Requirements. Pricing - • Trey Research plans to do promotional pricing. Certain products will receive special pricing during the hours of extreme sporting events that Trey Research sponsors. Before or after the event, normal pricing will resume. sporting events that Trey Research sponsors. Before or after the event, normal pricing will resume. Requirements. White labeling - • Trey Research wants to start white labeling its products under the brands of major nutritional retail store brands. These products would only be sold to specific customers. • Trey Research will provide and maintain a 'Compare to' price for customers to use to compare the white-labeled products. This Compare to price will also be the default item price for the customer if the customer accidentally lets a contract price expire. • The configuration of these restrictions must be applied automatically when creating new products for those customers. Requirements. Warehouse and inventory • If products in the warehouse must be blocked from transactions for a specific reason, such as a health and safety review, warehouse users should be able to block the products quickly from the ERP system. • All product quality tests should be processed in a uniform and consistent manner. • Creation of any quality processes for products inbound to the warehouse, from the production line, or outbound from the warehouse to consumers should be automatically created to facilitate execution. • Testing requirements: \u0000 Requirement 1: 100 percent of all nutritional supplements and 50 percent of all energy drinks must be tested when production orders are completed. After a product is in testing, 100 percent of all tests must be completed. \u0000 Requirement 2: 75 percent of all nutritional supplements and energy drinks should be tested against their required tests during an outbound process. \u0000 Damaged products must be placed in one of four bins (based on product type) during the inspection process. \u0000 You must define quarantine zones to optimize product visibility throughout the testing process. You need to determine the costing versions for the requirements. Which costing versions should you use? To answer, drag the appropriate costing versions to the correct requirements. Each costing version may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 51, "stem": "Case study - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Trey Research is a multinational manufacturer of health and dietary supplements based in Seattle, Washington. The company is experiencing a rapid expansion not only in its supplements but as a lifestyle brand that also sells apparel. The supplements and apparel businesses operate independently but manufacture and operate in the same legal entity. Current environment - Current environment. Technology - Current environment. Technology - Trey Research is migrating from an outdated, on-premises version of Dynamics AX to Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company wants to retain a lot of its current data structures and processes but adopt new efficiencies when the benefit is obvious. The company uses a third-party e-commerce site that is custom developed by an internal developer. Current environment. Items - Product numbering - All items are numbered by using a smart numbering format: [Product SKU+Size+Color+Style]. For reporting, items are queried for sales and inventory reports by using the first six digits of the item number or until the first dash is encountered. • A t-shirt could be 01001-S-Red for item 1001 in a size small with the color red. • A single energy drink could be 02001-12oz or 02001-20oz for the different sizes that product 02001 is sold in. Product attributes - • All clothing shares the same set of product attributes. • Supplements may share the same Product SKU but can have different attributes for the different size, color, or style variations of the product. • Product attributes that are unnecessary for an item should be excluded from the item. Pricing - • All items always have a default price. This price will not expire. • An item will have four different prices created for it every month, one for each customer tier, as detailed later in this section. The pricing expires at the end of the month. If no special pricing is created, the default item price will be used. • The monthly sales price in which the additional price breaks are determined is based on the estimated cost of the manufactured items. • Customers are categorized into four pricing tiers (A, B, C, and D) based on sales volume over the past 12 months. • Customers can negotiate special pricing for items in 30-day, 60-day, and 90-day increments. Quantity restrictions may be placed, depending on the item discount and promotion. • Promotional pricing is not used today. Pricing is restricted to monthly prices and customer-specific contract pricing. Cost - Items use a FIFO costing model today in their current Dynamics AX 2009 environment; however, using the FIFO costing method has created problems. Current environment. Warehouse and inventory • Warehouse requirements are simplistic. There is only one site. The site has two warehouses. • Trey Research needs to make sure that any energy drinks and nutritional supplements are manufactured and packaged with the highest standards. Trey Research automatically inspects products when all products are reported as finished. All products are inspected again when the items are picked. • Energy drinks require independent tests to check for dents in packaging, carbonation levels, and fill level. • Nutritional supplements require separate tests for packaging, expiration date, product seal, and product labeling. • Government compliancy and consistency testing are handled outside of the Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) system. • Resalable products are placed on one of two racks in the warehouse. Requirements - Requirements. Technology - • Trey Research will integrate all pricing and discount capabilities to its e-commerce website. Requirements. Items - • Reporting on products should be streamlined as much as possible. • The item numbering does not have to equate to the actual item number. • The future costing methods adopted must be commonly accepted for manufacturers. • Inventory costing should be done after a full inventory valuation is complete. It should take into consideration the direct materials, direct labor, and overhead that goes into an item. • Any costing method used needs the ability to track cost records about an item, cost categories, and calculation formulas for indirect costs. • The profitability for nutritional supplements manufacturing processes needs to be expressed in terms of the cost categories for routing operations and the calculation formulas for manufacturing overheads. • If a vendor can no longer deliver the raw materials for the energy drinks due to supply chain issues, the costs for using an alternative vendor to source the raw materials should be used to determine the impact on profits. • Apparel items will not be upgraded to the new costing method until after the go-live date due to resourcing and implementation limitations from the apparel team. Requirements. Pricing - • Trey Research plans to do promotional pricing. Certain products will receive special pricing during the hours of extreme sporting events that Trey Research sponsors. Before or after the event, normal pricing will resume. Requirements. White labeling - • Trey Research wants to start white labeling its products under the brands of major nutritional retail store brands. These products would only be sold to specific customers. • Trey Research will provide and maintain a 'Compare to' price for customers to use to compare the white-labeled products. This Compare to price will also be the default item price for the customer if the customer accidentally lets a contract price expire. • The configuration of these restrictions must be applied automatically when creating new products for those customers. Requirements. Warehouse and inventory • If products in the warehouse must be blocked from transactions for a specific reason, such as a health and safety review, warehouse users should be able to block the products quickly from the ERP system. • All product quality tests should be processed in a uniform and consistent manner. • All product quality tests should be processed in a uniform and consistent manner. • Creation of any quality processes for products inbound to the warehouse, from the production line, or outbound from the warehouse to consumers should be automatically created to facilitate execution. • Testing requirements: \u0000 Requirement 1: 100 percent of all nutritional supplements and 50 percent of all energy drinks must be tested when production orders are completed. After a product is in testing, 100 percent of all tests must be completed. \u0000 Requirement 2: 75 percent of all nutritional supplements and energy drinks should be tested against their required tests during an outbound process. \u0000 Damaged products must be placed in one of four bins (based on product type) during the inspection process. \u0000 You must define quarantine zones to optimize product visibility throughout the testing process. Trey Research is now live on Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. You need to apply the new cost model for the apparel items. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Run Inventory close." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Close all production orders." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Configure Backflush costing." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Run a BOM calculation." } ], "answer": "A" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 52, "stem": "HOTSPOT - Case study - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Trey Research is a multinational manufacturer of health and dietary supplements based in Seattle, Washington. The company is experiencing a rapid expansion not only in its supplements but as a lifestyle brand that also sells apparel. The supplements is experiencing a rapid expansion not only in its supplements but as a lifestyle brand that also sells apparel. The supplements and apparel businesses operate independently but manufacture and operate in the same legal entity. Current environment - Current environment. Technology Trey Research is migrating from an outdated, on-premises version of Dynamics AX to Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company wants to retain a lot of its current data structures and processes but adopt new efficiencies when the benefit is obvious. The company uses a third-party e-commerce site that is custom developed by an internal developer. Current environment. Items - Product numbering - All items are numbered by using a smart numbering format: [Product SKU+Size+Color+Style]. For reporting, items are queried for sales and inventory reports by using the first six digits of the item number or until the first dash is encountered. • A t-shirt could be 01001-S-Red for item 1001 in a size small with the color red. • A single energy drink could be 02001-12oz or 02001-20oz for the different sizes that product 02001 is sold in. Product attributes - • All clothing shares the same set of product attributes. • Supplements may share the same Product SKU but can have different attributes for the different size, color, or style variations of the product. • Product attributes that are unnecessary for an item should be excluded from the item. Pricing - • All items always have a default price. This price will not expire. • An item will have four different prices created for it every month, one for each customer tier, as detailed later in this section. The pricing expires at the end of the month. If no special pricing is created, the default item price will be used. • The monthly sales price in which the additional price breaks are determined is based on the estimated cost of the manufactured items. • Customers are categorized into four pricing tiers (A, B, C, and D) based on sales volume over the past 12 months. • Customers can negotiate special pricing for items in 30-day, 60-day, and 90-day increments. Quantity restrictions may be placed, depending on the item discount and promotion. • Promotional pricing is not used today. Pricing is restricted to monthly prices and customer-specific contract pricing. Cost - Items use a FIFO costing model today in their current Dynamics AX 2009 environment; however, using the FIFO costing method has created problems. Current environment. Warehouse and inventory • Warehouse requirements are simplistic. There is only one site. The site has two warehouses. • Trey Research needs to make sure that any energy drinks and nutritional supplements are manufactured and packaged with the highest standards. Trey Research automatically inspects products when all products are reported as finished. All products are inspected again when the items are picked. • Energy drinks require independent tests to check for dents in packaging, carbonation levels, and fill level. • Nutritional supplements require separate tests for packaging, expiration date, product seal, and product labeling. • Government compliancy and consistency testing are handled outside of the Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) system. • Resalable products are placed on one of two racks in the warehouse. Requirements - Requirements. Technology - • Trey Research will integrate all pricing and discount capabilities to its e-commerce website. Requirements. Items - • Reporting on products should be streamlined as much as possible. • The item numbering does not have to equate to the actual item number. • The future costing methods adopted must be commonly accepted for manufacturers. • Inventory costing should be done after a full inventory valuation is complete. It should take into consideration the direct materials, direct labor, and overhead that goes into an item. • Any costing method used needs the ability to track cost records about an item, cost categories, and calculation formulas for indirect costs. • The profitability for nutritional supplements manufacturing processes needs to be expressed in terms of the cost categories for routing operations and the calculation formulas for manufacturing overheads. • If a vendor can no longer deliver the raw materials for the energy drinks due to supply chain issues, the costs for using an alternative vendor to source the raw materials should be used to determine the impact on profits. • Apparel items will not be upgraded to the new costing method until after the go-live date due to resourcing and implementation limitations from the apparel team. Requirements. Pricing - • Trey Research plans to do promotional pricing. Certain products will receive special pricing during the hours of extreme sporting events that Trey Research sponsors. Before or after the event, normal pricing will resume. sporting events that Trey Research sponsors. Before or after the event, normal pricing will resume. Requirements. White labeling - • Trey Research wants to start white labeling its products under the brands of major nutritional retail store brands. These products would only be sold to specific customers. • Trey Research will provide and maintain a 'Compare to' price for customers to use to compare the white-labeled products. This Compare to price will also be the default item price for the customer if the customer accidentally lets a contract price expire. • The configuration of these restrictions must be applied automatically when creating new products for those customers. Requirements. Warehouse and inventory • If products in the warehouse must be blocked from transactions for a specific reason, such as a health and safety review, warehouse users should be able to block the products quickly from the ERP system. • All product quality tests should be processed in a uniform and consistent manner. • Creation of any quality processes for products inbound to the warehouse, from the production line, or outbound from the warehouse to consumers should be automatically created to facilitate execution. • Testing requirements: \u0000 Requirement 1: 100 percent of all nutritional supplements and 50 percent of all energy drinks must be tested when production orders are completed. After a product is in testing, 100 percent of all tests must be completed. \u0000 Requirement 2: 75 percent of all nutritional supplements and energy drinks should be tested against their required tests during an outbound process. \u0000 Damaged products must be placed in one of four bins (based on product type) during the inspection process. \u0000 You must define quarantine zones to optimize product visibility throughout the testing process. You need to configure the products for the requirements. Which configuration should you use? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 53, "stem": "DRAG DROP - Case study - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - School of Fine Art is a distribution company that sells school supply items to primary and secondary schools. These include items such as pens, pencils, paper, notebooks, chalk, desks, acrylic paints, blackboards, dry erase markers, and whiteboard items such as pens, pencils, paper, notebooks, chalk, desks, acrylic paints, blackboards, dry erase markers, and whiteboard paint. Due to increased demand for colored pencils, lead times are longer for these pencils. School of Fine Art plans to expand sales into this market. School of Fine Art plans to implement Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage the business. Current environment. Company structure School of Fine Art consists of two legal entities. Primary company - • Located in Dublin, Ireland. • Has a single named warehouse. • Is the primary distribution center for both companies. Second company - • Is located in Glasgow, Scotland. • Includes the following warehouses: Glasgow1, Glasgow2. ○ Glasgow1 is used primarily to supply items regionally. ○ Glasgow2 serves as local storage for vendor-owned inventory and bulk storage for School of Fine Art's inventory. Current environment. General processes School of Fine Art uses a combination of spreadsheets and paper forms to manage the business. • All sales, purchases, and inventory are tracked in spreadsheets that are password protected by managers. • Managers frequently share spreadsheet passwords so that other users can make edits on their behalf. Inventory quantities and values are unreliable. • The spreadsheets are often incorrectly updated, have entry errors, and broken formulas for calculations. • Purchase order receipts, picking lists, packing slips, and invoices are all handwritten on pre-printed, three-part forms. • Late summer is the company's busiest time. During this time, workers are typically on the warehouse floor or making rush deliveries to schools to meet last-minute needs. Current environment. Inventory and warehousing • School of Fine Art values inventory by using FIFO costing methods. • Inventory in the warehouses cannot be distinguished as available inventory or inventory that is sold to a customer and waiting to be picked. This creates inventory inflation during cycle counts and later shortages because warehouse workers count items that are already promised to customers and waiting to be shipped. • Glasgow2 space is fully allocated to vendors. • Due to space constraints, school orders for photocopiers are shipped from the vendor to the school. • Crayons are stored as separate item numbers depending on whether they are in a box or a case. This creates issues when counting inventory to determine the total number of crayons in stock. • Lack of inventory controls has led to shortages on sales orders, creating backorders and unhappy schools. • Inventory is ordered quarterly due to the seasonality of the business. • Items can change annually based on popular sizes, colors, and styles for each new school season. The creation of the different configurations is a manual process, which creates so much overhead that temporary workers are brought in to do the data entry. Current environment. Purchasing • Reordering is manually managed by the buyers looking at the seasonal spikes for the start of the school year, slowing around the end-of-year holidays until the following school year. • Pens are readily available products that are rarely discounted for sale. • Photocopiers are only available for sale on the Glasgow region. • Photocopy paper and construction paper are ordered by the pallet into Dublin1 and must be broken down into smaller sizes. The pallets are typically broken down and then split between what stays in Dublin1 and what is shipped to Glasgow1. • Chalk and blackboards are slower sellers, so many vendors do not carry these items. School of Fine Art purchases these products from a single vendor. There are no alternative vendors available. • School of Fine Art agrees to purchase a new line of smartboards from a vendor. The agreed-upon smartboard purchase prices will have a cost price per 55-inch, 75-inch, or 85-inch smartboard. • The company purchases pencils for the following warehouses: ○ Glasgow1: • standard pencils from Vendor A • colored pencils from Vendor B ○ Dublin1: • standard pencils from Vendor A • colored pencils from Vendor A • As whiteboard paint grows in popularity, so does the demand. This causes supply shortages. Whiteboard paint is ordered six months in advance. Current environment. Customer sales • The company contractually agrees to prices for some items with schools prior to the start of each school year. • Schools may order bulk cases of products and choose to distribute further breakdowns, such as a case of crayons, which are then distributed to classrooms by the box. • Pens do not require contracts with schools because they are low margin and do not have supply chain shortages. • Painting supplies such as acrylic paint, canvases, and easels do not require a special contract and are sold at regular list price to all schools. • Schools that offer painting classes are part of a program that provides special pricing on the painting supplies. • Chalk and blackboards are ordered less frequently than they were in past years. Schools are choosing to use whiteboard paint, which is a lower cost than ordering and installing the whiteboards. Requirements. Customers and sales • The system must have the ability to limit product purchase amounts by a single school to prevent stock shortages for other schools. • Schools are obligated to purchase the agreed amount for specific items per the school year. • Customer service must be able to easily enter items for sales orders and identify stock shortages. • Sales of whiteboard paint must be limited so that one school does not buy all the inventory and force backorders for other schools. • Schools must agree to the amount of whiteboard paint they will purchase for the whole school year. Requirements. Inventory costing • Inventory must have associated costs except for the vendor storage in Glasgow2. • Inventory must have associated costs except for the vendor storage in Glasgow2. • The vendor storage must still contain quantities but not include cost in inventory valuations. • At the end of each month, the costing manager must be able to identify how many items will not be fully settled. • Annual configuration changes to items must be automatically created where possible. • The company must be able to track costs for colored pencils and standard pencils separately. Requirements. Inventory - • Warehouse workers must be able to use their mobile phones and the mobile app to take calls and create transactions in the warehouse. • The desks must use a single item number and barcode regardless of year manufactured and the vendor. • Water-based paints from the vendor must be received in pails. • Acrylic paint must be managed by batches and expiration dates. • Pencils must be categorized as colored pencils or standard pencils. The individual colors of each colored pencil (such as red, green, and blue) will not be tracked. • The creation of unique smartboard items must be kept to a minimum. Issues - • WarehouseWorker1 works in Glasgow2. The worker receives a request to ship pallets of paper from the warehouse to Glasgow1 and Dublin1. WarehouseWorker1 must create the shipments in the system to transfer the pallets of paper from Glasgow1 to Dublin1. • The number of backorders for desks has increased. Customer service representatives struggle to select a desk item number that has inventory on hand. The desks are the same item, but the manufacturer vendor and year differ. • A school calls customer service to report that its photocopier is broken. The school needs expedited shipment of a replacement. • A school that is part of the special paint program reports that a sale price on canvas last month was a better price than its paint program price. The school requests a price adjustment. • A school reports that different shipments of acrylic paints are slightly different in color. • The sales team decides to have a flash sale on pens for one month only. The person entering the Sales order line should be able to communicate the information to the customer on the Sales order line. • Schools are reporting that chalk and blackboards are broken upon receipt. A worker in Dublin1 opens some cases of these products in the warehouse and finds that they are also broken. You must implement processes to enforce inventory inspection for a percentage of each purchase order line received. You must block all inventory for a purchase order line if the inspection fails. You need to configure the conversions for the items. Which measurement type should you use? To answer, drag the appropriate unit of measure types to the correct requirements. Each unit of measure type may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 54, "stem": "Case study - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - School of Fine Art is a distribution company that sells school supply items to primary and secondary schools. These include items such as pens, pencils, paper, notebooks, chalk, desks, acrylic paints, blackboards, dry erase markers, and whiteboard paint. Due to increased demand for colored pencils, lead times are longer for these pencils. School of Fine Art plans to expand sales into this market. School of Fine Art plans to implement Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage the business. Current environment. Company structure School of Fine Art consists of two legal entities. Primary company - • Located in Dublin, Ireland. • Has a single named warehouse. • Is the primary distribution center for both companies. Second company - • Is located in Glasgow, Scotland. • Includes the following warehouses: Glasgow1, Glasgow2. ○ Glasgow1 is used primarily to supply items regionally. ○ Glasgow2 serves as local storage for vendor-owned inventory and bulk storage for School of Fine Art's inventory. Current environment. General processes School of Fine Art uses a combination of spreadsheets and paper forms to manage the business. • All sales, purchases, and inventory are tracked in spreadsheets that are password protected by managers. • Managers frequently share spreadsheet passwords so that other users can make edits on their behalf. Inventory quantities and values are unreliable. • The spreadsheets are often incorrectly updated, have entry errors, and broken formulas for calculations. • Purchase order receipts, picking lists, packing slips, and invoices are all handwritten on pre-printed, three-part forms. • Late summer is the company's busiest time. During this time, workers are typically on the warehouse floor or making rush deliveries to schools to meet last-minute needs. Current environment. Inventory and warehousing • School of Fine Art values inventory by using FIFO costing methods. • Inventory in the warehouses cannot be distinguished as available inventory or inventory that is sold to a customer and waiting to be picked. This creates inventory inflation during cycle counts and later shortages because warehouse workers count items that are already promised to customers and waiting to be shipped. • Glasgow2 space is fully allocated to vendors. • Due to space constraints, school orders for photocopiers are shipped from the vendor to the school. • Crayons are stored as separate item numbers depending on whether they are in a box or a case. This creates issues when counting inventory to determine the total number of crayons in stock. • Lack of inventory controls has led to shortages on sales orders, creating backorders and unhappy schools. • Inventory is ordered quarterly due to the seasonality of the business. • Items can change annually based on popular sizes, colors, and styles for each new school season. The creation of the different configurations is a manual process, which creates so much overhead that temporary workers are brought in to do the data entry. Current environment. Purchasing - • Reordering is manually managed by the buyers looking at the seasonal spikes for the start of the school year, slowing around the end-of-year holidays until the following school year. • Pens are readily available products that are rarely discounted for sale. • Photocopiers are only available for sale on the Glasgow region. • Photocopy paper and construction paper are ordered by the pallet into Dublin1 and must be broken down into smaller sizes. The pallets are typically broken down and then split between what stays in Dublin1 and what is shipped to Glasgow1. • Chalk and blackboards are slower sellers, so many vendors do not carry these items. School of Fine Art purchases these products from a single vendor. There are no alternative vendors available. • School of Fine Art agrees to purchase a new line of smartboards from a vendor. The agreed-upon smartboard purchase prices will have a cost price per 55-inch, 75-inch, or 85-inch smartboard. • The company purchases pencils for the following warehouses: ○ Glasgow1: • standard pencils from Vendor A • colored pencils from Vendor B ○ Dublin1: • standard pencils from Vendor A • colored pencils from Vendor A • As whiteboard paint grows in popularity, so does the demand. This causes supply shortages. Whiteboard paint is ordered six months in advance. Current environment. Customer sales • The company contractually agrees to prices for some items with schools prior to the start of each school year. • Schools may order bulk cases of products and choose to distribute further breakdowns, such as a case of crayons, which are then distributed to classrooms by the box. • Pens do not require contracts with schools because they are low margin and do not have supply chain shortages. • Painting supplies such as acrylic paint, canvases, and easels do not require a special contract and are sold at regular list price to all schools. • Schools that offer painting classes are part of a program that provides special pricing on the painting supplies. • Chalk and blackboards are ordered less frequently than they were in past years. Schools are choosing to use whiteboard paint, which is a lower cost than ordering and installing the whiteboards. Requirements. Customers and sales • The system must have the ability to limit product purchase amounts by a single school to prevent stock shortages for other schools. • Schools are obligated to purchase the agreed amount for specific items per the school year. • Customer service must be able to easily enter items for sales orders and identify stock shortages. • Sales of whiteboard paint must be limited so that one school does not buy all the inventory and force backorders for other schools. • Schools must agree to the amount of whiteboard paint they will purchase for the whole school year. Requirements. Inventory costing - • Inventory must have associated costs except for the vendor storage in Glasgow2. • The vendor storage must still contain quantities but not include cost in inventory valuations. • At the end of each month, the costing manager must be able to identify how many items will not be fully settled. • Annual configuration changes to items must be automatically created where possible. • The company must be able to track costs for colored pencils and standard pencils separately. Requirements. Inventory - Requirements. Inventory - • Warehouse workers must be able to use their mobile phones and the mobile app to take calls and create transactions in the warehouse. • The desks must use a single item number and barcode regardless of year manufactured and the vendor. • Water-based paints from the vendor must be received in pails. • Acrylic paint must be managed by batches and expiration dates. • Pencils must be categorized as colored pencils or standard pencils. The individual colors of each colored pencil (such as red, green, and blue) will not be tracked. • The creation of unique smartboard items must be kept to a minimum. Issues - • WarehouseWorker1 works in Glasgow2. The worker receives a request to ship pallets of paper from the warehouse to Glasgow1 and Dublin1. WarehouseWorker1 must create the shipments in the system to transfer the pallets of paper from Glasgow1 to Dublin1. • The number of backorders for desks has increased. Customer service representatives struggle to select a desk item number that has inventory on hand. The desks are the same item, but the manufacturer vendor and year differ. • A school calls customer service to report that its photocopier is broken. The school needs expedited shipment of a replacement. • A school that is part of the special paint program reports that a sale price on canvas last month was a better price than its paint program price. The school requests a price adjustment. • A school reports that different shipments of acrylic paints are slightly different in color. • The sales team decides to have a flash sale on pens for one month only. The person entering the Sales order line should be able to communicate the information to the customer on the Sales order line. • Schools are reporting that chalk and blackboards are broken upon receipt. A worker in Dublin1 opens some cases of these products in the warehouse and finds that they are also broken. You must implement processes to enforce inventory inspection for a percentage of each purchase order line received. You must block all inventory for a purchase order line if the inspection fails. You need to configure the smartboards. What should you create?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "price groups" }, { "label": "B", "text": "a new product master for each variation" }, { "label": "C", "text": "a bill of material (BOM) version" }, { "label": "D", "text": "variants by using the variant suggestions tool" } ], "answer": "D" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 55, "stem": "This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Coho Vineyard & Winery is a parent company that has two subsidiaries: Coho Vineyard and Coho Winery. Coho Vineyard is based in Medford, Oregon. The vineyard grows the grapes and then produces and bottles the wine. Coho Winery, based in Grants Pass, Oregon, distributes packaged wine to businesses and consumers. The winery sells imported cheese and olive oil in addition to the wines. Current environment. Technology landscape • Coho Vineyard & Winery requires financial reporting from both Coho Vineyard and Coho Winery. The parent company consolidates financials in a third-party tool. • Coho Winery currently manages inventory and financials on spreadsheets separately from the parent company. Current environment. Inventory and warehousing • The entire warehouse is temperature controlled. A refrigerated section of the warehouse is used for items that require colder storage. • The items do not have fixed locations in the warehouse. • Coho uses smart numbering for cheese items today. The items start with F for France and U for United States such as the following: • F11234 = French cheese • U14567 = US cheese • Currently, wine does not use smart numbering. • Inventory is valued at First In, First-Out (FIFO). • Olive oil has a 12-month shelf life. • WineA is expensive and not regularly stocked in the warehouse. • WineB must be in the refrigerated section of the warehouse. • WineC is non-refrigerated wine and is the majority of inventory in the warehouse. Current environment. Vendors and procurement • Cheese is purchased from vendors in two countries: France and United States. • Non-cheese items can be purchased from vendors in other countries or regions. • Olive oil is bought and sold in full cases of six each. • When Coho Vineyard produces more wine than expected in a season, rebate programs are offered to any company whose monthly purchases exceed $5,000. Requirements. General - • The Coho Vineyard & Winery parent company, as well as Coho Vineyard, will not be considered in the implementation of Dynamics 365 Finance and Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management for Coho Winery. They plan to implement them as separate legal entities in the next five years. Requirements. Inventory and warehousing • Items must be renumbered in the new system. • Separate item numbers must be used for each imported item for use in simplified reporting by source country or region. • Advanced Warehouse Management capabilities must be enabled in the new system. • Each bottle of wine has a single item number. • The vintage of each bottle will change annually and may affect the cost of the bottle. This cost must be tracked by year. • Some bottles of wine require refrigeration. The system must automatically define where items must be stored in the warehouse. • Wine must be grouped in a hierarchy such as the following: • Red • Cabernet • Merlot • White • Chardonnay • Pinot • Inventory value must be stored at each month end. • Each month, the olive oil on-hand inventory is evaluated. Anything with less than six months left on the shelf life is sold to a discount retail store. If less than 90 days remains for the shelf life, then the olive oil is donated or destroyed. • At least 20 cases of olive oil and no more than 50 cases are on hand and not reserved for upcoming customer orders. • WineB must be refrigerated. Requirements. Vendors and procurement • The cheese smart numbering system will not be used in the future. Instead, the system must use standard configurations to ensure the correct cheese items are used for the correct country or region when ordering. • Olive oil must be managed in full cases only, although the inventory cost must be calculated as cages. • Should any bottle of olive oil be broken within a case, the cases will be sold at a discounted price. • Vendor rebates must be calculated and submitted for a claim. • Rebate programs are passed on to the retailers selling Coho Winery wines. The rebates must be claimed from Coho Vineyard. • Purchase orders (POs) must be maintained online with tracked changes between the vendors and the buyers. • The controller decides WineA must not be held in financial inventory on the Coho Winery books. The winery makes an agreement with the vendor that WineA will be owned by the vendor until a later date. • Vendor1 sends bulk shipments. Coho Winery does not always have enough warehouse staff to receive inventory. The company requires Vendor1 to send advanced shipping notices (ASNs). • The operations coordinator must schedule inbound loads. The company requires automation of inbound load creation where possible. Issues - • The warehouse is at maximum capacity. Empty bin locations are not always available. • The warehouse manager wants to establish fast moving locations for WineB on the floor and refill locations from higher rack storage. • Coho Winery recently conducted an internal audit risk assessment. The risk assessment found that inventory value reports were stored in spreadsheets. The spreadsheets can easily be edited and lack controls. • After olive oil is counted, multiple cases are destroyed due to shelf life. The inventory planner must determine if a new PO should be placed for olive oil. • The vendor rebates claims are often rejected because the claims were miscalculated by not including discounts. • The purchasing manager receives multiple complaints regarding POs: • Issue 1: PO changes are not accepted and confirmed, resulting in out-of-stock issues. • Issue 2: Vendors do not have control on responses to POs. Instead, the vendors rely on emails. You need to configure a new item that contains a vintage. What should you configure for the vintage?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Color" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Configuration" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Batch" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Owner" }, { "label": "E", "text": "Style B C (100%)" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 56, "stem": "This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Coho Vineyard & Winery is a parent company that has two subsidiaries: Coho Vineyard and Coho Winery. Coho Vineyard is based in Medford, Oregon. The vineyard grows the grapes and then produces and bottles the wine. Coho Winery, based in Grants Pass, Oregon, distributes packaged wine to businesses and consumers. The winery sells imported cheese and olive oil in addition to the wines. Current environment. Technology landscape • Coho Vineyard & Winery requires financial reporting from both Coho Vineyard and Coho Winery. The parent company consolidates financials in a third-party tool. • Coho Winery currently manages inventory and financials on spreadsheets separately from the parent company. Current environment. Inventory and warehousing • The entire warehouse is temperature controlled. A refrigerated section of the warehouse is used for items that require colder storage. • The items do not have fixed locations in the warehouse. • Coho uses smart numbering for cheese items today. The items start with F for France and U for United States such as the following: • F11234 = French cheese • U14567 = US cheese • Currently, wine does not use smart numbering. • Inventory is valued at First In, First-Out (FIFO). • Olive oil has a 12-month shelf life. • WineA is expensive and not regularly stocked in the warehouse. • WineB must be in the refrigerated section of the warehouse. • WineC is non-refrigerated wine and is the majority of inventory in the warehouse. Current environment. Vendors and procurement • Cheese is purchased from vendors in two countries: France and United States. • Non-cheese items can be purchased from vendors in other countries or regions. • Olive oil is bought and sold in full cases of six each. • When Coho Vineyard produces more wine than expected in a season, rebate programs are offered to any company whose monthly purchases exceed $5,000. Requirements. General - • The Coho Vineyard & Winery parent company, as well as Coho Vineyard, will not be considered in the implementation of Dynamics 365 Finance and Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management for Coho Winery. They plan to implement them as separate legal entities in the next five years. Requirements. Inventory and warehousing • Items must be renumbered in the new system. • Separate item numbers must be used for each imported item for use in simplified reporting by source country or region. • Advanced Warehouse Management capabilities must be enabled in the new system. • Each bottle of wine has a single item number. • The vintage of each bottle will change annually and may affect the cost of the bottle. This cost must be tracked by year. • Some bottles of wine require refrigeration. The system must automatically define where items must be stored in the warehouse. • Wine must be grouped in a hierarchy such as the following: • Red • Cabernet • Merlot • White • Chardonnay • Pinot • Inventory value must be stored at each month end. • Each month, the olive oil on-hand inventory is evaluated. Anything with less than six months left on the shelf life is sold to a discount retail store. If less than 90 days remains for the shelf life, then the olive oil is donated or destroyed. • At least 20 cases of olive oil and no more than 50 cases are on hand and not reserved for upcoming customer orders. • WineB must be refrigerated. Requirements. Vendors and procurement • The cheese smart numbering system will not be used in the future. Instead, the system must use standard configurations to ensure the correct cheese items are used for the correct country or region when ordering. • Olive oil must be managed in full cases only, although the inventory cost must be calculated as cages. • Should any bottle of olive oil be broken within a case, the cases will be sold at a discounted price. • Vendor rebates must be calculated and submitted for a claim. • Rebate programs are passed on to the retailers selling Coho Winery wines. The rebates must be claimed from Coho Vineyard. • Purchase orders (POs) must be maintained online with tracked changes between the vendors and the buyers. • The controller decides WineA must not be held in financial inventory on the Coho Winery books. The winery makes an agreement with the vendor that WineA will be owned by the vendor until a later date. • Vendor1 sends bulk shipments. Coho Winery does not always have enough warehouse staff to receive inventory. The company requires Vendor1 to send advanced shipping notices (ASNs). • The operations coordinator must schedule inbound loads. The company requires automation of inbound load creation where possible. Issues - • The warehouse is at maximum capacity. Empty bin locations are not always available. • The warehouse manager wants to establish fast moving locations for WineB on the floor and refill locations from higher rack storage. • Coho Winery recently conducted an internal audit risk assessment. The risk assessment found that inventory value reports were stored in spreadsheets. The spreadsheets can easily be edited and lack controls. • After olive oil is counted, multiple cases are destroyed due to shelf life. The inventory planner must determine if a new PO should be placed for olive oil. • The vendor rebates claims are often rejected because the claims were miscalculated by not including discounts. • The purchasing manager receives multiple complaints regarding POs: • Issue 1: PO changes are not accepted and confirmed, resulting in out-of-stock issues. • Issue 2: Vendors do not have control on responses to POs. Instead, the vendors rely on emails. You need to configure cheese smart numbering to meet the requirement. Which component should you configure?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Country of origin" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Filter codes" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Purchase agreement" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Default order settings A A (100%)" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 57, "stem": "This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Coho Vineyard & Winery is a parent company that has two subsidiaries: Coho Vineyard and Coho Winery. Coho Vineyard is based in Medford, Oregon. The vineyard grows the grapes and then produces and bottles the wine. Coho Winery, based in Grants Pass, Oregon, distributes packaged wine to businesses and consumers. The winery sells imported cheese and olive oil in addition to the wines. Current environment. Technology landscape • Coho Vineyard & Winery requires financial reporting from both Coho Vineyard and Coho Winery. The parent company consolidates financials in a third-party tool. • Coho Winery currently manages inventory and financials on spreadsheets separately from the parent company. Current environment. Inventory and warehousing • The entire warehouse is temperature controlled. A refrigerated section of the warehouse is used for items that require colder storage. • The items do not have fixed locations in the warehouse. • Coho uses smart numbering for cheese items today. The items start with F for France and U for United States such as the following: • F11234 = French cheese • U14567 = US cheese • Currently, wine does not use smart numbering. • Inventory is valued at First In, First-Out (FIFO). • Olive oil has a 12-month shelf life. • WineA is expensive and not regularly stocked in the warehouse. • WineB must be in the refrigerated section of the warehouse. • WineC is non-refrigerated wine and is the majority of inventory in the warehouse. Current environment. Vendors and procurement • Cheese is purchased from vendors in two countries: France and United States. • Non-cheese items can be purchased from vendors in other countries or regions. • Olive oil is bought and sold in full cases of six each. • When Coho Vineyard produces more wine than expected in a season, rebate programs are offered to any company whose monthly purchases exceed $5,000. Requirements. General - • The Coho Vineyard & Winery parent company, as well as Coho Vineyard, will not be considered in the implementation of Dynamics 365 Finance and Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management for Coho Winery. They plan to implement them as separate legal entities in the next five years. Requirements. Inventory and warehousing • Items must be renumbered in the new system. • Separate item numbers must be used for each imported item for use in simplified reporting by source country or region. • Advanced Warehouse Management capabilities must be enabled in the new system. • Each bottle of wine has a single item number. • The vintage of each bottle will change annually and may affect the cost of the bottle. This cost must be tracked by year. • Some bottles of wine require refrigeration. The system must automatically define where items must be stored in the warehouse. • Wine must be grouped in a hierarchy such as the following: • Red • Cabernet • Merlot • White • Chardonnay • Pinot • Inventory value must be stored at each month end. • Each month, the olive oil on-hand inventory is evaluated. Anything with less than six months left on the shelf life is sold to a discount retail store. If less than 90 days remains for the shelf life, then the olive oil is donated or destroyed. • At least 20 cases of olive oil and no more than 50 cases are on hand and not reserved for upcoming customer orders. • WineB must be refrigerated. Requirements. Vendors and procurement • The cheese smart numbering system will not be used in the future. Instead, the system must use standard configurations to ensure the correct cheese items are used for the correct country or region when ordering. • Olive oil must be managed in full cases only, although the inventory cost must be calculated as cages. • Should any bottle of olive oil be broken within a case, the cases will be sold at a discounted price. • Vendor rebates must be calculated and submitted for a claim. • Rebate programs are passed on to the retailers selling Coho Winery wines. The rebates must be claimed from Coho Vineyard. • Purchase orders (POs) must be maintained online with tracked changes between the vendors and the buyers. • The controller decides WineA must not be held in financial inventory on the Coho Winery books. The winery makes an agreement with the vendor that WineA will be owned by the vendor until a later date. • Vendor1 sends bulk shipments. Coho Winery does not always have enough warehouse staff to receive inventory. The company requires Vendor1 to send advanced shipping notices (ASNs). • The operations coordinator must schedule inbound loads. The company requires automation of inbound load creation where possible. Issues - • The warehouse is at maximum capacity. Empty bin locations are not always available. • The warehouse manager wants to establish fast moving locations for WineB on the floor and refill locations from higher rack storage. • Coho Winery recently conducted an internal audit risk assessment. The risk assessment found that inventory value reports were stored in spreadsheets. The spreadsheets can easily be edited and lack controls. • After olive oil is counted, multiple cases are destroyed due to shelf life. The inventory planner must determine if a new PO should be placed for olive oil. • The vendor rebates claims are often rejected because the claims were miscalculated by not including discounts. • The purchasing manager receives multiple complaints regarding POs: • Issue 1: PO changes are not accepted and confirmed, resulting in out-of-stock issues. • Issue 2: Vendors do not have control on responses to POs. Instead, the vendors rely on emails. You must configure the olive oil case requirements. Which two configurations should you use for PO creation by using MRP? Each correct answer presents part of the solution NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Set standard validation on default order quantities." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Set strict validation on default order quantities." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Set the inventory unit of measure to cases." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Enter multiples on default order settings." }, { "label": "E", "text": "Complete the unit configuration wizard." } ], "answer": "BC" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 58, "stem": "Case study - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm is a distribution company that supplies pickles, preserves, pickling supplies, and accessory products to local farmers’ markets as well as grocers. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm does not produce or provide canning services for any items. Current Environment - Munson's Pickles and Preserves Farm has an accounting system that is disconnected from the warehousing system. This has caused issues with controlling and valuing inventory. With these core drivers, Munson's Pickles and Preserves Farm decides to implement Dynamics 365 Finance and Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. implement Dynamics 365 Finance and Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Warehousing - • Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm has a single warehouse that serves as the distribution center for all products. • The warehouse has bulk locations as well as racking, but location names and numbers do not exist. • Bulk locations are for storage of extra inventory that will not fit into the picking locations. • The warehouse is temperature-controlled, with locations grouped into two zones: refrigerated and non-perishable. • Inventory adjustments are made regularly due to lack of inventory controls. Inventory Data - • Item numbers are inconsistent and were set up as “smart-numbering,” such as 1-23-PKL and 44-24-PICK. • Cucumbers are not grown by Munson's Pickles and Preserves Farm and may be sourced from local farmers. • Pickles come in bottle sizes of 8 oz, 16 oz, 32 oz. The bottles are packed in cases. • Pickles may be spear, chip, or whole shapes within the bottles. This does not impact the cost of the pickles when they are the same flavor. • Pickle flavors are sweet, spicy, and dill. The flavors vary in price. • Preserves come in multiple flavors, such as mango, strawberry, and grape. These are seasonal items only. Due to the varying flavors and quantities, the preserves are owned by the vendor until they are sold. The mango preserves require refrigeration. The other preserves do not require refrigeration. • Many items are sold as accessories or supplies for pickling. • Some items within inventory have an expiration date, such as vinegar. • Fast-moving items are identified by inventory turns per quarter. Sweet and spicy pickles are the most popular. Purchasing and Sales - • Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm has an online store that can be found at munsonspicklesandpreservesfarm.com. • The online store is limited to a subset of products that are accessories only, such as bottles and jars. • A new product line of kosher pickles is going to be distributed by Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm. • VendorA is the largest vendor that Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm buys products from. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm’s second largest vendor is VendorB. Requirements - Warehousing - • The warehouse manager requires fast-moving items to be easily accessible to the order pickers in AisleA, with no more than one item per bin location in AisleA. Both sweet and spicy pickles have more inventory than will fit in AisleA, resulting in bulk location storage. o Spicy pickles must have no less than half of a pallet in AisleA at any time. o Sweet pickles must have enough inventory in AisleA prior to creating waves for warehouse work. • Strawberry preserves are selling slowly this season. They are put away in higher bin locations because they are not considered fast-moving items Inventory & Data - • Item numbers must be set up to create a streamlined numbering system. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm requires that the old item number be stored in Dynamics 365 for cross reference purposes. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm has settled on 0000001 as the item format for pickles instead of 1-23-PKL. PKL will be stored as an attribute. • Item numbers for pickles must be consolidated where possible into a single item number, regardless of bottle size. • Cucumbers must be sold at actual cost because they are a special order. • Kosher pickles must be set up in the item master. The kosher pickles are the same size jars and flavors as the other pickles, except that they have a kosher designation and will be slightly more expensive. • Vinegar and other perishable items must have date tracking for the manufacturer's batch number and expiration date of the product. • A batch of mango preserves had to be thrown away because the warehouse workers put away the product into the non- perishable zone. Purchasing & Sales - • Cucumbers must be sourced from local vendors for special orders only. • Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm recently signed an exclusivity agreement with VendorA, and buyers must now only purchase from VendorA. • VendorA recently purchased a competitor company, VendorB. VendorA wants to ensure that all agreements with VendorA also apply to VendorB while they work on merging the two companies into one. • VendorC sells preserves to Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm and requires the following: o Shipment requirement: VendorC owns the product after shipment to Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm until the time of sale. o On-hand requirement: VendorC has access to view on-hand preserve inventory at Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm warehouse. Issues - • CustomerD reports that the vinegar they ordered had a week left before it expired when they received it. This did not give CustomerD enough time to use the vinegar before they had to dispose of it. CustomerD now requires that all vinegar has more than 30 days left before the expiration date. • A customer calls and states that they ordered kosher pickles and received regular pickles. Inventory Control Clerk 2 reports that kosher and non-kosher pickles of the same variety are in the same warehouse location, contributing to the picking errors. • A salesperson reports that the margin is incorrect on a customer’s special order because the cucumber cost was for the most recent receipt of cucumbers, not the cucumbers received for the specific customer order. • An internal audit revealed that large quantities of pickles were missing and written off as damaged on multiple occasions cover the past year. No documentation or explanation of the write offs exist. There is no documentation of disposal, and no approval from management to substantiate that the pickles were not stolen. • Jars of pickles are received as eaches. Case counts of pickle jars vary by size: o 8 oz jars are 12 per case o 16 oz jars are 6 per case o The varied counts in each case create overhead in the warehouse. • The receiving clerk in the warehouse wants to ensure that broken bottles of vinegar are moved to a damage location named LocationA. Expired vinegar should be moved to a return-to-vendor location named LocationB. All other vinegar should be put away and sold according to normal location directives. • Operator1 is picking a pallet of strawberry preserves from a location to the shipping dock. While picking up the pallet, Operator1 drops the pallet. Operator1 must make sure that the strawberry preserves are not available for shipment until the damage is evaluated. • Operator2 tries to print wave labels that contain item 0000001. The labels start to print and then jam. At the same time, the printer battery needs to be recharged and the labels need to be reprinted. You need to make changes based on the internal audit findings. You need to make changes based on the internal audit findings. Which feature should you enable?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Quarantine order" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Inventory journal workflows" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Scrap method" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Tag counting" } ], "answer": "A" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 59, "stem": "Case study - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm is a distribution company that supplies pickles, preserves, pickling supplies, and accessory products to local farmers’ markets as well as grocers. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm does not produce or provide canning services for any items. Current Environment - Munson's Pickles and Preserves Farm has an accounting system that is disconnected from the warehousing system. This has caused issues with controlling and valuing inventory. With these core drivers, Munson's Pickles and Preserves Farm decides to implement Dynamics 365 Finance and Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. implement Dynamics 365 Finance and Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Warehousing - • Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm has a single warehouse that serves as the distribution center for all products. • The warehouse has bulk locations as well as racking, but location names and numbers do not exist. • Bulk locations are for storage of extra inventory that will not fit into the picking locations. • The warehouse is temperature-controlled, with locations grouped into two zones: refrigerated and non-perishable. • Inventory adjustments are made regularly due to lack of inventory controls. Inventory Data - • Item numbers are inconsistent and were set up as “smart-numbering,” such as 1-23-PKL and 44-24-PICK. • Cucumbers are not grown by Munson's Pickles and Preserves Farm and may be sourced from local farmers. • Pickles come in bottle sizes of 8 oz, 16 oz, 32 oz. The bottles are packed in cases. • Pickles may be spear, chip, or whole shapes within the bottles. This does not impact the cost of the pickles when they are the same flavor. • Pickle flavors are sweet, spicy, and dill. The flavors vary in price. • Preserves come in multiple flavors, such as mango, strawberry, and grape. These are seasonal items only. Due to the varying flavors and quantities, the preserves are owned by the vendor until they are sold. The mango preserves require refrigeration. The other preserves do not require refrigeration. • Many items are sold as accessories or supplies for pickling. • Some items within inventory have an expiration date, such as vinegar. • Fast-moving items are identified by inventory turns per quarter. Sweet and spicy pickles are the most popular. Purchasing and Sales - • Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm has an online store that can be found at munsonspicklesandpreservesfarm.com. • The online store is limited to a subset of products that are accessories only, such as bottles and jars. • A new product line of kosher pickles is going to be distributed by Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm. • VendorA is the largest vendor that Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm buys products from. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm’s second largest vendor is VendorB. Requirements - Warehousing - • The warehouse manager requires fast-moving items to be easily accessible to the order pickers in AisleA, with no more than one item per bin location in AisleA. Both sweet and spicy pickles have more inventory than will fit in AisleA, resulting in bulk location storage. o Spicy pickles must have no less than half of a pallet in AisleA at any time. o Sweet pickles must have enough inventory in AisleA prior to creating waves for warehouse work. • Strawberry preserves are selling slowly this season. They are put away in higher bin locations because they are not considered fast-moving items Inventory & Data - • Item numbers must be set up to create a streamlined numbering system. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm requires that the old item number be stored in Dynamics 365 for cross reference purposes. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm has settled on 0000001 as the item format for pickles instead of 1-23-PKL. PKL will be stored as an attribute. • Item numbers for pickles must be consolidated where possible into a single item number, regardless of bottle size. • Cucumbers must be sold at actual cost because they are a special order. • Kosher pickles must be set up in the item master. The kosher pickles are the same size jars and flavors as the other pickles, except that they have a kosher designation and will be slightly more expensive. • Vinegar and other perishable items must have date tracking for the manufacturer's batch number and expiration date of the product. • A batch of mango preserves had to be thrown away because the warehouse workers put away the product into the non- perishable zone. Purchasing & Sales - • Cucumbers must be sourced from local vendors for special orders only. • Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm recently signed an exclusivity agreement with VendorA, and buyers must now only purchase from VendorA. • VendorA recently purchased a competitor company, VendorB. VendorA wants to ensure that all agreements with VendorA also apply to VendorB while they work on merging the two companies into one. • VendorC sells preserves to Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm and requires the following: o Shipment requirement: VendorC owns the product after shipment to Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm until the time of sale. o On-hand requirement: VendorC has access to view on-hand preserve inventory at Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm warehouse. Issues - • CustomerD reports that the vinegar they ordered had a week left before it expired when they received it. This did not give CustomerD enough time to use the vinegar before they had to dispose of it. CustomerD now requires that all vinegar has more than 30 days left before the expiration date. • A customer calls and states that they ordered kosher pickles and received regular pickles. Inventory Control Clerk 2 reports that kosher and non-kosher pickles of the same variety are in the same warehouse location, contributing to the picking errors. • A salesperson reports that the margin is incorrect on a customer’s special order because the cucumber cost was for the most recent receipt of cucumbers, not the cucumbers received for the specific customer order. • An internal audit revealed that large quantities of pickles were missing and written off as damaged on multiple occasions cover the past year. No documentation or explanation of the write offs exist. There is no documentation of disposal, and no approval from management to substantiate that the pickles were not stolen. • Jars of pickles are received as eaches. Case counts of pickle jars vary by size: o 8 oz jars are 12 per case o 16 oz jars are 6 per case o The varied counts in each case create overhead in the warehouse. • The receiving clerk in the warehouse wants to ensure that broken bottles of vinegar are moved to a damage location named LocationA. Expired vinegar should be moved to a return-to-vendor location named LocationB. All other vinegar should be put away and sold according to normal location directives. • Operator1 is picking a pallet of strawberry preserves from a location to the shipping dock. While picking up the pallet, Operator1 drops the pallet. Operator1 must make sure that the strawberry preserves are not available for shipment until the damage is evaluated. • Operator2 tries to print wave labels that contain item 0000001. The labels start to print and then jam. At the same time, the printer battery needs to be recharged and the labels need to be reprinted. You need to resolve the mango preserve issue and minimize the number of location directives. You need to resolve the mango preserve issue and minimize the number of location directives. What should you configure?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Item group setup product filter" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Customer product filter" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Released product setup product filter" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Warehouse management setup product filter" } ], "answer": "A" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 60, "stem": "Case study - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm is a distribution company that supplies pickles, preserves, pickling supplies, and accessory products to local farmers’ markets as well as grocers. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm does not produce or provide canning services for any items. Current Environment - Munson's Pickles and Preserves Farm has an accounting system that is disconnected from the warehousing system. This has caused issues with controlling and valuing inventory. With these core drivers, Munson's Pickles and Preserves Farm decides to implement Dynamics 365 Finance and Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. implement Dynamics 365 Finance and Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Warehousing - • Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm has a single warehouse that serves as the distribution center for all products. • The warehouse has bulk locations as well as racking, but location names and numbers do not exist. • Bulk locations are for storage of extra inventory that will not fit into the picking locations. • The warehouse is temperature-controlled, with locations grouped into two zones: refrigerated and non-perishable. • Inventory adjustments are made regularly due to lack of inventory controls. Inventory Data - • Item numbers are inconsistent and were set up as “smart-numbering,” such as 1-23-PKL and 44-24-PICK. • Cucumbers are not grown by Munson's Pickles and Preserves Farm and may be sourced from local farmers. • Pickles come in bottle sizes of 8 oz, 16 oz, 32 oz. The bottles are packed in cases. • Pickles may be spear, chip, or whole shapes within the bottles. This does not impact the cost of the pickles when they are the same flavor. • Pickle flavors are sweet, spicy, and dill. The flavors vary in price. • Preserves come in multiple flavors, such as mango, strawberry, and grape. These are seasonal items only. Due to the varying flavors and quantities, the preserves are owned by the vendor until they are sold. The mango preserves require refrigeration. The other preserves do not require refrigeration. • Many items are sold as accessories or supplies for pickling. • Some items within inventory have an expiration date, such as vinegar. • Fast-moving items are identified by inventory turns per quarter. Sweet and spicy pickles are the most popular. Purchasing and Sales - • Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm has an online store that can be found at munsonspicklesandpreservesfarm.com. • The online store is limited to a subset of products that are accessories only, such as bottles and jars. • A new product line of kosher pickles is going to be distributed by Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm. • VendorA is the largest vendor that Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm buys products from. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm’s second largest vendor is VendorB. Requirements - Warehousing - • The warehouse manager requires fast-moving items to be easily accessible to the order pickers in AisleA, with no more than one item per bin location in AisleA. Both sweet and spicy pickles have more inventory than will fit in AisleA, resulting in bulk location storage. o Spicy pickles must have no less than half of a pallet in AisleA at any time. o Sweet pickles must have enough inventory in AisleA prior to creating waves for warehouse work. • Strawberry preserves are selling slowly this season. They are put away in higher bin locations because they are not considered fast-moving items Inventory & Data - • Item numbers must be set up to create a streamlined numbering system. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm requires that the old item number be stored in Dynamics 365 for cross reference purposes. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm has settled on 0000001 as the item format for pickles instead of 1-23-PKL. PKL will be stored as an attribute. • Item numbers for pickles must be consolidated where possible into a single item number, regardless of bottle size. • Cucumbers must be sold at actual cost because they are a special order. • Kosher pickles must be set up in the item master. The kosher pickles are the same size jars and flavors as the other pickles, except that they have a kosher designation and will be slightly more expensive. • Vinegar and other perishable items must have date tracking for the manufacturer's batch number and expiration date of the product. • A batch of mango preserves had to be thrown away because the warehouse workers put away the product into the non- perishable zone. Purchasing & Sales - • Cucumbers must be sourced from local vendors for special orders only. • Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm recently signed an exclusivity agreement with VendorA, and buyers must now only purchase from VendorA. • VendorA recently purchased a competitor company, VendorB. VendorA wants to ensure that all agreements with VendorA also apply to VendorB while they work on merging the two companies into one. • VendorC sells preserves to Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm and requires the following: o Shipment requirement: VendorC owns the product after shipment to Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm until the time of sale. o On-hand requirement: VendorC has access to view on-hand preserve inventory at Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm warehouse. Issues - • CustomerD reports that the vinegar they ordered had a week left before it expired when they received it. This did not give CustomerD enough time to use the vinegar before they had to dispose of it. CustomerD now requires that all vinegar has more than 30 days left before the expiration date. • A customer calls and states that they ordered kosher pickles and received regular pickles. Inventory Control Clerk 2 reports that kosher and non-kosher pickles of the same variety are in the same warehouse location, contributing to the picking errors. • A salesperson reports that the margin is incorrect on a customer’s special order because the cucumber cost was for the most recent receipt of cucumbers, not the cucumbers received for the specific customer order. • An internal audit revealed that large quantities of pickles were missing and written off as damaged on multiple occasions cover the past year. No documentation or explanation of the write offs exist. There is no documentation of disposal, and no approval from management to substantiate that the pickles were not stolen. • Jars of pickles are received as cases. Case counts of pickle jars vary by size: o 8 oz jars are 12 per case o 16 oz jars are 6 per case o The varied counts in each case create overhead in the warehouse. • The receiving clerk in the warehouse wants to ensure that broken bottles of vinegar are moved to a damage location named LocationA. Expired vinegar should be moved to a return-to-vendor location named LocationB. All other vinegar should be put away and sold according to normal location directives. • Operator1 is picking a pallet of strawberry preserves from a location to the shipping dock. While picking up the pallet, Operator1 drops the pallet. Operator] must make sure that the strawberry preserves are not available for shipment until the damage is evaluated. • Operator2 tries to print wave labels that contain item 0000001. The labels start to print and then jam. At the same time, the printer battery needs to be recharged and the labels need to be reprinted. You need to determine the number of pickle bottles in each case. You need to determine the number of pickle bottles in each case. What should you configure?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Unit of measure conversion per product variant" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Unit sequence group" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Unit of measure conversation per product" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Operating units" } ], "answer": "A" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 61, "stem": "A distribution company is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company plans to expand into providing trucking services for its primary distribution center. The company may expand into other locations later. All vehicle maintenance will be performed at standardized intervals to meet trucking regulations. The vehicles must be established on the maintenance schedule at the distribution center. The fleet manager requires all vehicles to be grouped together by location for the distribution center and by sublocations for any hubs. The company requires the following implementation: • Sublocations must inherit the maintenance schedule. • Non-vehicle assets must not inherit the maintenance schedule. You need to configure the system to meet the requirements. What should you configure?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "work orders" }, { "label": "B", "text": "asset service levels" }, { "label": "C", "text": "asset counters" }, { "label": "D", "text": "functional location types" } ], "answer": "D" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 62, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Products must be classified. You need to create the ABC model. Which three ABC codes should you configure? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Cost" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Revenue" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Profit" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Value" }, { "label": "E", "text": "Margin BDE" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 63, "stem": "A distribution company wants to set up barcodes in their Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management system for warehouse scanning. Barcodes will be entered manually. You need to minimize the risk of errors on barcode entry. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Select an item and set up security on the barcode field." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Create a new barcode, enter the value, select the type, and enter the size and max length." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Create a new barcode, enter the value, select the type, and enter the mask." } ], "answer": "C" }, { "topic": 2, "question_num": 64, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company is configuring Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company plans to configure the system to enter the following two fields when a single scan is conducted: item id and batch number. You need to configure the bar codes. Which configuration should you use for each action? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 1, "stem": "SIMULATION - You are a functional consultant for a company named Contoso Entertainment System USA (USMF). From sales order number 000720, you need to ensure that a product named Projector Television is delivered directly to a customer. To complete this task, sign in to Dynamics 365 portal. See explanation below. When you configure Direct Delivery (direct from the Vendor), a PO is created to purchase the item from the Vendor and have it shipped directly to the customer. The instructions below include generating the PO and a product receipt. These steps may not be required in the exam but are included for reference. 1. Go to Navigation pane > Modules > Accounts receivable > Orders > All sales orders. 2. Select New. 3. Search for and select sales order number 000720. 4. On the Action Pane, select Sales order, then select Direct delivery. The Create delivery page lists all the open sales order lines as copied from the sales order. 5. Select the sales order line for the product named Projector Television. 6. The Vendor account field will be populated. A message informs you that the purchase order has now been created. 7. Expand the Line details section. 8. Select the Delivery tab and verify that the Direct delivery field is set to Yes. 9. On the Action Pane, select General. 10. Select Related orders. 11. Select the link in the Purchase order field. 12. Expand the Line details section and select the Address tab. \u0000 The delivery address for this purchase order line is the customer's delivery address and not your company's address. 13. Select the Delivery tab. \u0000 Like the sales order line, the associated purchase order line type is also set to Direct delivery. 14. On the Action Pane, select Purchase. 15. Select Confirmation. 16. Select OK. 17. On the Action Pane, select Receive. 18. Select Product receipt. 19. In the Product receipt field, type a value. 20. Select OK. 20. Select OK. 21. On the Action Pane, select General. 22. Select Related orders and highlight the desired record. \u0000 After the purchase order has been updated as received, or in other words, after the vendor has shipped the goods to your customer's address, the status of the originating sales order is automatically updated to Delivered. \u0000 The sales order can now be invoiced. 23. Select OK. 24. Close the page. 25. Select OK. Close the pages and return to the home page. Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/sales-marketing/direct-deliveries", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 2, "stem": "SIMULATION - You are a functional consultant for a company named Contoso Entertainment System USA (USMF). You need to configure a new quality process for item number M0017. The process must meet the following requirements: \u0000 Perform an impedance test on 100 percent of the units purchased. \u0000 Initiate the test after the product receipt is posted. To complete this task, sign in to Dynamics 365 portal. See explanation below. Configure Item Sampling to specify 100 percent of the units. Configure Quality Association to specify what test to run and configure the test to run after the receipt is posted. Configure Item Sampling. 1. Go to Inventory management > Setup > Quality control > Item sampling. 2. Click New. 3. In the Item sampling field, type the name 100%. 4. In the Description field, type a value (100%). 5. In the Quantity specification field, select percent. 6. In the Value field, enter a number (100) 7. Click Save. 8. Close the page. Configure a Quality Association - 1. Go to Inventory management > Setup > Quality control > Quality associations. 2. Click New. 3. In the Reference type field, select Purchase. 4. In the Item code field, select Table. 5. In the Item field, select the item M0017. 6. In the Event type field, select Product Receipt. 7. In the Execution field, select After. 8. Expand or collapse the Specifications section. 9. In the Test group field, find and select the Impedance test. 10.Click Save. 11.Close the page. Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/inventory/tasks/set-up-quality-orders https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/inventory/tasks/set-up-quality-orders https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/inventory/enable-quality-management", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 3, "stem": "SIMULATION - You are a functional consultant for a company named Contoso Entertainment System USA (USMF). You perform a manual inventory count and discover that item number T0003 has an inventory count of 230 units. You need to adjust the inventory to reflect the manual count. To complete this task, sign in to Dynamics 365 portal. See explanation below. There are several ways to update the inventory. You can use one of the inventory adjustment journals or you can use the quantity adjust functionality to adjust the Quantity of Inventory from the 'On hand inventory' form. 1. Navigate to Product Information management > Products > Released Product 2. In the Released Product form, select item number T0003. 3. On the Manage Inventory action tab, click the 'On Hand inventory' button. 4. On 'On Hand inventory' you can check available quantity. 5. Click the Quantity adjustment button to adjust the quantity. 6. In the Quantity field, specify the quantity 230. 7. Once the quantity has been specified click on OK button. 8. Now you can check adjusted quantity on 'On Hand Inventory' form. Reference: https://www.cloudfronts.com/quantity-adjustment-hand-inventory-d365-finance-operations/", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 4, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company is implementing inventory by using Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. You need to set up inventory journals and ensure that they are used for the correct processes. Which journal types should you use? To answer, drag the appropriate journal types to the correct actions. Each journal type may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Select and Place: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/inventory/inventory-journals", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 5, "stem": "A company is implementing sales order functionality in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company has a business requirement to fulfill sales orders by using direct delivery. You need to enter a direct delivery sales order so that a purchase order is automatically created. What should you do after you enter the sales order and lines?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Set the ship complete toggle to On and confirm the order on the sales order header." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Select automatic and confirm the sales order on the line level setup tab in the reservation field." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Change the site to direct delivery and confirm the sales order." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Select the direct delivery option under the sales order action pane and complete the form." } ], "answer": "D" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 6, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A company is implementing inventory management in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company needs to block inventory and ensure that physical inventory will not be reserved by other outbound transactions. You need to select the appropriate option to block the inventory in the system. Solution: Select the full blocking option in the item sampling page. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No B References: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/unified-operations/supply-chain/inventory/inventory-blocking" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 7, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A company is implementing inventory management in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company needs to block inventory and ensure that physical inventory will not be reserved by other outbound transactions. You need to select the appropriate option to block the inventory in the system. Solution: Create a quality order on the quality orders page for the quantity to be blocked. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No" } ], "answer": "A" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 8, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A company is implementing inventory management in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company needs to block inventory and ensure that physical inventory will not be reserved by other outbound transactions. You need to select the appropriate option to block the inventory in the system. Solution: Manually create a transaction on the inventory blocking page. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No A References: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/unified-operations/supply-chain/inventory/inventory-blocking" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 9, "stem": "HOTSPOT - Inventory in a warehouse is assigned to an inventory status of available. You need to set up an inventory status for damaged items so that they are not sold to customers. Which values should you use? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 10, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company plans to stock new items and value those items by using FIFO principle. The company has multiple sites set up. There are multiple warehouses for each site. You must be able to view the value and quantity of these items at each warehouse. You need to apply FIFO costing per warehouse. How should you complete the costing setup? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 11, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company implements warehouse locations in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. You need to configure location directives for inventory movement. Which configurations should you use? To answer, drag the appropriate strategies to the correct requirements. Each strategy may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Select and Place:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 12, "stem": "DRAG DROP - You are the quality supervisor for a company. You receive 100 units of item C0001. You find defects in some units. You move the items to quarantine for further inspection. Fifty units fail inspection. You need to scrap the defective units. Which four actions should you perform in sequence? To answer, move the appropriate actions from the list of actions to the answer area and arrange them in the correct order. Select and Place:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 13, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company sells a new product line. Buyers purchase a large shipment into the distribution center. The product must be divided among the retail stores equally. You need to configure buyer push functionality. Which configuration options should you use? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 14, "stem": "DRAG DROP - You are implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. A user reports that some of the quarantine statuses appear to mean the same thing. You need to explain the status of quarantine orders by the location of the item. What is the status of the orders based on the location of the item? To answer, drag the appropriate statuses to the correct steps. Each status may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Select and Place: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/inventory/quarantine-orders", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 15, "stem": "A company runs out of inventory in warehouse 22 but has overstock in warehouse 11. The warehouses are linked to the same site. The inventory must be moved from warehouse 11 to warehouse 22. The company must retain ownership of the inventory financially and be able to generate reports as to where the inventory value resides at all times. You need to create an order to move the stock. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Create a transfer order from the transit warehouse to warehouse 22." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Create a transfer order from warehouse 11 to the transit warehouse." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Create a transfer order from warehouse 11 to warehouse 22." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Create a sales order for warehouse 11 and a purchase order for warehouse 22." } ], "answer": "C" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 16, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company must ship product from one warehouse, receive it in another, and account for the inventory. It will take two days for the shipment to travel between locations. You need to set up and process the transfer between the two warehouses. How should you complete the setup? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 17, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A company is implementing inventory management in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company needs to block inventory and ensure that physical inventory will not be reserved by other outbound transactions. You need to select the appropriate option to block the inventory in the system. Solution: Configure a blocking cause in the inventory setup configuration. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 18, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. You need to perform month-end close processes. At which process steps should you perform the actions? To answer, drag the appropriate process steps to the appropriate actions. Each process step may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Select and Place:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 19, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. An employee notices a discrepancy in inventory. You need to create the inventory blocking transaction. What are two possible ways to achieve the goal? Each correct answer presents a complete solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "inventory status" }, { "label": "B", "text": "quality order" }, { "label": "C", "text": "batch disposition code" }, { "label": "D", "text": "manual inventory blocking BD References: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/unified-operations/supply-chain/inventory/inventory-blocking" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 20, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Orders are reserved against open purchase orders that have not yet been received. As a result, there are issues prioritizing deliveries, which is causing backorders on both sales orders and transfer orders. Negative inventory is not currently allowed. Product reservations must be performed against physical stock only. You need to update the configuration for product reservations. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Clear the Reserve Items Automatically check box for transfers." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Clear the Reserve Ordered Items check box." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Select the Auto batch reservations check box." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Select the Physical negative inventory check box." } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 21, "stem": "A company has revenue items that generate high, medium, or low revenue. You need to configure ABC classifications as follows: Which two actions should you perform? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Define highest, middle, and lowest ABC values as percentages" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Define highest, middle, and lowest ABC values as amounts" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Select ABC model of revenue" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Define internal interest in percentage" }, { "label": "E", "text": "Select ABC model of value" } ], "answer": "AC" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 22, "stem": "HOTSPOT - All items that a company purchases from a specific vendor arrive with defects. You need to automatically generate quality orders for all items when the products are physically received from the vendor, and product receipts are issued. How should you configure the quality association? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/inventory/quality-orders https://docs.microsoft.com/en- us/dynamics365/supply-chain/inventory/quality-associations", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 23, "stem": "A company plans to run their profit and loss statements by using the site storage dimension. If the site is changed on sales order, purchase order, or other source document, a mismatch is created between financial and storage dimensions. This leads to incorrect profit and loss reporting. You need to ensure that the financial dimension updates when the site storage dimension changes. Which three actions should you perform? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Lock the dimension link." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Associate the financial dimension hierarchy with the storage dimension hierarchy in the organization chart." }, { "label": "C", "text": "On the storage dimension site setup screen, select Default inventory status ID." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Associate the site storage dimension with the site financial dimension." }, { "label": "E", "text": "Activate the dimension link. ADE" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 24, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Products must automatically be classified based on the company's objectives and priorities. You need to create the ABC model. Which three ABC codes should you configure? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Margin" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Cost" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Revenue" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Profit" }, { "label": "E", "text": "Value ACE" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 25, "stem": "You are the materials manager at a distribution company. You are responsible for setting up the ABC classification of all items as follows: \u0000 Class A materials represent 70 percent of the material value. \u0000 Class B materials represent 20 percent of the material value. \u0000 Class C materials represent 10 percent of the material value but are the most commonly used. You need to assign an ABC classification value model to all items using those values. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Run the ABC classification report" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Run the ABC classification periodic task to update the value model for all items" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Manually update the Value classification on the Released product record" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Run the ABC classification periodic task to update the revenue model for all items" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 26, "stem": "DRAG DROP - You are the sales manager at a distribution company. You have a drop-ship order for a batch of chemicals that will go directly from your vendor to your customer. You need to create and process this direct delivery within Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Which three actions should you perform in sequence? To answer, move the appropriate actions from the list of actions to the answer area and arrange them in the correct order. Select and Place: References: https://community.dynamics.com/ax/b/abhijeethelestheaxeffect/archive/2018/09/19/direct-delivery-in-dynamics-365-for- finance-and-operations", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 27, "stem": "HOTSPOT - An inventory control clerk manages adjustments in inventory. Some adjustments have a cost impact. Other adjustments must be posted to a specific ledger account or must be registered in inventory. You need to configure the system. Which journal types should you use? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 28, "stem": "A company employee is in charge of warehouse operations and controlling inventory adjustments through journals. The employee needs to add inventory for samples at a specific cost. The samples were shipped by a vendor without a purchase order. The employee needs to be sure that the inventory value goes to a ledger account so that the value of the samples is not mixed in with other inventory value. You need to ensure that the employee is able to correctly add the inventory. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Create a movement journal, add the cost, and specify the offset ledger account on the line." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Create an adjustment journal, add the cost, and specify the offset ledger account on the line." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Create an arrival journal, add the cost, and specify the offset ledger account on the line." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Create a transfer journal, transfer to a different warehouse, and then adjust the cost. A References: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/unified-operations/supply-chain/inventory/inventory-journals" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 29, "stem": "DRAG DROP - You are the inventory manager for a distribution center. You are configuring the inventory breakdown for a new center in California. You need to set up warehouse locations for the center and configure the prerequisite inventory hierarchy. Which four actions should you perform in sequence? To answer, move the appropriate actions from the list of actions to the answer area and arrange them in the correct order. Select and Place:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 30, "stem": "DRAG DROP - During a company's busy season, the sales team experiences multiple backorders. The company wants to use forecasting to determine seasonal buying trends. You need to define the setup and data set required for forecasting. Which four actions should you perform in sequence? To answer, move the appropriate actions from the list of actions to the answer area and arrange them in the correct order. Select and Place:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 31, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company sells vehicles and performs multiple quality checks on them while in production. The company receives a customer complaint about a 2019 vehicle that has leaks around the windows and door seals. You need to block inventory on these vehicles and perform quality tests to ensure that there are no leaks. What should you do? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/inventory/quality-test-variables", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 32, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage inventory. The company realizes that there is an incorrect inventory amount for Item 33442 in Warehouse 1. You need to correct the inventory amount by using the posting setup configured on the item group. Which two journal types achieve the goal? Each correct selection provides a complete solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Inventory adjustment journal" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Inventory transfer journal" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Inventory movement journal" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Inventory counting journal" } ], "answer": "AD" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 33, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company opens a new warehouse facility. You need to receive items on a transfer order by using an arrival overview. In which order should you perform the actions? To answer, move all actions from the list of actions to the answer area and arrange them in the correct order. Select and Place: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/inventory/arrival-overview", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 34, "stem": "You use Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage inventory. You need to adjust inventory and override the current item posting setup. Which journal type should you use?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "inventory adjustment" }, { "label": "B", "text": "inventory transfer" }, { "label": "C", "text": "movement" }, { "label": "D", "text": "item arrival" } ], "answer": "C" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 35, "stem": "SIMULATION - You are a functional consultant for a company named Contoso Entertainment System USA (USMF). You plan to manage safety stock level. You need to configure a minimum stock level of 1,500 units for an item named StandardSpeakerUpSel in warehouse number 13. To complete this task, sign in to Dynamics 365 portal. See explanation below. Select Product information management > Products > Released products and then select the product (StandardSpeakerUpSel), and then on the Action Pane, in the Plan tab, in the Coverage group, select Item coverage to open the Item coverage page. Select Min/Max in for the Coverage code and enter the value 1,500 for the Minimum value. Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/configure-use-master-planning-dyn365-supply-chain-mgmt/02-setup", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 36, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management with advanced warehouse capabilities. Warehouse workers use mobile devices. High value stocked items are classified as A items and are stocked in different locations in the warehouse. The accounting department requires that all A items be counted weekly. If there are any inconsistencies, the A items must be counted a second time prior to posting the counts. You need to configure the system to meet the requirements. What should you configure for each requirement? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 37, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Inventory is valued through FIFO costing. The company is preparing for cutover and go-live activities. The accounting manager wants to ensure that on-hand inventory is brought into Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management at the correct cost. ItemA has the following costing tiers: • Tier 1: 20 each, $5 • Tier 2: 20 each, $10 • Tier 3: 20 each, $15 You need to configure the item and journals to meet the cutover requirement. What should you configure? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 38, "stem": "A company uses the nonconformance functionality in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. When a manufactured part fails a quality test, a quality clerk creates a nonconformance. You determine that additional items are needed to correct the issue. You must record the additional items for the nonconformance. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Reject the nonconformance and add the items to the quality order." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Reject the nonconformance and add a related operation." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Approve the nonconformance and add the items to the quality order." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Approve the nonconformance and add a related operation." } ], "answer": "D" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 39, "stem": "A company that uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management recently became ISO 9001-certified. The company must begin documenting nonconformances. You need to configure the nonconformance functionality. Which three features must you configure? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "routes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "operations" }, { "label": "C", "text": "diagnostic types" }, { "label": "D", "text": "quality charges" }, { "label": "E", "text": "quarantine zones BCE" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 40, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Inventory is valued through FIFO costing. The warehouse manager identifies item discrepancies and increases quantities in a counting journal. Finance then discovers that the cost on ItemA posted as zero dollars on the journal transaction. You need to configure the system to ensure that the cost is populated on the transaction. What should you configure? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area, NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 41, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A distribution company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. A customer contacts the company to identify a defect in an ordered part. Additional quantities of the defective item are in stock. The defective items require a task that will trigger an action for the items and a label printed. You need to configure the system. Which features should you configure? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 42, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A frozen food distribution company is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The warehouse manager wants to ensure that after items are picked, a temperature check is performed and verified on the items before shipment to customers. The temperature check must fall within a specific temperature range to pass. You need to configure the system. Which components should you configure? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 43, "stem": "A warehouse uses mobile devices for locating products. Products are listed in the Inventory module in incorrect locations. Users must therefore manually locate products to be picked. You need to ensure that the users’ mobile device updates the locations of the products. Which two actions should you take to update product locations by using the mobile devices? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Manually move product to the correct physical location." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Log into a desktop computer and update the Inventory module." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Manually find the physical location of the product." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Scan a shelf barcode and update the inventory." } ], "answer": "CD" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 44, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A distribution company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. A high-volume warehouse for the distribution company automatically releases transfer order lines to the warehouse throughout the day. Order line quantities are frequently changed after release to the warehouse. However, the load lines are not always updated. You need to configure automatic updates to the load lines. What should you configure? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 45, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A food distribution company is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management without the Warehouse management module. The company sells prepackaged meals purchased from one or more vendors. The prepackaged meals contain a single item number. The vendors routinely communicate that lots of prepackaged meals be held if any risk of exposure is identified until they can confirm safe handling per lot. This created supply chain issues because the items are in inventory and therefore not reordered. You need to resolve the issues. What should you configure? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 46, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company has multiple shrink wrap machines on the shipping dock. An older shrink wrap machine has a unique vibration. The older machine must be inspected frequently and measured against the vibration and performance of other machines. You need to configure the following requirements for the aging shrink wrap machine: • Inspect the older machine frequently. • Measure results against other machines. What should you configure for each requirement? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 47, "stem": "A cement manufacturing company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company has two manufacturing plants. On average, each production plant produces 300,000 bags of cement before it must shut down for maintenance. The production controller must allocate the required resources during the maintenance period. You need to configure the system to meet the controller’s requirements. Which two options should you configure? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Attributes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Counters" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Maintenance plans" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Asset service levels" }, { "label": "E", "text": "Maintenance requests" } ], "answer": "BC" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 48, "stem": "Case study - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Trey Research is a multinational manufacturer of health and dietary supplements based in Seattle, Washington. The company is experiencing a rapid expansion not only in its supplements but as a lifestyle brand that also sells apparel. The supplements and apparel businesses operate independently but manufacture and operate in the same legal entity. Current environment - Current environment. Technology - Current environment. Technology - Trey Research is migrating from an outdated, on-premises version of Dynamics AX to Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company wants to retain a lot of its current data structures and processes but adopt new efficiencies when the benefit is obvious. The company uses a third-party e-commerce site that is custom developed by an internal developer. Current environment. Items - Product numbering - All items are numbered by using a smart numbering format: [Product SKU+Size+Color+Style]. For reporting, items are queried for sales and inventory reports by using the first six digits of the item number or until the first dash is encountered. • A t-shirt could be 01001-S-Red for item 1001 in a size small with the color red. • A single energy drink could be 02001-12oz or 02001-20oz for the different sizes that product 02001 is sold in. Product attributes - • All clothing shares the same set of product attributes. • Supplements may share the same Product SKU but can have different attributes for the different size, color, or style variations of the product. • Product attributes that are unnecessary for an item should be excluded from the item. Pricing - • All items always have a default price. This price will not expire. • An item will have four different prices created for it every month, one for each customer tier, as detailed later in this section. The pricing expires at the end of the month. If no special pricing is created, the default item price will be used. • The monthly sales price in which the additional price breaks are determined is based on the estimated cost of the manufactured items. • Customers are categorized into four pricing tiers (A, B, C, and D) based on sales volume over the past 12 months. • Customers can negotiate special pricing for items in 30-day, 60-day, and 90-day increments. Quantity restrictions may be placed, depending on the item discount and promotion. • Promotional pricing is not used today. Pricing is restricted to monthly prices and customer-specific contract pricing. Cost - Items use a FIFO costing model today in their current Dynamics AX 2009 environment; however, using the FIFO costing method has created problems. Current environment. Warehouse and inventory • Warehouse requirements are simplistic. There is only one site. The site has two warehouses. • Trey Research needs to make sure that any energy drinks and nutritional supplements are manufactured and packaged with the highest standards. Trey Research automatically inspects products when all products are reported as finished. All products are inspected again when the items are picked. • Energy drinks require independent tests to check for dents in packaging, carbonation levels, and fill level. • Nutritional supplements require separate tests for packaging, expiration date, product seal, and product labeling. • Government compliancy and consistency testing are handled outside of the Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) system. • Resalable products are placed on one of two racks in the warehouse. Requirements - Requirements. Technology - • Trey Research will integrate all pricing and discount capabilities to its e-commerce website. Requirements. Items - • Reporting on products should be streamlined as much as possible. • The item numbering does not have to equate to the actual item number. • The future costing methods adopted must be commonly accepted for manufacturers. • Inventory costing should be done after a full inventory valuation is complete. It should take into consideration the direct materials, direct labor, and overhead that goes into an item. • Any costing method used needs the ability to track cost records about an item, cost categories, and calculation formulas for indirect costs. • The profitability for nutritional supplements manufacturing processes needs to be expressed in terms of the cost categories for routing operations and the calculation formulas for manufacturing overheads. • If a vendor can no longer deliver the raw materials for the energy drinks due to supply chain issues, the costs for using an alternative vendor to source the raw materials should be used to determine the impact on profits. • Apparel items will not be upgraded to the new costing method until after the go-live date due to resourcing and implementation limitations from the apparel team. Requirements. Pricing - • Trey Research plans to do promotional pricing. Certain products will receive special pricing during the hours of extreme sporting events that Trey Research sponsors. Before or after the event, normal pricing will resume. Requirements. White labeling - • Trey Research wants to start white labeling its products under the brands of major nutritional retail store brands. These products would only be sold to specific customers. • Trey Research will provide and maintain a 'Compare to' price for customers to use to compare the white-labeled products. This Compare to price will also be the default item price for the customer if the customer accidentally lets a contract price expire. • The configuration of these restrictions must be applied automatically when creating new products for those customers. Requirements. Warehouse and inventory • If products in the warehouse must be blocked from transactions for a specific reason, such as a health and safety review, warehouse users should be able to block the products quickly from the ERP system. • All product quality tests should be processed in a uniform and consistent manner. • All product quality tests should be processed in a uniform and consistent manner. • Creation of any quality processes for products inbound to the warehouse, from the production line, or outbound from the warehouse to consumers should be automatically created to facilitate execution. • Testing requirements: \u0000 Requirement 1: 100 percent of all nutritional supplements and 50 percent of all energy drinks must be tested when production orders are completed. After a product is in testing, 100 percent of all tests must be completed. \u0000 Requirement 2: 75 percent of all nutritional supplements and energy drinks should be tested against their required tests during an outbound process. \u0000 Damaged products must be placed in one of four bins (based on product type) during the inspection process. \u0000 You must define quarantine zones to optimize product visibility throughout the testing process. You need to define the number of quarantine zones. How many should you define?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "1" }, { "label": "B", "text": "2" }, { "label": "C", "text": "4" }, { "label": "D", "text": "6" }, { "label": "E", "text": "8" } ], "answer": "C" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 49, "stem": "Case study - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Trey Research is a multinational manufacturer of health and dietary supplements based in Seattle, Washington. The company is experiencing a rapid expansion not only in its supplements but as a lifestyle brand that also sells apparel. The supplements and apparel businesses operate independently but manufacture and operate in the same legal entity. Current environment - Current environment. Technology - Current environment. Technology - Trey Research is migrating from an outdated, on-premises version of Dynamics AX to Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company wants to retain a lot of its current data structures and processes but adopt new efficiencies when the benefit is obvious. The company uses a third-party e-commerce site that is custom developed by an internal developer. Current environment. Items - Product numbering - All items are numbered by using a smart numbering format: [Product SKU+Size+Color+Style]. For reporting, items are queried for sales and inventory reports by using the first six digits of the item number or until the first dash is encountered. • A t-shirt could be 01001-S-Red for item 1001 in a size small with the color red. • A single energy drink could be 02001-12oz or 02001-20oz for the different sizes that product 02001 is sold in. Product attributes - • All clothing shares the same set of product attributes. • Supplements may share the same Product SKU but can have different attributes for the different size, color, or style variations of the product. • Product attributes that are unnecessary for an item should be excluded from the item. Pricing - • All items always have a default price. This price will not expire. • An item will have four different prices created for it every month, one for each customer tier, as detailed later in this section. The pricing expires at the end of the month. If no special pricing is created, the default item price will be used. • The monthly sales price in which the additional price breaks are determined is based on the estimated cost of the manufactured items. • Customers are categorized into four pricing tiers (A, B, C, and D) based on sales volume over the past 12 months. • Customers can negotiate special pricing for items in 30-day, 60-day, and 90-day increments. Quantity restrictions may be placed, depending on the item discount and promotion. • Promotional pricing is not used today. Pricing is restricted to monthly prices and customer-specific contract pricing. Cost - Items use a FIFO costing model today in their current Dynamics AX 2009 environment; however, using the FIFO costing method has created problems. Current environment. Warehouse and inventory • Warehouse requirements are simplistic. There is only one site. The site has two warehouses. • Trey Research needs to make sure that any energy drinks and nutritional supplements are manufactured and packaged with the highest standards. Trey Research automatically inspects products when all products are reported as finished. All products are inspected again when the items are picked. • Energy drinks require independent tests to check for dents in packaging, carbonation levels, and fill level. • Nutritional supplements require separate tests for packaging, expiration date, product seal, and product labeling. • Government compliancy and consistency testing are handled outside of the Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) system. • Resalable products are placed on one of two racks in the warehouse. Requirements - Requirements. Technology - • Trey Research will integrate all pricing and discount capabilities to its e-commerce website. Requirements. Items - • Reporting on products should be streamlined as much as possible. • The item numbering does not have to equate to the actual item number. • The future costing methods adopted must be commonly accepted for manufacturers. • Inventory costing should be done after a full inventory valuation is complete. It should take into consideration the direct materials, direct labor, and overhead that goes into an item. • Any costing method used needs the ability to track cost records about an item, cost categories, and calculation formulas for indirect costs. • The profitability for nutritional supplements manufacturing processes needs to be expressed in terms of the cost categories for routing operations and the calculation formulas for manufacturing overheads. • If a vendor can no longer deliver the raw materials for the energy drinks due to supply chain issues, the costs for using an alternative vendor to source the raw materials should be used to determine the impact on profits. • Apparel items will not be upgraded to the new costing method until after the go-live date due to resourcing and implementation limitations from the apparel team. Requirements. Pricing - • Trey Research plans to do promotional pricing. Certain products will receive special pricing during the hours of extreme sporting events that Trey Research sponsors. Before or after the event, normal pricing will resume. Requirements. White labeling - • Trey Research wants to start white labeling its products under the brands of major nutritional retail store brands. These products would only be sold to specific customers. • Trey Research will provide and maintain a 'Compare to' price for customers to use to compare the white-labeled products. This Compare to price will also be the default item price for the customer if the customer accidentally lets a contract price expire. • The configuration of these restrictions must be applied automatically when creating new products for those customers. Requirements. Warehouse and inventory • If products in the warehouse must be blocked from transactions for a specific reason, such as a health and safety review, warehouse users should be able to block the products quickly from the ERP system. • All product quality tests should be processed in a uniform and consistent manner. • All product quality tests should be processed in a uniform and consistent manner. • Creation of any quality processes for products inbound to the warehouse, from the production line, or outbound from the warehouse to consumers should be automatically created to facilitate execution. • Testing requirements: \u0000 Requirement 1: 100 percent of all nutritional supplements and 50 percent of all energy drinks must be tested when production orders are completed. After a product is in testing, 100 percent of all tests must be completed. \u0000 Requirement 2: 75 percent of all nutritional supplements and energy drinks should be tested against their required tests during an outbound process. \u0000 Damaged products must be placed in one of four bins (based on product type) during the inspection process. \u0000 You must define quarantine zones to optimize product visibility throughout the testing process. You need to configure the system to automatically enforce inbound and outbound product requirements to and from the warehouse. Which feature should you use?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "quality associations" }, { "label": "B", "text": "quality orders" }, { "label": "C", "text": "quarantine zones" }, { "label": "D", "text": "quality tests" }, { "label": "E", "text": "nonconformances" } ], "answer": "A" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 50, "stem": "HOTSPOT - Case study - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Trey Research is a multinational manufacturer of health and dietary supplements based in Seattle, Washington. The company is experiencing a rapid expansion not only in its supplements but as a lifestyle brand that also sells apparel. The supplements is experiencing a rapid expansion not only in its supplements but as a lifestyle brand that also sells apparel. The supplements and apparel businesses operate independently but manufacture and operate in the same legal entity. Current environment - Current environment. Technology Trey Research is migrating from an outdated, on-premises version of Dynamics AX to Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company wants to retain a lot of its current data structures and processes but adopt new efficiencies when the benefit is obvious. The company uses a third-party e-commerce site that is custom developed by an internal developer. Current environment. Items - Product numbering - All items are numbered by using a smart numbering format: [Product SKU+Size+Color+Style]. For reporting, items are queried for sales and inventory reports by using the first six digits of the item number or until the first dash is encountered. • A t-shirt could be 01001-S-Red for item 1001 in a size small with the color red. • A single energy drink could be 02001-12oz or 02001-20oz for the different sizes that product 02001 is sold in. Product attributes - • All clothing shares the same set of product attributes. • Supplements may share the same Product SKU but can have different attributes for the different size, color, or style variations of the product. • Product attributes that are unnecessary for an item should be excluded from the item. Pricing - • All items always have a default price. This price will not expire. • An item will have four different prices created for it every month, one for each customer tier, as detailed later in this section. The pricing expires at the end of the month. If no special pricing is created, the default item price will be used. • The monthly sales price in which the additional price breaks are determined is based on the estimated cost of the manufactured items. • Customers are categorized into four pricing tiers (A, B, C, and D) based on sales volume over the past 12 months. • Customers can negotiate special pricing for items in 30-day, 60-day, and 90-day increments. Quantity restrictions may be placed, depending on the item discount and promotion. • Promotional pricing is not used today. Pricing is restricted to monthly prices and customer-specific contract pricing. Cost - Items use a FIFO costing model today in their current Dynamics AX 2009 environment; however, using the FIFO costing method has created problems. Current environment. Warehouse and inventory • Warehouse requirements are simplistic. There is only one site. The site has two warehouses. • Trey Research needs to make sure that any energy drinks and nutritional supplements are manufactured and packaged with the highest standards. Trey Research automatically inspects products when all products are reported as finished. All products are inspected again when the items are picked. • Energy drinks require independent tests to check for dents in packaging, carbonation levels, and fill level. • Nutritional supplements require separate tests for packaging, expiration date, product seal, and product labeling. • Government compliancy and consistency testing are handled outside of the Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) system. • Resalable products are placed on one of two racks in the warehouse. Requirements - Requirements. Technology - • Trey Research will integrate all pricing and discount capabilities to its e-commerce website. Requirements. Items - • Reporting on products should be streamlined as much as possible. • The item numbering does not have to equate to the actual item number. • The future costing methods adopted must be commonly accepted for manufacturers. • Inventory costing should be done after a full inventory valuation is complete. It should take into consideration the direct materials, direct labor, and overhead that goes into an item. • Any costing method used needs the ability to track cost records about an item, cost categories, and calculation formulas for indirect costs. • The profitability for nutritional supplements manufacturing processes needs to be expressed in terms of the cost categories for routing operations and the calculation formulas for manufacturing overheads. • If a vendor can no longer deliver the raw materials for the energy drinks due to supply chain issues, the costs for using an alternative vendor to source the raw materials should be used to determine the impact on profits. • Apparel items will not be upgraded to the new costing method until after the go-live date due to resourcing and implementation limitations from the apparel team. Requirements. Pricing - • Trey Research plans to do promotional pricing. Certain products will receive special pricing during the hours of extreme sporting events that Trey Research sponsors. Before or after the event, normal pricing will resume. sporting events that Trey Research sponsors. Before or after the event, normal pricing will resume. Requirements. White labeling - • Trey Research wants to start white labeling its products under the brands of major nutritional retail store brands. These products would only be sold to specific customers. • Trey Research will provide and maintain a 'Compare to' price for customers to use to compare the white-labeled products. This Compare to price will also be the default item price for the customer if the customer accidentally lets a contract price expire. • The configuration of these restrictions must be applied automatically when creating new products for those customers. Requirements. Warehouse and inventory • If products in the warehouse must be blocked from transactions for a specific reason, such as a health and safety review, warehouse users should be able to block the products quickly from the ERP system. • All product quality tests should be processed in a uniform and consistent manner. • Creation of any quality processes for products inbound to the warehouse, from the production line, or outbound from the warehouse to consumers should be automatically created to facilitate execution. • Testing requirements: \u0000 Requirement 1: 100 percent of all nutritional supplements and 50 percent of all energy drinks must be tested when production orders are completed. After a product is in testing, 100 percent of all tests must be completed. \u0000 Requirement 2: 75 percent of all nutritional supplements and energy drinks should be tested against their required tests during an outbound process. \u0000 Damaged products must be placed in one of four bins (based on product type) during the inspection process. \u0000 You must define quarantine zones to optimize product visibility throughout the testing process. You need to configure the products in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management for the requirements. Which system objects should you use? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 51, "stem": "DRAG DROP - Case study - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Trey Research is a multinational manufacturer of health and dietary supplements based in Seattle, Washington. The company is experiencing a rapid expansion not only in its supplements but as a lifestyle brand that also sells apparel. The supplements is experiencing a rapid expansion not only in its supplements but as a lifestyle brand that also sells apparel. The supplements and apparel businesses operate independently but manufacture and operate in the same legal entity. Current environment - Current environment. Technology Trey Research is migrating from an outdated, on-premises version of Dynamics AX to Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company wants to retain a lot of its current data structures and processes but adopt new efficiencies when the benefit is obvious. The company uses a third-party e-commerce site that is custom developed by an internal developer. Current environment. Items - Product numbering - All items are numbered by using a smart numbering format: [Product SKU+Size+Color+Style]. For reporting, items are queried for sales and inventory reports by using the first six digits of the item number or until the first dash is encountered. • A t-shirt could be 01001-S-Red for item 1001 in a size small with the color red. • A single energy drink could be 02001-12oz or 02001-20oz for the different sizes that product 02001 is sold in. Product attributes - • All clothing shares the same set of product attributes. • Supplements may share the same Product SKU but can have different attributes for the different size, color, or style variations of the product. • Product attributes that are unnecessary for an item should be excluded from the item. Pricing - • All items always have a default price. This price will not expire. • An item will have four different prices created for it every month, one for each customer tier, as detailed later in this section. The pricing expires at the end of the month. If no special pricing is created, the default item price will be used. • The monthly sales price in which the additional price breaks are determined is based on the estimated cost of the manufactured items. • Customers are categorized into four pricing tiers (A, B, C, and D) based on sales volume over the past 12 months. • Customers can negotiate special pricing for items in 30-day, 60-day, and 90-day increments. Quantity restrictions may be placed, depending on the item discount and promotion. • Promotional pricing is not used today. Pricing is restricted to monthly prices and customer-specific contract pricing. Cost - Items use a FIFO costing model today in their current Dynamics AX 2009 environment; however, using the FIFO costing method has created problems. Current environment. Warehouse and inventory • Warehouse requirements are simplistic. There is only one site. The site has two warehouses. • Trey Research needs to make sure that any energy drinks and nutritional supplements are manufactured and packaged with the highest standards. Trey Research automatically inspects products when all products are reported as finished. All products are inspected again when the items are picked. • Energy drinks require independent tests to check for dents in packaging, carbonation levels, and fill level. • Nutritional supplements require separate tests for packaging, expiration date, product seal, and product labeling. • Government compliancy and consistency testing are handled outside of the Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) system. • Resalable products are placed on one of two racks in the warehouse. Requirements - Requirements. Technology - • Trey Research will integrate all pricing and discount capabilities to its e-commerce website. Requirements. Items - • Reporting on products should be streamlined as much as possible. • The item numbering does not have to equate to the actual item number. • The future costing methods adopted must be commonly accepted for manufacturers. • Inventory costing should be done after a full inventory valuation is complete. It should take into consideration the direct materials, direct labor, and overhead that goes into an item. • Any costing method used needs the ability to track cost records about an item, cost categories, and calculation formulas for indirect costs. • The profitability for nutritional supplements manufacturing processes needs to be expressed in terms of the cost categories for routing operations and the calculation formulas for manufacturing overheads. • If a vendor can no longer deliver the raw materials for the energy drinks due to supply chain issues, the costs for using an alternative vendor to source the raw materials should be used to determine the impact on profits. • Apparel items will not be upgraded to the new costing method until after the go-live date due to resourcing and implementation limitations from the apparel team. Requirements. Pricing - • Trey Research plans to do promotional pricing. Certain products will receive special pricing during the hours of extreme sporting events that Trey Research sponsors. Before or after the event, normal pricing will resume. sporting events that Trey Research sponsors. Before or after the event, normal pricing will resume. Requirements. White labeling - • Trey Research wants to start white labeling its products under the brands of major nutritional retail store brands. These products would only be sold to specific customers. • Trey Research will provide and maintain a 'Compare to' price for customers to use to compare the white-labeled products. This Compare to price will also be the default item price for the customer if the customer accidentally lets a contract price expire. • The configuration of these restrictions must be applied automatically when creating new products for those customers. Requirements. Warehouse and inventory • If products in the warehouse must be blocked from transactions for a specific reason, such as a health and safety review, warehouse users should be able to block the products quickly from the ERP system. • All product quality tests should be processed in a uniform and consistent manner. • Creation of any quality processes for products inbound to the warehouse, from the production line, or outbound from the warehouse to consumers should be automatically created to facilitate execution. • Testing requirements: \u0000 Requirement 1: 100 percent of all nutritional supplements and 50 percent of all energy drinks must be tested when production orders are completed. After a product is in testing, 100 percent of all tests must be completed. \u0000 Requirement 2: 75 percent of all nutritional supplements and energy drinks should be tested against their required tests during an outbound process. \u0000 Damaged products must be placed in one of four bins (based on product type) during the inspection process. \u0000 You must define quarantine zones to optimize product visibility throughout the testing process. You need to configure quality controls. Which solution objects should you configure? To answer, drag the appropriate solution objects to the correct configurations. Each solution object may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 52, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company purchased a high-tech machine that cuts production time in half compared to existing machines. The new machine must be serviced after 200 finished goods are produced. Downtime for the new machine will impact production and must be planned in advance so the production lead times are adjusted. The service technicians must always prioritize the new machine repairs over any other repairs. You need to configure the new machine to prioritize servicing over other repairs. What should you configure for each requirement? To answer, drag the appropriate configurations to the correct requirements. Each configuration may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 53, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A bottle manufacturing company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage operations. The company plans to install machines that accept empty bottles for a cash refund or donation at several recycling locations. You need to complete the setup for installation of the assets. What should you configure for each requirement? To answer, drag the appropriate features to the correct requirements. Each feature may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 54, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company wants to optimize the warehouse inbound operations. You need to select the inbound operation business process based on the scenario. Which inbound operations should you select? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 55, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company purchased new forklifts for the warehouse. The types of forklifts vary based on the purpose within the warehouse. Parts, such as belts and wheels, are not always universal and could be specific to the forklift manufacturer and model. The forklift purchase orders must go through a purchase requisition approval process because they are being purchased from new vendors. You need to determine where to capture the manufacturer and model information for each forklift. On which component should you capture the information for each requirement? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 56, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company plans to add trucks to the existing truck fleet over the upcoming months. The company requires truck drivers to complete a daily self-inspection of their trucks. The government requires that commercial trucks are inspected annually by a certified repair facility. The fleet manager wants to minimize the amount of time the truck is in the shop. • When a truck driver reports a problem during the daily inspection that requires a repair and is within a week of the annual inspection, the company requires that both events occur the same time in the shop. • The annual inspection can vary on due date for both new and existing trucks. You must configure the requirements to minimize truck downtime. What should you configure for each requirement? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 57, "stem": "A manufacturing company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company replaced its burners to limit carbon dioxide emissions. The new burners require frequent servicing to be compliant with environmental regulations. The new burners are more complex and take longer to service than the previous burners. The production controller must track fuel use in liters to schedule timely maintenance. The additional time taken to plan maintenance must be considered. You must configure the system to meet the requirements. Which two actions should you perform? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Register consumption." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Configure counter types." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Set up asset service level." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Configure asset BOM." }, { "label": "E", "text": "Create attributes." } ], "answer": "AD" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 58, "stem": "A company is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Based on a vendor agreement, the company must take ownership of items when they are shipped. Items must be part of inventory valuation but not available for sale until they are physically received into the warehouse. You need to configure the system to meet the vendor's requirements. What should you configure?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Landed cost" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Item group" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Item status" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Item arrival" }, { "label": "E", "text": "Transportation management" } ], "answer": "A" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 59, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management and the FIFO valuation method for inventory. The company’s warehouse experienced a roof leak. The leak caused damage to items in the warehouse. Accounting must know the total cost of inventory that is damaged but does not want the damaged items removed from inventory until they have been inspected. You need to meet the requirements of the accounting department. Which two features should you use? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Stop item for inventory transactions" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Movement journal" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Order holds" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Location profile" }, { "label": "E", "text": "Inventory status BE" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 60, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A manufacturing company has implemented Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company relies on machinery and equipment for its operations. It has a diverse range of assets, including manufacturing equipment, vehicles, and tools. The company wants to optimize its asset maintenance processes to minimize downtime and improve overall productivity. The company wants to implement both preventive and reactive maintenance strategies on the following scenarios: • Changing the tires and oil on the maintenance vehicle fleet. • Replacing a faulty component on a box maker. You need to determine the functionality to use for each maintenance requirement. Solution: Create maintenance plans for the vehicle fleet and the box maker. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 61, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A manufacturing company has implemented Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company relies on machinery and equipment for its operations. It has a diverse range of assets, including manufacturing equipment, vehicles, and tools. The company wants to optimize its asset maintenance processes to minimize downtime and improve overall productivity. The company wants to implement both preventive and reactive maintenance strategies on the following scenarios: • Changing the tires and oil on the maintenance vehicle fleet. • Replacing a faulty component on a box maker. You need to determine the functionality to use for each maintenance requirement. Solution: Create maintenance plan for the vehicle fleet and a maintenance round for the box maker. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 62, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A manufacturing company has implemented Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company relies on machinery and equipment for its operations. It has a diverse range of assets, including manufacturing equipment, vehicles, and tools. The company wants to optimize its asset maintenance processes to minimize downtime and improve overall productivity. The company wants to implement both preventive and reactive maintenance strategies on the following scenarios: • Changing the tires and oil on the maintenance vehicle fleet. • Replacing a faulty component on a box maker. You need to determine the functionality to use for each maintenance requirement. Solution: Create maintenance round for the vehicle fleet and a maintenance plan for the box maker. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No" } ], "answer": "A" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 63, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A manufacturing company has implemented Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company relies on machinery and equipment for its operations. It has a diverse range of assets, including manufacturing equipment, vehicles, and tools. The company wants to optimize its asset maintenance processes to minimize downtime and improve overall productivity. The company wants to implement both preventive and reactive maintenance strategies on the following scenarios: • Changing the tires and oil on the maintenance vehicle fleet. • Replacing a faulty component on a box maker. You need to determine the functionality to use for each maintenance requirement. Solution: Create maintenance rounds for both the vehicle fleet and the box maker. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 64, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company has a history of incorrect inventory valuation reporting due to non-existence of a proper cycle counting policy. You need to select the type of cycle counting to perform for each use case. Which cycle counting types should you perform? To answer, drag the appropriate cycle counting types to the correct use cases. Each cycle counting type may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 65, "stem": "A manufacturing company is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management for asset maintenance. The temperature control system requires calibration every six months by a certified metrologist. You need to configure the six-month cadence requirement. What should you configure?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Maintenance job trade" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Maintenance job type category" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Maintenance checklist variable" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Maintenance job type variant" } ], "answer": "D" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 66, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A manufacturing company is using Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management and wants to take advantage of the asset management capabilities. The company has a fleet of delivery trucks and wants to maintain the trucks to maximize the vehicle's performance and lifespan while minimizing the risk of breakdowns. To meet these requirements, the asset maintenance plan for the trucks should be configured with the following: • Require an oil change every 25,000 miles. • Require a comprehensive inspection every six months. You need to determine how to configure the asset maintenance plan lines for the delivery trucks. How should you configure the maintenance plan line? To answer, move the appropriate plan type to the correct requirement. You may use each plan type once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to move the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 67, "stem": "HOTSPOT - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Coho Vineyard & Winery is a parent company that has two subsidiaries: Coho Vineyard and Coho Winery. Coho Vineyard is based in Medford, Oregon. The vineyard grows the grapes and then produces and bottles the wine. Coho Winery, based in Grants Pass, Oregon, distributes packaged wine to businesses and consumers. The winery sells imported cheese and olive oil in addition to the wines. Current environment. Technology landscape Current environment. Technology landscape • Coho Vineyard & Winery requires financial reporting from both Coho Vineyard and Coho Winery. The parent company consolidates financials in a third-party tool. • Coho Winery currently manages inventory and financials on spreadsheets separately from the parent company. Current environment. Inventory and warehousing • The entire warehouse is temperature controlled. A refrigerated section of the warehouse is used for items that require colder storage. • The items do not have fixed locations in the warehouse. • Coho uses smart numbering for cheese items today. The items start with F for France and U for United States such as the following: • F11234 = French cheese • U14567 = US cheese • Currently, wine does not use smart numbering. • Inventory is valued at First In, First-Out (FIFO). • Olive oil has a 12-month shelf life. • WineA is expensive and not regularly stocked in the warehouse. • WineB must be in the refrigerated section of the warehouse. • WineC is non-refrigerated wine and is the majority of inventory in the warehouse. Current environment. Vendors and procurement • Cheese is purchased from vendors in two countries: France and United States. • Non-cheese items can be purchased from vendors in other countries or regions. • Olive oil is bought and sold in full cases of six each. • When Coho Vineyard produces more wine than expected in a season, rebate programs are offered to any company whose monthly purchases exceed $5,000. Requirements. General - • The Coho Vineyard & Winery parent company, as well as Coho Vineyard, will not be considered in the implementation of Dynamics 365 Finance and Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management for Coho Winery. They plan to implement them as separate legal entities in the next five years. Requirements. Inventory and warehousing • Items must be renumbered in the new system. • Separate item numbers must be used for each imported item for use in simplified reporting by source country or region. • Advanced Warehouse Management capabilities must be enabled in the new system. • Each bottle of wine has a single item number. • The vintage of each bottle will change annually and may affect the cost of the bottle. This cost must be tracked by year. • Some bottles of wine require refrigeration. The system must automatically define where items must be stored in the warehouse. • Wine must be grouped in a hierarchy such as the following: • Red • Cabernet • Merlot • White • Chardonnay • Pinot • Inventory value must be stored at each month end. • Each month, the olive oil on-hand inventory is evaluated. Anything with less than six months left on the shelf life is sold to a discount retail store. If less than 90 days remains for the shelf life, then the olive oil is donated or destroyed. • At least 20 cases of olive oil and no more than 50 cases are on hand and not reserved for upcoming customer orders. • WineB must be refrigerated. Requirements. Vendors and procurement • The cheese smart numbering system will not be used in the future. Instead, the system must use standard configurations to ensure the correct cheese items are used for the correct country or region when ordering. • Olive oil must be managed in full cases only, although the inventory cost must be calculated as cages. • Should any bottle of olive oil be broken within a case, the cases will be sold at a discounted price. • Vendor rebates must be calculated and submitted for a claim. • Rebate programs are passed on to the retailers selling Coho Winery wines. The rebates must be claimed from Coho Vineyard. • Purchase orders (POs) must be maintained online with tracked changes between the vendors and the buyers. • The controller decides WineA must not be held in financial inventory on the Coho Winery books. The winery makes an agreement with the vendor that WineA will be owned by the vendor until a later date. • Vendor1 sends bulk shipments. Coho Winery does not always have enough warehouse staff to receive inventory. The company requires Vendor1 to send advanced shipping notices (ASNs). • The operations coordinator must schedule inbound loads. The company requires automation of inbound load creation where possible. Issues - • The warehouse is at maximum capacity. Empty bin locations are not always available. • The warehouse manager wants to establish fast moving locations for WineB on the floor and refill locations from higher rack storage. • Coho Winery recently conducted an internal audit risk assessment. The risk assessment found that inventory value reports were stored in spreadsheets. The spreadsheets can easily be edited and lack controls. • After olive oil is counted, multiple cases are destroyed due to shelf life. The inventory planner must determine if a new PO should be placed for olive oil. • The vendor rebates claims are often rejected because the claims were miscalculated by not including discounts. • The purchasing manager receives multiple complaints regarding POs: • Issue 1: PO changes are not accepted and confirmed, resulting in out-of-stock issues. • Issue 2: Vendors do not have control on responses to POs. Instead, the vendors rely on emails. You need to configure the requirements for WineA. What should you configure? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 68, "stem": "This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Coho Vineyard & Winery is a parent company that has two subsidiaries: Coho Vineyard and Coho Winery. Coho Vineyard is based in Medford, Oregon. The vineyard grows the grapes and then produces and bottles the wine. Coho Winery, based in Grants Pass, Oregon, distributes packaged wine to businesses and consumers. The winery sells imported cheese and olive oil in addition to the wines. Current environment. Technology landscape • Coho Vineyard & Winery requires financial reporting from both Coho Vineyard and Coho Winery. The parent company consolidates financials in a third-party tool. • Coho Winery currently manages inventory and financials on spreadsheets separately from the parent company. Current environment. Inventory and warehousing • The entire warehouse is temperature controlled. A refrigerated section of the warehouse is used for items that require colder storage. • The items do not have fixed locations in the warehouse. • Coho uses smart numbering for cheese items today. The items start with F for France and U for United States such as the following: • F11234 = French cheese • U14567 = US cheese • Currently, wine does not use smart numbering. • Inventory is valued at First In, First-Out (FIFO). • Olive oil has a 12-month shelf life. • WineA is expensive and not regularly stocked in the warehouse. • WineB must be in the refrigerated section of the warehouse. • WineC is non-refrigerated wine and is the majority of inventory in the warehouse. Current environment. Vendors and procurement • Cheese is purchased from vendors in two countries: France and United States. • Non-cheese items can be purchased from vendors in other countries or regions. • Olive oil is bought and sold in full cases of six each. • When Coho Vineyard produces more wine than expected in a season, rebate programs are offered to any company whose monthly purchases exceed $5,000. Requirements. General - • The Coho Vineyard & Winery parent company, as well as Coho Vineyard, will not be considered in the implementation of Dynamics 365 Finance and Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management for Coho Winery. They plan to implement them as separate legal entities in the next five years. Requirements. Inventory and warehousing • Items must be renumbered in the new system. • Separate item numbers must be used for each imported item for use in simplified reporting by source country or region. • Advanced Warehouse Management capabilities must be enabled in the new system. • Each bottle of wine has a single item number. • The vintage of each bottle will change annually and may affect the cost of the bottle. This cost must be tracked by year. • Some bottles of wine require refrigeration. The system must automatically define where items must be stored in the warehouse. • Wine must be grouped in a hierarchy such as the following: • Red • Cabernet • Merlot • White • Chardonnay • Pinot • Inventory value must be stored at each month end. • Each month, the olive oil on-hand inventory is evaluated. Anything with less than six months left on the shelf life is sold to a discount retail store. If less than 90 days remains for the shelf life, then the olive oil is donated or destroyed. • At least 20 cases of olive oil and no more than 50 cases are on hand and not reserved for upcoming customer orders. • WineB must be refrigerated. Requirements. Vendors and procurement • The cheese smart numbering system will not be used in the future. Instead, the system must use standard configurations to ensure the correct cheese items are used for the correct country or region when ordering. • Olive oil must be managed in full cases only, although the inventory cost must be calculated as cages. • Should any bottle of olive oil be broken within a case, the cases will be sold at a discounted price. • Vendor rebates must be calculated and submitted for a claim. • Rebate programs are passed on to the retailers selling Coho Winery wines. The rebates must be claimed from Coho Vineyard. • Purchase orders (POs) must be maintained online with tracked changes between the vendors and the buyers. • The controller decides WineA must not be held in financial inventory on the Coho Winery books. The winery makes an agreement with the vendor that WineA will be owned by the vendor until a later date. • Vendor1 sends bulk shipments. Coho Winery does not always have enough warehouse staff to receive inventory. The company requires Vendor1 to send advanced shipping notices (ASNs). • The operations coordinator must schedule inbound loads. The company requires automation of inbound load creation where possible. Issues - • The warehouse is at maximum capacity. Empty bin locations are not always available. • The warehouse manager wants to establish fast moving locations for WineB on the floor and refill locations from higher rack storage. • Coho Winery recently conducted an internal audit risk assessment. The risk assessment found that inventory value reports were stored in spreadsheets. The spreadsheets can easily be edited and lack controls. • After olive oil is counted, multiple cases are destroyed due to shelf life. The inventory planner must determine if a new PO should be placed for olive oil. • The vendor rebates claims are often rejected because the claims were miscalculated by not including discounts. • The purchasing manager receives multiple complaints regarding POs: • Issue 1: PO changes are not accepted and confirmed, resulting in out-of-stock issues. • Issue 2: Vendors do not have control on responses to POs. Instead, the vendors rely on emails. You need to resolve the risk issue identified from the internal audit. What should you configure?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Inventory value report storage report" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Planned costing version" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Active costing version" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Inventory value report A A (100%)" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 69, "stem": "DRAG DROP - Case study - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm is a distribution company that supplies pickles, preserves, pickling supplies, and accessory products to local farmers’ markets as well as grocers. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm does not produce or provide canning services for any items. provide canning services for any items. Current Environment - Munson's Pickles and Preserves Farm has an accounting system that is disconnected from the warehousing system. This has caused issues with controlling and valuing inventory. With these core drivers, Munson's Pickles and Preserves Farm decides to implement Dynamics 365 Finance and Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Warehousing - • Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm has a single warehouse that serves as the distribution center for all products. • The warehouse has bulk locations as well as racking, but location names and numbers do not exist. • Bulk locations are for storage of extra inventory that will not fit into the picking locations. • The warehouse is temperature-controlled, with locations grouped into two zones: refrigerated and non-perishable. • Inventory adjustments are made regularly due to lack of inventory controls. Inventory Data - • Item numbers are inconsistent and were set up as “smart-numbering,” such as 1-23-PKL and 44-24-PICK. • Cucumbers are not grown by Munson's Pickles and Preserves Farm and may be sourced from local farmers. • Pickles come in bottle sizes of 8 oz, 16 oz, 32 oz. The bottles are packed in cases. • Pickles may be spear, chip, or whole shapes within the bottles. This does not impact the cost of the pickles when they are the same flavor. • Pickle flavors are sweet, spicy, and dill. The flavors vary in price. • Preserves come in multiple flavors, such as mango, strawberry, and grape. These are seasonal items only. Due to the varying flavors and quantities, the preserves are owned by the vendor until they are sold. The mango preserves require refrigeration. The other preserves do not require refrigeration. • Many items are sold as accessories or supplies for pickling. • Some items within inventory have an expiration date, such as vinegar. • Fast-moving items are identified by inventory turns per quarter. Sweet and spicy pickles are the most popular. Purchasing and Sales - • Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm has an online store that can be found at munsonspicklesandpreservesfarm.com. • The online store is limited to a subset of products that are accessories only, such as bottles and jars. • A new product line of kosher pickles is going to be distributed by Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm. • VendorA is the largest vendor that Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm buys products from. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm’s second largest vendor is VendorB. Requirements - Warehousing - • The warehouse manager requires fast-moving items to be easily accessible to the order pickers in AisleA, with no more than one item per bin location in AisleA. Both sweet and spicy pickles have more inventory than will fit in AisleA, resulting in bulk location storage. o Spicy pickles must have no less than half of a pallet in AisleA at any time. o Sweet pickles must have enough inventory in AisleA prior to creating waves for warehouse work. • Strawberry preserves are selling slowly this season. They are put away in higher bin locations because they are not considered fast-moving items Inventory & Data - • Item numbers must be set up to create a streamlined numbering system. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm requires that the old item number be stored in Dynamics 365 for cross reference purposes. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm has settled on 0000001 as the item format for pickles instead of 1-23-PKL. PKL will be stored as an attribute. • Item numbers for pickles must be consolidated where possible into a single item number, regardless of bottle size. • Cucumbers must be sold at actual cost because they are a special order. • Kosher pickles must be set up in the item master. The kosher pickles are the same size jars and flavors as the other pickles, except that they have a kosher designation and will be slightly more expensive. • Vinegar and other perishable items must have date tracking for the manufacturer's batch number and expiration date of the product. • A batch of mango preserves had to be thrown away because the warehouse workers put away the product into the non- perishable zone. Purchasing & Sales - • Cucumbers must be sourced from local vendors for special orders only. • Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm recently signed an exclusivity agreement with VendorA, and buyers must now only purchase from VendorA. • VendorA recently purchased a competitor company, VendorB. VendorA wants to ensure that all agreements with VendorA also apply to VendorB while they work on merging the two companies into one. • VendorC sells preserves to Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm and requires the following: o Shipment requirement: VendorC owns the product after shipment to Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm until the time of sale. o On-hand requirement: VendorC has access to view on-hand preserve inventory at Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm warehouse. Issues - • CustomerD reports that the vinegar they ordered had a week left before it expired when they received it. This did not give CustomerD enough time to use the vinegar before they had to dispose of it. CustomerD now requires that all vinegar has more than 30 days left before the expiration date. • A customer calls and states that they ordered kosher pickles and received regular pickles. Inventory Control Clerk 2 reports that kosher and non-kosher pickles of the same variety are in the same warehouse location, contributing to the picking errors. that kosher and non-kosher pickles of the same variety are in the same warehouse location, contributing to the picking errors. • A salesperson reports that the margin is incorrect on a customer’s special order because the cucumber cost was for the most recent receipt of cucumbers, not the cucumbers received for the specific customer order. • An internal audit revealed that large quantities of pickles were missing and written off as damaged on multiple occasions cover the past year. No documentation or explanation of the write offs exist. There is no documentation of disposal, and no approval from management to substantiate that the pickles were not stolen. • Jars of pickles are received as eaches. Case counts of pickle jars vary by size: o 8 oz jars are 12 per case o 16 oz jars are 6 per case o The varied counts in each case create overhead in the warehouse. • The receiving clerk in the warehouse wants to ensure that broken bottles of vinegar are moved to a damage location named LocationA. Expired vinegar should be moved to a return-to-vendor location named LocationB. All other vinegar should be put away and sold according to normal location directives. • Operator1 is picking a pallet of strawberry preserves from a location to the shipping dock. While picking up the pallet, Operator1 drops the pallet. Operator1 must make sure that the strawberry preserves are not available for shipment until the damage is evaluated. • Operator2 tries to print wave labels that contain item 0000001. The labels start to print and then jam. At the same time, the printer battery needs to be recharged and the labels need to be reprinted. You need to configure the location directives for vinegar. Which features should you choose for the given configurations? To answer, move the appropriate features to the correct configurations. You may use each feature once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 70, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A process manufacturer is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to produce sports energy bars, beverages, and nutritional supplements. The company must run a series of quality control tests for all its beverage items for each production run after the items are completed from a production job The testing process for all beverages must follow the same process. The energy bars and nutritional supplements have their own testing requirements. The specific tests are not yet defined. You need to configure the quality associations in preparation for the requirements. Solution: Create a test group for all beverage items. Create a quality association with Reference type as Production and Item code as All. Assign the test group to the quality association. Set Event type to Report as finished. Set Execution to After. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No B B (100%)" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 71, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A process manufacturer is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to produce sports energy bars, beverages, and nutritional supplements. The company must run a series of quality control tests for all its beverage items for each production run after the items are completed from a production job The testing process for all beverages must follow the same process. The energy bars and nutritional supplements have their own testing requirements. The specific tests are not yet defined. You need to configure the quality associations in preparation for the requirements. Solution: Create a quality association for each item with Reference type as Inventory, using item code as Table and specifying each item on the quality associations. Set Event type to Registered. Set Execution to Before. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No B B (100%)" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 72, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A process manufacturer is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to produce sports energy bars, beverages, and nutritional supplements. The company must run a series of quality control tests for all its beverage items for each production run after the items are completed from a production job The testing process for all beverages must follow the same process. The energy bars and nutritional supplements have their own testing requirements. The specific tests are not yet defined. You need to configure the quality associations in preparation for the requirements. Solution: Create a quality association for each item with Reference type as Inventory, using item code as Table and specifying each item on the quality associations. Set Event type to Report as finished. Set Execution to After. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No B B (100%)" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 73, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A manufacturing company has implemented Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company relies on machinery and equipment for its operations. It has a diverse range of assets, including manufacturing equipment, vehicles, and tools. The company wants to optimize its asset maintenance processes to minimize downtime and improve overall productivity. The company wants to implement both preventive and reactive maintenance strategies on the following scenarios: • Changing the tires and oil on the maintenance vehicle fleet. • Replacing a faulty component on a box maker. You need to determine the functionality to use for each maintenance requirement. Solution: Create maintenance round for the vehicle fleet and a maintenance plan for the box maker. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No" } ], "answer": "A" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 74, "stem": "DRAG DROP - Case study - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm is a distribution company that supplies pickles, preserves, pickling supplies, and accessory products to local farmers’ markets as well as grocers. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm does not produce or provide canning services for any items. provide canning services for any items. Current Environment - Munson's Pickles and Preserves Farm has an accounting system that is disconnected from the warehousing system. This has caused issues with controlling and valuing inventory. With these core drivers, Munson's Pickles and Preserves Farm decides to implement Dynamics 365 Finance and Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Warehousing - • Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm has a single warehouse that serves as the distribution center for all products. • The warehouse has bulk locations as well as racking, but location names and numbers do not exist. • Bulk locations are for storage of extra inventory that will not fit into the picking locations. • The warehouse is temperature-controlled, with locations grouped into two zones: refrigerated and non-perishable. • Inventory adjustments are made regularly due to lack of inventory controls. Inventory Data - • Item numbers are inconsistent and were set up as “smart-numbering,” such as 1-23-PKL and 44-24-PICK. • Cucumbers are not grown by Munson's Pickles and Preserves Farm and may be sourced from local farmers. • Pickles come in bottle sizes of 8 oz, 16 oz, 32 oz. The bottles are packed in cases. • Pickles may be spear, chip, or whole shapes within the bottles. This does not impact the cost of the pickles when they are the same flavor. • Pickle flavors are sweet, spicy, and dill. The flavors vary in price. • Preserves come in multiple flavors, such as mango, strawberry, and grape. These are seasonal items only. Due to the varying flavors and quantities, the preserves are owned by the vendor until they are sold. The mango preserves require refrigeration. The other preserves do not require refrigeration. • Many items are sold as accessories or supplies for pickling. • Some items within inventory have an expiration date, such as vinegar. • Fast-moving items are identified by inventory turns per quarter. Sweet and spicy pickles are the most popular. Purchasing and Sales - • Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm has an online store that can be found at munsonspicklesandpreservesfarm.com. • The online store is limited to a subset of products that are accessories only, such as bottles and jars. • A new product line of kosher pickles is going to be distributed by Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm. • VendorA is the largest vendor that Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm buys products from. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm’s second largest vendor is VendorB. Requirements - Warehousing - • The warehouse manager requires fast-moving items to be easily accessible to the order pickers in AisleA, with no more than one item per bin location in AisleA. Both sweet and spicy pickles have more inventory than will fit in AisleA, resulting in bulk location storage. o Spicy pickles must have no less than half of a pallet in AisleA at any time. o Sweet pickles must have enough inventory in AisleA prior to creating waves for warehouse work. • Strawberry preserves are selling slowly this season. They are put away in higher bin locations because they are not considered fast-moving items Inventory & Data - • Item numbers must be set up to create a streamlined numbering system. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm requires that the old item number be stored in Dynamics 365 for cross reference purposes. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm has settled on 0000001 as the item format for pickles instead of 1-23-PKL. PKL will be stored as an attribute. • Item numbers for pickles must be consolidated where possible into a single item number, regardless of bottle size. • Cucumbers must be sold at actual cost because they are a special order. • Kosher pickles must be set up in the item master. The kosher pickles are the same size jars and flavors as the other pickles, except that they have a kosher designation and will be slightly more expensive. • Vinegar and other perishable items must have date tracking for the manufacturer's batch number and expiration date of the product. • A batch of mango preserves had to be thrown away because the warehouse workers put away the product into the non- perishable zone. Purchasing & Sales - • Cucumbers must be sourced from local vendors for special orders only. • Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm recently signed an exclusivity agreement with VendorA, and buyers must now only purchase from VendorA. • VendorA recently purchased a competitor company, VendorB. VendorA wants to ensure that all agreements with VendorA also apply to VendorB while they work on merging the two companies into one. • VendorC sells preserves to Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm and requires the following: o Shipment requirement: VendorC owns the product after shipment to Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm until the time of sale. o On-hand requirement: VendorC has access to view on-hand preserve inventory at Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm warehouse. Issues - • CustomerD reports that the vinegar they ordered had a week left before it expired when they received it. This did not give CustomerD enough time to use the vinegar before they had to dispose of it. CustomerD now requires that all vinegar has more than 30 days left before the expiration date. • A customer calls and states that they ordered kosher pickles and received regular pickles. Inventory Control Clerk 2 reports that kosher and non-kosher pickles of the same variety are in the same warehouse location, contributing to the picking errors. that kosher and non-kosher pickles of the same variety are in the same warehouse location, contributing to the picking errors. • A salesperson reports that the margin is incorrect on a customer’s special order because the cucumber cost was for the most recent receipt of cucumbers, not the cucumbers received for the specific customer order. • An internal audit revealed that large quantities of pickles were missing and written off as damaged on multiple occasions cover the past year. No documentation or explanation of the write offs exist. There is no documentation of disposal, and no approval from management to substantiate that the pickles were not stolen. • Jars of pickles are received as eaches. Case counts of pickle jars vary by size: o 8 oz jars are 12 per case o 16 oz jars are 6 per case o The varied counts in each case create overhead in the warehouse. • The receiving clerk in the warehouse wants to ensure that broken bottles of vinegar are moved to a damage location named LocationA. Expired vinegar should be moved to a return-to-vendor location named LocationB. All other vinegar should be put away and sold according to normal location directives. • Operator1 is picking a pallet of strawberry preserves from a location to the shipping dock. While picking up the pallet, Operator1 drops the pallet. Operator1 must make sure that the strawberry preserves are not available for shipment until the damage is evaluated. • Operator2 tries to print wave labels that contain item 0000001. The labels start to print and then jam. At the same time, the printer battery needs to be recharged and the labels need to be reprinted. You need to determine Operator1’s next steps. Which next two process steps should Operator1 complete? To answer, move the appropriate processes to the correct process steps. You may use each process once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 75, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A process manufacturer is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to produce sports energy bars, beverages, and nutritional supplements. The company must run a series of quality control tests for all its beverage items for each production run after the items are completed from a production job The testing process for all beverages must follow the same process. The energy bars and nutritional supplements have their own testing requirements. The specific tests are not yet defined. You need to configure the quality associations in preparation for the requirements. Solution: Create a quality association with Reference type as Production and Item code as Group. Create a quality group for all items and assign it to the quality association. Set Event type to Report as finished. Set Execution to After. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No B B (100%)" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 76, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Three assets at a single location all need the same tune-up. A single worker can complete all three tune-ups. The worker’s hours must be allocated to each asset. You need to configure the system for the worker. Which configuration should you use?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Create a consumption registration for the items." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Configure a job card for the device." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Configure labor standards." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Create three separate work orders." } ], "answer": "D" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 77, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management for asset management. A specific piece of equipment has a high volume of work orders. You need to identify the costs associated with machine repairs. What should you use to identify the costs? To answer, move the appropriate locations to the correct requirements. You may use each location once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to move the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 78, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Three assets at a single location all need the same tune-up. A single worker can complete all three tune-ups. The worker’s hours must be allocated to each asset. You need to configure the system for the worker. Which configuration should you use?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Create a consumption registration for the expenses." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Create three separate work orders." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Configure work line details." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Create a consumption registration for the items." } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 79, "stem": "A distribution company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company implements a new safety policy. The policy dictates that all business units must undergo a rapid routine safety checkup every week. To follow the new policy, the warehouse manager must ensure the following: • The business unit must be unavailable for use during that period. • The maintenance activities must be conducted during the lunch break to avoid production downtime losses. You must configure the system to meet the safety requirements. Which two configurations should you complete? Each correct answer presents a part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Work order service levels" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Maintenance request lifecycle models" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Asset BOMs" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Work order types" }, { "label": "E", "text": "Attributes" } ], "answer": "BD" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 80, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Three assets at a single location all need the same tune-up. A single worker can complete all three tune-ups. The worker’s hours must be allocated to each asset. You need to configure the system for the worker. Which configuration should you use?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Configure the operations resource and set it to human resource." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Configure work line details." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Create a consumption registration for the expenses." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Create one work order and split hours by work order job." } ], "answer": "D" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 81, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management for the management and maintenance of company assets. The company has a single legal entity in the United States. All assets are installed at the company’s locations. The company performs routine maintenance on assets. At times, the assets break and require emergency repairs. Several of the asset repairs must be performed by engineers who have specialized certifications. The certified engineers may be out of office, so a request may not be completed immediately. The company must be able to use Supply Chain Management to track the asset repairs and the progress of the repairs by the engineers by using the following configurable states: • New • Pending • In progress • Completed You need to configure the system. Which feature should you configure? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 82, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company is introducing a new line of products that require multiple pieces of new shop floor equipment. The accounting manager requires the following: • The new equipment must be tightly controlled throughout the acquisition cycle with vendors. • All assets must have expected receipts. • The asset must be automatically created when it is received by the warehouse. You need to meet the accounting manager’s requirements. What should you configure for each requirement? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 83, "stem": "A company is implementing asset management in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company manually assigns workers to work orders. The quality of maintenance suffers due to the manual assignment process. The company requires preferred maintenance workers to be assigned to a given work order based on specific criteria. You need to assign the workers to work orders. Which criteria should you use?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "title" }, { "label": "B", "text": "asset type" }, { "label": "C", "text": "job" }, { "label": "D", "text": "work history" } ], "answer": "C" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 84, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company is using Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management for its asset management operations. The company must manage periodic, preventative maintenance for two types of conveyor belt assets. • One type of conveyor belt asset must be maintained daily for a total of 365 total inspections. • The other type of conveyor belt asset must be maintained weekly for a total of 52 total inspections. Preventative maintenance must be consolidated under a single record for all conveyor belt assets. You need to configure the features for the solution. Which features should you configure? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 85, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Three assets at a single location all need the same tune-up. A single worker can complete all three tune-ups. The worker’s hours must be allocated to each asset. You need to configure the system for the worker. Which configuration should you use?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Create a consumption registration for the expenses." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Create a consumption registration for the items." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Create one work order and split hours by work order job." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Configure labor standards." } ], "answer": "C" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 86, "stem": "A company is implementing sales order functionality in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company has a business requirement to fulfill sales orders by using direct delivery. You need to enter a direct delivery sales order so that a purchase order is automatically created. What should you do after you enter the sales order and lines?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Change the site to direct delivery and confirm the sales order." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Select automatic and confirm the sales order on the line level setup tab in the reservation field." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Change the delivery type on the sales order line to direct delivery and select save." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Set the ship complete toggle to On and confirm the order on the sales order header." } ], "answer": "C" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 87, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Three assets at a single location all need the same tune-up. A single worker can complete all three tune-ups. The worker’s hours must be allocated to each asset. You need to configure the system for the worker. Which configuration should you use?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Configure a job card for the device." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Create three separate work orders." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Configure work line details." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Create a consumption registration for the items." } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 88, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A company plans to configure Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to perform preventative maintenance for several machines on its shop floor. The company has the following requirements: • Create work orders automatically. • Inspect assets daily starting June 1 of this year. • Perform five calibration and safety checks on a set of assets each day to maintain safety compliance. You need to configure the appropriate solution. Solution: Create a maintenance request for each asset in the work order pool with a maintenance request type of Safety, add the work order pool to the maintenance request configure the maintenance request for the requirements, and update the maintenance request state to Scheduled. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 89, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A company plans to configure Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to perform preventative maintenance for several machines on its shop floor. The company has the following requirements: • Create work orders automatically. • Inspect assets daily starting June 1 of this year. • Perform five calibration and safety checks on a set of assets each day to maintain safety compliance. You need to configure the appropriate solution. Solution: Create a maintenance plan, assign the assets, configure the maintenance plan for the requirements, and schedule the maintenance plan. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No" } ], "answer": "A" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 90, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A company plans to configure Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to perform preventative maintenance for several machines on its shop floor. The company has the following requirements: • Create work orders automatically. • Inspect assets daily starting June 1 of this year. • Perform five calibration and safety checks on a set of assets each day to maintain safety compliance. You need to configure the appropriate solution. Solution: Create a work order, assign a work order maintenance job for each asset, configure the work order for the requirements, and schedule the work order. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 91, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A company plans to configure Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to perform preventative maintenance for several machines on its shop floor. The company has the following requirements: • Create work orders automatically. • Inspect assets daily starting June 1 of this year. • Perform five calibration and safety checks on a set of assets each day to maintain safety compliance. You need to configure the appropriate solution. Solution: Create a maintenance round, assign the assets, configure the maintenance round for the requirements, and schedule the maintenance round. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 92, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage maintenance requests by using asset management. The company requires the creation of automatic assets for a functional location. You need to configure the data. Which two configurations should you use? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "lifecycle state" }, { "label": "B", "text": "asset type default" }, { "label": "C", "text": "functional location type" }, { "label": "D", "text": "functionality profiles" }, { "label": "E", "text": "attribute types" } ], "answer": "BC" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 93, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage work orders in asset management. Some work orders require workers who have current certifications. Active certifications are maintained in Supply Chain Management. You need to configure the work order for the certification requirement. What should you configure?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "functional location" }, { "label": "B", "text": "asset types" }, { "label": "C", "text": "maintenance job types" }, { "label": "D", "text": "worker skill mapping" } ], "answer": "C" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 94, "stem": "A construction equipment rental company is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Equipment can be rented out more than once throughout its useful life. The company requires the equipment to be configured as assets. The controller must be able to report on the cost of each asset and the group of assets at a single construction site. You need to configure the financial dimensions. Where should you configure the financial dimension?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Work orders" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Functional location" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Condition assessment" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Asset" }, { "label": "E", "text": "Work order pools" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 95, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A company is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Service technicians are taking items out of inventory for use in work orders. You need to remove the items from stock and account for them in the work order. Solution: Post a picking journal and post a packing slip. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 96, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A company is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Service technicians are taking items out of inventory for use in work orders. You need to remove the items from stock and account for them in the work order. Solution: Post a picking journal and post a report as finished journal. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No" } ], "answer": "A" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 97, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A company is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Service technicians are taking items out of inventory for use in work orders. You need to remove the items from stock and account for them in the work order. Solution: Create a picking registration and post a picking journal. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 98, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A company is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Service technicians are taking items out of inventory for use in work orders. You need to remove the items from stock and account for them in the work order. Solution: Create a consumption registration and post the work order journal. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 3, "question_num": 99, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management for its warehouse operations. The company has excess inventory in stock The company is selecting items that require a reduction in inventory quantity and will invest the value difference to achieve a higher profit. The company must use a specific interest rate to calculate higher profit. You need to configure the components. Which configuration should you use for each component? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 1, "stem": "SIMULATION - You are a functional consultant for a company named Contoso Entertainment System USA (USMF). USMF recently experienced issues with a transport company. Many packages were returned because the boxes were opened during delivery. Users in the sales department are creating sales order returns for the returned open boxes. You need to configure the system to ensure that the sales department users can select a predefined description of Open Box for each sales order return. To complete this task, sign in to Dynamics 365 portal. See explanation below. You need to configure a Return Reason Code. 1. Click Sales and marketing > Setup > Sales orders > Returns > Return reason codes. 2. Press CTRL + N to create a new return reason code line. 3. In the Return reason code field, enter text to identify this code (enter Open Box). 4. In the Description field, enter text to describe the return reason code. 5. Use the Return reason code group drop-down list to add the code to a return reason code group. Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/service-management/set-up-return-reason-code", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 2, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company orders parts from a vendor. The vendor frequently ships more units than the company orders. An approving manager must receive notification when the quantity of units received is more than 10 percent above the number of units ordered. You have an existing notification workflow. You need to ensure that the notification is generated. How should you configure the system? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 3, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A vendor is offering a rebate program on bottles of wine that have purchase orders placed within a month. There is a $5.00 rebate on the purchase of 10-100 bottles and a $6.00 rebate for the purchase of 101-200 bottles. Customers can purchase wine by the bottle or by the case. Discounts apply to all varieties of wine sold by the vendor. You need to create a vendor rebate agreement to ensure that the correct rebate amount is claimed at the end of the month. Solution: On the rebate agreement, in the unit of measure rebate option, select exact match. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 4, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A company has an agreement to pay royalties to a third party for use of their logo. A royalty contract must be setup so that the third party paid monthly. The payment is based on invoiced sales. You need to create a royalty contract and create monthly Accounts payable to the third party. Solution: Create a royalty claim in Accounts receivable. Set up the third party as a customer to be paid royalties for use of the logo. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 5, "stem": "A company manufactures and sells custom bicycles. Customers can customize some components to create a custom bicycle. You need to configure sales orders to support the customization allowed for custom bicycle orders. What are two possible ways to achieve this goal? Each correct answer presents a complete solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Create a sales order for the bicycle and make configuration selections on the order for the upgraded seat and handlebars. The production order will be automatically generated with the correct seat and handlebars." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Create a sales order for the bicycle and add separate line items for the upgraded seat and handlebars." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Create a sales order for the bicycle. Modify the production order after it has been reported as finished to delete the standard seat and handlebars and add the upgraded seat and handlebars." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Configure the product to allow for the seat and handlebars selection to be defined at order creation, automatically adding an upcharge to the sales price." } ], "answer": "AD" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 6, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company implements Dynamics 365 Sales to manage sales prospects. A salesperson must create a customer record for a new client in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. You need to create a sales order from an existing quote. What should you do? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 7, "stem": "A company manufactures and sells surround-sound audio systems. A third-party company manufactures the stereo receivers as part of the Bill of materials (BOM) for complete sound systems. You need to automatically create a purchase order for the stereo receiver from the production order for a sound system. Which three actions should you perform? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Assign the Vendor account to the service item BOM line." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Set service item BOM line type to Vendor." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Set the service item BOM line type to Pegged supply." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Link the service items to the vendor on the costing sheet." }, { "label": "E", "text": "Attach the service item to the parent item as a BOM line. ABE" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 8, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A primary vendor tells you that their purchase order (PO) items will be delivered seven days later than expected. You find another vendor that carries the product and can deliver it the next day. You need the purchases from both vendors, but only one PO exists in the system. You need to ensure that the system correctly reflects the inbound products from both vendors. How should you complete the setup? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 9, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company has several vendors who require 1099s. You need to set up the vendors so that year-end reports can be correctly generated. What should you do? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 10, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. A customer returns a product that is defective for a replacement. You need to process the return order. Which three actions should you perform? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Create a return of type Credit Only" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Set the deadline date according to the company policy" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Create a credit note for the replaced product" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Set the delivery address to the customer's address in the return order" }, { "label": "E", "text": "Create a return of type Physical Return" }, { "label": "F", "text": "Set the deadline date to the date the customer returns the defective product" }, { "label": "G", "text": "Set the delivery address to the company warehouse in the return order BEG" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 11, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company plans to use Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to automatically calculate and process royalties. You need to configure the system. Which actions should you perform? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area: References: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/unified-operations/financials/accounts-payable/royalty-contract", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 12, "stem": "A client wants to use Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to assist processing intercompany trade. You need to ensure that intercompany sales order payments process correctly when intercompany payable journals are posted. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "In the intercompany trade parameters for sales order policies, select Post journal automatically" }, { "label": "B", "text": "In the intercompany trade parameters for purchase order policies, select Post invoice automatically" }, { "label": "C", "text": "In the intercompany trade parameters for purchase order policies, select Post journal automatically" }, { "label": "D", "text": "In the intercompany trade parameters for sales order policies, select Allow summary update of documents for original customer" } ], "answer": "A" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 13, "stem": "You are the customer relations manager at a wholesale company. You perform promotion planning and must track fund usage. You need to set up a trade allowance agreement to register and track promotion contracts. Which two items should you set up prior to creating the agreement? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Sales category hierarchy" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Opportunity reasons" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Customer category hierarchy" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Trade allowance funds" } ], "answer": "CD" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 14, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company wants to expand their purchasing power by enhancing their current procurement catalog in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company wants to redirect to external websites to help build their purchase requisitions. You need to set up an external catalog. Which three actions should you perform in sequence? To answer, move the appropriate actions from the list of actions to the answer area and arrange them in the correct order. Select and Place:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 15, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. You must implement commission groups to match commission rates to products. You need to configure commission tracking. Which three actions should you perform in sequence? To answer, move the appropriate actions from the list of actions to the answer area and arrange them in the correct order. NOTE: More than one order of answer choices is correct. You will receive credit for any of the correct orders you select. Select and Place: References: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/unified-operations/supply-chain/sales-marketing/tasks/set-up-sales- commission-rules commission-rules", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 16, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company hires four sales representatives for a region named Midwest. You must configure commission calculations for the sales representatives in the Midwest region. The calculations must meet the following requirements: \u0000 Calculate commissions for all items sold to customers at a rate of 10 percent of total revenue earned on a sales order. \u0000 Apply commissions for all customers in the Midwest Customer group for commission. \u0000 Split commissions equally between the representatives. You need to configure a commission calculation that meets these requirements. How should you configure the calculation? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 17, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management and implements procurement categories. Purchase requisitions are required for the purchase of procurement category goods. You need to ensure that the company purchases office supplies only from one specific vendor. Which two actions should you perform? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Add the preferred vendor to the office supplies procurement category setup" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Create a preferred trade agreement for the office supplies vendor" }, { "label": "C", "text": "In purchasing policies, configure a specific category policy for office supplies" }, { "label": "D", "text": "In purchasing policies, create a Purchase requisition control rule" }, { "label": "E", "text": "Configure the purchase requisition workflow to specify the office supplies vendor" } ], "answer": "AC" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 18, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A vendor is offering a rebate program on bottles of wine that have purchase orders placed within a month. There is a $5.00 rebate on the purchase of 10-100 bottles and a $6.00 rebate for the purchase of 101-200 bottles. Customers can purchase wine by the bottle or by the case. Discounts apply to all varieties of wine sold by the vendor. You need to create a vendor rebate agreement to ensure that the correct rebate amount is claimed at the end of the month. Solution: On the rebate agreement, specify each item group assigned to wine. Add a rebate line break of quantity 10-100 and a second rebate line break of quantity 101-200. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 19, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A vendor is offering a rebate program on bottles of wine that have purchase orders placed within a month. There is a $5.00 rebate on the purchase of 10-100 bottles and a $6.00 rebate for the purchase of 101-200 bottles. Customers can purchase wine by the bottle or by the case. Discounts apply to all varieties of wine sold by the vendor. You need to create a vendor rebate agreement to ensure that the correct rebate amount is claimed at the end of the month. Solution: On the rebate agreement, set the calculation date type field to created. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 20, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A vendor is offering a rebate program on bottles of wine that have purchase orders placed within a month. There is a $5.00 rebate on the purchase of 10-100 bottles and a $6.00 rebate for the purchase of 101-200 bottles. Customers can purchase wine by the bottle or by the case. Discounts apply to all varieties of wine sold by the vendor. You need to create a vendor rebate agreement to ensure that the correct rebate amount is claimed at the end of the month. Solution: On the rebate agreement, set the start date to be the first of the month. Set the expiry date to be 30 days. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 21, "stem": "You configure purchasing policies and oversee purchasing processes for a company. Users often submit requisitions with incorrect information. Users also select non-approved vendors or incorrect categories. You need to set up a procurement policy that limits which procurement categories and vendors can be selected. Which two policy rules should you configure? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Category access policy rule" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Purchase requisition control rule" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Catalog policy rule" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Category policy rule" } ], "answer": "AC" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 22, "stem": "A buyer places a purchase requisition for item C0001 from a new vendor. All purchases from a new vendor must go through an internal workflow approval process. You need to ensure that a purchase order (PO) is automatically created from the purchase requisition. Which setup must be in place?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Status = approved, item = C0001, vendor populated on the PO" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Status = in review, item = C0001, vendor populated on the purchase requisition" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Status = approved, item = C0001, vendor populated on the purchase requisition" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Status = draft, item = C0001, vendor populated on the PO" } ], "answer": "C" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 23, "stem": "You identify a new vendor. You must create a purchase agreement for the vendor that includes direct invoicing and insurance. You need to a create a classification for the purchase agreement. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Set the value for Certification to Yes. Set the value for Requires direct invoicing to No." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Set the value for Certification to No. Set the value for Requires direct invoicing to No." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Set the value for Certification to Yes. Set the value for Requires direct invoicing to Yes." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Set the value for Certification to No. Set the value for Requires direct invoicing to Yes." } ], "answer": "C" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 24, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A client uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage prospects and the sales cycle. A sales representative needs to create a sales quotation for a current prospect and validate that the 40 percent margin requirements are being met. You need to create the sales quotation, verify the margin requirements, and send the quotation to the prospect. Which four actions should you perform in sequence? To answer, move the appropriate actions from the list of actions to the answer area and arrange them in the correct order. Select and Place: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/sales-marketing/price-simulation", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 25, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company uses procurement in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. You need to select the correct system functionalities to meet the company's requirements. Which system functionalities should you select? To answer, drag the appropriate system functionalities to the correct business requirements. Each system functionality may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Select and Place:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 26, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A company plans to simplify interactions between purchasing department employees and vendors. You need to ensure that employees are redirected to a vendor's online store to select items for inclusion on purchase requisitions. Solution: Create a retail product catalog. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No B References: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/procurement/set-up-external-catalog-for-punchout" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 27, "stem": "A company is implementing sales order functionality in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company has a business requirement to fulfill sales orders by using direct delivery. You need to enter a direct delivery sales order so that a purchase order is automatically created. What should you do after you enter the sales order and lines?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Change the order type to journal and manually enter a PO for the sales order line items on the sales order header." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Change the delivery type on the sales order line to direct delivery and select save." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Select automatic and confirm the sales order on the line level setup tab in the reservation field." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Change the customer's address to the vendor's direct delivery address and confirm the sales order. B Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/sales-marketing/tasks/ship-orders-direct-deliveries" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 28, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A company plans to simplify interactions between purchasing department employees and vendors. You need to ensure that employees are redirected to a vendor's online store to select items for inclusion on purchase requisitions. Solution: Create an external catalog. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No A Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/procurement/set-up-external-catalog-for-punchout" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 29, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage inventory. Backorders exist on customer sales orders because incorrect data was given on product quantities. Users need to look up what quantity can be sold and when more product will arrive. Solution: Physical Available shows what quantity can be sold. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 30, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage inventory. Backorders exist on customer sales orders because incorrect data was given on product quantities. Users need to look up what quantity can be sold and when more product will arrive. Solution: Total Available shows what is available for sale at that point in time. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No" } ], "answer": "A" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 31, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage inventory. Backorders exist on customer sales orders because incorrect data was given on product quantities. Users need to look up what quantity can be sold and when more product will arrive. Solution: Ordered shows what quantities are on inbound orders to the warehouse. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 32, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A company plans to simplify interactions between purchasing department employees and vendors. You need to ensure that employees are redirected to a vendor's online store to select items for inclusion on purchase requisitions. Solution: Create a procurement catalog. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No B References: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/procurement/set-up-external-catalog-for-punchout" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 33, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage inventory. Backorders exist on customer sales orders because incorrect data was given on product quantities. Users need to look up what quantity can be sold and when more product will arrive. Solution: On Order shows what quantities are on inbound orders to the warehouse. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 34, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Products are being added to purchase orders for the incorrect vendors. You need to restrict which products can be purchased from specific vendors. Which two features should you use? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Approved vendor list" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Item group" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Vendor group" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Vendor external item" }, { "label": "E", "text": "Item model group AE" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 35, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company is implementing purchase requisition features in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. You need to configure the appropriate purchase requisition solutions. Which solution should you use for each scenario? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 36, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company plans to create purchase agreements in the system for specific vendors. You need to select the correct purchase agreement types for each vendor. Which purchase agreement types should you use? To answer, drag the appropriate purchase agreement types to the correct scenarios. Each purchase agreement type may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Select and Place: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/procurement/purchase-agreements", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 37, "stem": "DRAG DROP - You are helping a company implement Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. You need to implement disposition codes for sales return orders. Which disposition codes should you use? To answer, drag the appropriate disposition codes to the correct scenarios. Each disposition code may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Select and Place:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 38, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A company plans to simplify interactions between purchasing department employees and vendors. You need to ensure that employees are redirected to a vendor's online store to select items for inclusion on purchase requisitions. Solution: Create a vendor catalog. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 39, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The finance department processes royalty claims using the accounts payable module. You need to pass the claims to the accounts payable group for payment. Which three events will occur? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "A Royalty accrual journal posting reverses the previous interim postings for accrual and expense amounts." }, { "label": "B", "text": "A credit is posted to the vendor's payable account." }, { "label": "C", "text": "A vendor invoice for the royalty payment is set to draft." }, { "label": "D", "text": "A new vendor invoice for the royalty is created and posted." }, { "label": "E", "text": "A hold is put on the amounts held in the royalty fees account. ABD References: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/finance/accounts-payable/royalty-contract" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 40, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A company has an agreement to pay royalties to a third party for use of their logo. A royalty contract must be setup so that the third party paid monthly. The payment is based on invoiced sales. You need to create a royalty contract and create monthly Accounts payable to the third party. Solution: Use the automatically calculated royalty amounts to approve and then create a monthly claim to pay the vendor. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No B Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/finance/accounts-payable/royalty-contract" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 41, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A company has an agreement to pay royalties to a third party for use of their logo. A royalty contract must be setup so that the third party paid monthly. The payment is based on invoiced sales. You need to create a royalty contract and create monthly Accounts payable to the third party. Solution: Add line items to a royalty contract with the associated customer and create sales orders for the items. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No B Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/finance/accounts-payable/royalty-contract" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 42, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A company has an agreement to pay royalties to a third party for use of their logo. A royalty contract must be setup so that the third party paid monthly. The payment is based on invoiced sales. You need to create a royalty contract and create monthly Accounts payable to the third party. Solution: Create a royalty contract. Select monthly for the cumulative sales. Add line item, products, and value to pay the vendor for use of the logo. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No A Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/finance/accounts-payable/royalty-contract" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 43, "stem": "An organization has two legal entities. One of the companies is going to sell a new product to the other company. The company that will receive the product must get a discount on items for the first three months of initial sales. You need to configure the system to apply the discount for the specified period. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Set the default purchase price on the company that is receiving the product." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Enter the default purchase price on the company that is selling the product." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Set up an intercompany purchase agreement. Do not allow the validity period to be edited." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Set up a Trade Agreement. Set the To Date field to end in three months." } ], "answer": "D" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 44, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A parent company owns two subsidiaries. Some of the products manufactured in one of the subsidiaries must be sold to the other subsidiary so they can be sold in retail stores. You need to configure the customer and products for intercompany setup. How should you configure the setup? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer areas. NOTE: Each selection is worth one point. Hot Area:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 45, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company sells licensed products. You must pay the licensor royalties for the items each month. You need to set up a royalty agreement to pay the licensor. How should you set up the royalty agreement? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/finance/accounts-payable/royalty-contract", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 46, "stem": "DRAG DROP - You are the purchasing manager for a company. You enter into a consignment agreement with a vendor. Raw material R0001 is managed under the consignment agreement with the vendor. You need to replenish raw material R0001 for consumption and update ownership. Which four actions should you perform in sequence? To answer, move the appropriate actions from the list of actions to the answer area and arrange them in the correct order. Select and Place: References: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/unified-operations/supply-chain/inventory/consignment", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 47, "stem": "SIMULATION - You are a functional consultant for a company named Contoso Entertainment System USA (USMF). You need to generate a requisition for the supply of 50 units of a product named Lifecam HD 5000, and then submit the requisition for approval. To complete this task, sign in to Dynamics 365 portal. See explanation below. Create a new requisition - \u0000 Go to Navigation pane > Modules > Procurement and sourcing > Purchase requisitions > Purchase requisitions prepared by me. \u0000 Select New. \u0000 In the Name field, give the requisition a name. \u0000 In the Requested date field, enter a date. \u0000 In the Accounting date field, enter a date. Select OK. \u0000 In the Reason field, select an option from the drop-down menu. Select the reason. \u0000 In the details field enter a more descriptive justification for the requisition. Add a line to the requisition - \u0000 Select Add line. There are two ways of adding lines to the purchase requisition. If you already know the product number or you already know that you are requesting a product that is not in the product catalog, then you can add the line directly with Add line. The other way is to use Add products where you can use searching and filtering to find items in the product catalog. \u0000 Select the row you just created. \u0000 In the Item number field, type a value. The items that are available for you to choose are limited by the category access policy and the procurement catalog for the buying legal entity. \u0000 In the Quantity field, enter a number. Submit the requisition - Select Workflow to open the drop dialog. \u0000 Select Submit. \u0000 Close the page. \u0000 In the Comment field, type a note for the approver of the requisition. \u0000 Select Submit. \u0000 Select Submit. \u0000 Close the page. \u0000 Refresh the page. Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/procurement/tasks/create-requisition-consumption", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 48, "stem": "SIMULATION - You are a functional consultant for a company named Contoso Entertainment System USA (USMF). Sales order number 000754 contains a delivery detail of three ruggedized laser projectors. The customer reports that only two projectors were delivered. You need to update the packing slip for the sales order. To complete this task, sign in to Dynamics 365 portal. See explanation below. 1. Select Sales and marketing > Common > Sales orders > All sales orders. 2. Search for and select sales order number 000754. 3. On the Pick and pack tab, select Packing slip to open the packing slip. 4. Click on the Correct button. 5. On the Parameters FastTab, in the Quantity field, enter 2. 6. Set the Posting option to Yes to post the packing slip. 7. Set the Print packing slip option to Yes to print the packing slip when it's posted.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 49, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company plans to make changes to change management processes for purchase orders. Currently, the system requires an approval for any change. The company wants to implement re-approval only when there is a change to the quantity or the unit price in a purchase order. You need to configure the change management process to require re-approval only on changes to quantity and unit price. In which order should you perform the actions? To answer, move all actions from the list of actions to the answer area and arrange them in the correct order. Select and Place: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamicsax-2012/appuser-itpro/set-up-a-reapproval-rule-for-purchase-orders", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 50, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company distributes products. The company produces some of the products it distributes. The company needs to move from manual to automatic inventory reservations. You need to set up automatic reservations. Which parameters should you select? To answer, drag the appropriate parameters to the correct reservation policies. Each parameter may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 51, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage item returns. You need to ensure that the original quantity and price from a sales order is used for return order. Solution: Use the Find sales order function to link the return order to the original sales order. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No" } ], "answer": "A" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 52, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage item returns. You need to ensure that the original quantity and price from a sales order is used for return order. Solution: Create a margin alert. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 53, "stem": "Note: This question is part of a series of questions that present the same scenario. Each question in the series contains a unique solution that might meet the stated goals. Some question sets might have more than one correct solution, while others might not have a correct solution. After you answer a question in this section, you will NOT be able to return to it. As a result, these questions will not appear in the review screen. A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage item returns. You need to ensure that the original quantity and price from a sales order is used for return order. Solution: Create a Sales Order that uses the returned order sales type. Does the solution meet the goal?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Yes" }, { "label": "B", "text": "No" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 54, "stem": "A company is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management with batch-controlled items. The management team wants to ensure that sales margins are calculated based on the cost of the product. Because the company values inventory using FIFO, the cost of the product fluctuates. The product is typically less expensive in the beginning of a sales cycle and becomes more expensive toward the end of the sales cycle. You must ensure that products are sold and that margins are calculated based on the cost of the inventory. You need to ensure that the correct costs are assigned. What should you configure?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Run the Update expiry date job." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Configure Reserve ordered items." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Enable automatic reservation." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Configure an item model group reservation policy." } ], "answer": "D" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 55, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. A customer negotiated a sales price for 100 items for the next 60 days. Management reviews reports on how many items the customer has purchased at this price. The customer has an existing order for the agreed sales agreement quantity. The customer calls to add an additional quantity that exceeds the sales agreement maximum amount. The customer is not entitled to the discounted sales price outside of the agreement. You need to ensure that the customer receives the ordered amount and that the management reports are correct. Which action should you perform?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Modify the sales agreement quantity as unconfirmed." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Edit the sales order quantity and when prompted to save changes, select Yes." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Modify the sales agreement to clear the Max Enforced checkbox and do not confirm." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Create a new sales order for the quantity that exceeds the sales agreement amount." } ], "answer": "D" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 56, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management and has a single legal entity. The company manually creates and adds new items frequently. Many of these items require the same setup as existing items. The company requires a streamlined process to copy fields from another item upon creation and allow for other employees to use the same process. You need to configure the simplified process. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Create a personalization." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Release the product master." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Create an item template." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Create a new product master." } ], "answer": "C" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 57, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The top 10 customers receive a special price on ItemA when they buy a minimum of 50. Customers who qualify as the top 10 changes periodically throughout the year. The price of ItemA must remain static throughout the year and set up annually. You must configure the system to meet the requirements. What should you configure? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 58, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage procurement operations. A purchasing manager creates a procurement request of the main product line from an offshore vendor. The vendor informs the purchasing manager that the items will be delivered in two phases due to raw materials shortages. The purchasing manager wants to maintain this information by keeping the procurement request intact for tracking. You need to configure the procurement requirements before the goods are shipped. What are two possible ways to achieve this goal? Each correct answer presents a complete solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Update folio." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Update voyage." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Update vessel." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Update purchase order." } ], "answer": "BD" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 59, "stem": "A company has multiple legal entities. The company is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Purchase orders are generated from multiple legal entities. To reduce shipping costs, the purchase orders must be consolidated into multiple shipping containers of the same type and placed onto a single vessel for inbound receipt into the country/region. You need to configure the path of the shipping containers. What should you configure?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Journey" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Voyage" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Route" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Route segment" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 60, "stem": "Case study - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Trey Research is a multinational manufacturer of health and dietary supplements based in Seattle, Washington. The company is experiencing a rapid expansion not only in its supplements but as a lifestyle brand that also sells apparel. The supplements and apparel businesses operate independently but manufacture and operate in the same legal entity. Current environment - Current environment. Technology - Current environment. Technology - Trey Research is migrating from an outdated, on-premises version of Dynamics AX to Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company wants to retain a lot of its current data structures and processes but adopt new efficiencies when the benefit is obvious. The company uses a third-party e-commerce site that is custom developed by an internal developer. Current environment. Items - Product numbering - All items are numbered by using a smart numbering format: [Product SKU+Size+Color+Style]. For reporting, items are queried for sales and inventory reports by using the first six digits of the item number or until the first dash is encountered. • A t-shirt could be 01001-S-Red for item 1001 in a size small with the color red. • A single energy drink could be 02001-12oz or 02001-20oz for the different sizes that product 02001 is sold in. Product attributes - • All clothing shares the same set of product attributes. • Supplements may share the same Product SKU but can have different attributes for the different size, color, or style variations of the product. • Product attributes that are unnecessary for an item should be excluded from the item. Pricing - • All items always have a default price. This price will not expire. • An item will have four different prices created for it every month, one for each customer tier, as detailed later in this section. The pricing expires at the end of the month. If no special pricing is created, the default item price will be used. • The monthly sales price in which the additional price breaks are determined is based on the estimated cost of the manufactured items. • Customers are categorized into four pricing tiers (A, B, C, and D) based on sales volume over the past 12 months. • Customers can negotiate special pricing for items in 30-day, 60-day, and 90-day increments. Quantity restrictions may be placed, depending on the item discount and promotion. • Promotional pricing is not used today. Pricing is restricted to monthly prices and customer-specific contract pricing. Cost - Items use a FIFO costing model today in their current Dynamics AX 2009 environment; however, using the FIFO costing method has created problems. Current environment. Warehouse and inventory • Warehouse requirements are simplistic. There is only one site. The site has two warehouses. • Trey Research needs to make sure that any energy drinks and nutritional supplements are manufactured and packaged with the highest standards. Trey Research automatically inspects products when all products are reported as finished. All products are inspected again when the items are picked. • Energy drinks require independent tests to check for dents in packaging, carbonation levels, and fill level. • Nutritional supplements require separate tests for packaging, expiration date, product seal, and product labeling. • Government compliancy and consistency testing are handled outside of the Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) system. • Resalable products are placed on one of two racks in the warehouse. Requirements - Requirements. Technology - • Trey Research will integrate all pricing and discount capabilities to its e-commerce website. Requirements. Items - • Reporting on products should be streamlined as much as possible. • The item numbering does not have to equate to the actual item number. • The future costing methods adopted must be commonly accepted for manufacturers. • Inventory costing should be done after a full inventory valuation is complete. It should take into consideration the direct materials, direct labor, and overhead that goes into an item. • Any costing method used needs the ability to track cost records about an item, cost categories, and calculation formulas for indirect costs. • The profitability for nutritional supplements manufacturing processes needs to be expressed in terms of the cost categories for routing operations and the calculation formulas for manufacturing overheads. • If a vendor can no longer deliver the raw materials for the energy drinks due to supply chain issues, the costs for using an alternative vendor to source the raw materials should be used to determine the impact on profits. • Apparel items will not be upgraded to the new costing method until after the go-live date due to resourcing and implementation limitations from the apparel team. Requirements. Pricing - • Trey Research plans to do promotional pricing. Certain products will receive special pricing during the hours of extreme sporting events that Trey Research sponsors. Before or after the event, normal pricing will resume. Requirements. White labeling - • Trey Research wants to start white labeling its products under the brands of major nutritional retail store brands. These products would only be sold to specific customers. • Trey Research will provide and maintain a 'Compare to' price for customers to use to compare the white-labeled products. This Compare to price will also be the default item price for the customer if the customer accidentally lets a contract price expire. • The configuration of these restrictions must be applied automatically when creating new products for those customers. Requirements. Warehouse and inventory • If products in the warehouse must be blocked from transactions for a specific reason, such as a health and safety review, warehouse users should be able to block the products quickly from the ERP system. • All product quality tests should be processed in a uniform and consistent manner. • All product quality tests should be processed in a uniform and consistent manner. • Creation of any quality processes for products inbound to the warehouse, from the production line, or outbound from the warehouse to consumers should be automatically created to facilitate execution. • Testing requirements: \u0000 Requirement 1: 100 percent of all nutritional supplements and 50 percent of all energy drinks must be tested when production orders are completed. After a product is in testing, 100 percent of all tests must be completed. \u0000 Requirement 2: 75 percent of all nutritional supplements and energy drinks should be tested against their required tests during an outbound process. \u0000 Damaged products must be placed in one of four bins (based on product type) during the inspection process. \u0000 You must define quarantine zones to optimize product visibility throughout the testing process. You need to configure the system for the customer tier B pricing. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Configure an item sales control for the item." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Enable the customer group in the Activate price/discount form." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Assign the product filter code for the item to the customer tier B customer group." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Assign the item to the customer tier B price group." }, { "label": "E", "text": "Approve and confirm the trade allowance agreement. E" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 61, "stem": "DRAG DROP - Case study - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Trey Research is a multinational manufacturer of health and dietary supplements based in Seattle, Washington. The company is experiencing a rapid expansion not only in its supplements but as a lifestyle brand that also sells apparel. The supplements is experiencing a rapid expansion not only in its supplements but as a lifestyle brand that also sells apparel. The supplements and apparel businesses operate independently but manufacture and operate in the same legal entity. Current environment - Current environment. Technology Trey Research is migrating from an outdated, on-premises version of Dynamics AX to Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company wants to retain a lot of its current data structures and processes but adopt new efficiencies when the benefit is obvious. The company uses a third-party e-commerce site that is custom developed by an internal developer. Current environment. Items - Product numbering - All items are numbered by using a smart numbering format: [Product SKU+Size+Color+Style]. For reporting, items are queried for sales and inventory reports by using the first six digits of the item number or until the first dash is encountered. • A t-shirt could be 01001-S-Red for item 1001 in a size small with the color red. • A single energy drink could be 02001-12oz or 02001-20oz for the different sizes that product 02001 is sold in. Product attributes - • All clothing shares the same set of product attributes. • Supplements may share the same Product SKU but can have different attributes for the different size, color, or style variations of the product. • Product attributes that are unnecessary for an item should be excluded from the item. Pricing - • All items always have a default price. This price will not expire. • An item will have four different prices created for it every month, one for each customer tier, as detailed later in this section. The pricing expires at the end of the month. If no special pricing is created, the default item price will be used. • The monthly sales price in which the additional price breaks are determined is based on the estimated cost of the manufactured items. • Customers are categorized into four pricing tiers (A, B, C, and D) based on sales volume over the past 12 months. • Customers can negotiate special pricing for items in 30-day, 60-day, and 90-day increments. Quantity restrictions may be placed, depending on the item discount and promotion. • Promotional pricing is not used today. Pricing is restricted to monthly prices and customer-specific contract pricing. Cost - Items use a FIFO costing model today in their current Dynamics AX 2009 environment; however, using the FIFO costing method has created problems. Current environment. Warehouse and inventory • Warehouse requirements are simplistic. There is only one site. The site has two warehouses. • Trey Research needs to make sure that any energy drinks and nutritional supplements are manufactured and packaged with the highest standards. Trey Research automatically inspects products when all products are reported as finished. All products are inspected again when the items are picked. • Energy drinks require independent tests to check for dents in packaging, carbonation levels, and fill level. • Nutritional supplements require separate tests for packaging, expiration date, product seal, and product labeling. • Government compliancy and consistency testing are handled outside of the Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) system. • Resalable products are placed on one of two racks in the warehouse. Requirements - Requirements. Technology - • Trey Research will integrate all pricing and discount capabilities to its e-commerce website. Requirements. Items - • Reporting on products should be streamlined as much as possible. • The item numbering does not have to equate to the actual item number. • The future costing methods adopted must be commonly accepted for manufacturers. • Inventory costing should be done after a full inventory valuation is complete. It should take into consideration the direct materials, direct labor, and overhead that goes into an item. • Any costing method used needs the ability to track cost records about an item, cost categories, and calculation formulas for indirect costs. • The profitability for nutritional supplements manufacturing processes needs to be expressed in terms of the cost categories for routing operations and the calculation formulas for manufacturing overheads. • If a vendor can no longer deliver the raw materials for the energy drinks due to supply chain issues, the costs for using an alternative vendor to source the raw materials should be used to determine the impact on profits. • Apparel items will not be upgraded to the new costing method until after the go-live date due to resourcing and implementation limitations from the apparel team. Requirements. Pricing - • Trey Research plans to do promotional pricing. Certain products will receive special pricing during the hours of extreme sporting events that Trey Research sponsors. Before or after the event, normal pricing will resume. sporting events that Trey Research sponsors. Before or after the event, normal pricing will resume. Requirements. White labeling - • Trey Research wants to start white labeling its products under the brands of major nutritional retail store brands. These products would only be sold to specific customers. • Trey Research will provide and maintain a 'Compare to' price for customers to use to compare the white-labeled products. This Compare to price will also be the default item price for the customer if the customer accidentally lets a contract price expire. • The configuration of these restrictions must be applied automatically when creating new products for those customers. Requirements. Warehouse and inventory • If products in the warehouse must be blocked from transactions for a specific reason, such as a health and safety review, warehouse users should be able to block the products quickly from the ERP system. • All product quality tests should be processed in a uniform and consistent manner. • Creation of any quality processes for products inbound to the warehouse, from the production line, or outbound from the warehouse to consumers should be automatically created to facilitate execution. • Testing requirements: \u0000 Requirement 1: 100 percent of all nutritional supplements and 50 percent of all energy drinks must be tested when production orders are completed. After a product is in testing, 100 percent of all tests must be completed. \u0000 Requirement 2: 75 percent of all nutritional supplements and energy drinks should be tested against their required tests during an outbound process. \u0000 Damaged products must be placed in one of four bins (based on product type) during the inspection process. \u0000 You must define quarantine zones to optimize product visibility throughout the testing process. You need to configure the system for the new products that the company produces. Which product type should you use? To answer, drag the appropriate product types to the correct products. Each product type may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 62, "stem": "HOTSPOT - Case study - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Trey Research is a multinational manufacturer of health and dietary supplements based in Seattle, Washington. The company is experiencing a rapid expansion not only in its supplements but as a lifestyle brand that also sells apparel. The supplements is experiencing a rapid expansion not only in its supplements but as a lifestyle brand that also sells apparel. The supplements and apparel businesses operate independently but manufacture and operate in the same legal entity. Current environment - Current environment. Technology Trey Research is migrating from an outdated, on-premises version of Dynamics AX to Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company wants to retain a lot of its current data structures and processes but adopt new efficiencies when the benefit is obvious. The company uses a third-party e-commerce site that is custom developed by an internal developer. Current environment. Items - Product numbering - All items are numbered by using a smart numbering format: [Product SKU+Size+Color+Style]. For reporting, items are queried for sales and inventory reports by using the first six digits of the item number or until the first dash is encountered. • A t-shirt could be 01001-S-Red for item 1001 in a size small with the color red. • A single energy drink could be 02001-12oz or 02001-20oz for the different sizes that product 02001 is sold in. Product attributes - • All clothing shares the same set of product attributes. • Supplements may share the same Product SKU but can have different attributes for the different size, color, or style variations of the product. • Product attributes that are unnecessary for an item should be excluded from the item. Pricing - • All items always have a default price. This price will not expire. • An item will have four different prices created for it every month, one for each customer tier, as detailed later in this section. The pricing expires at the end of the month. If no special pricing is created, the default item price will be used. • The monthly sales price in which the additional price breaks are determined is based on the estimated cost of the manufactured items. • Customers are categorized into four pricing tiers (A, B, C, and D) based on sales volume over the past 12 months. • Customers can negotiate special pricing for items in 30-day, 60-day, and 90-day increments. Quantity restrictions may be placed, depending on the item discount and promotion. • Promotional pricing is not used today. Pricing is restricted to monthly prices and customer-specific contract pricing. Cost - Items use a FIFO costing model today in their current Dynamics AX 2009 environment; however, using the FIFO costing method has created problems. Current environment. Warehouse and inventory • Warehouse requirements are simplistic. There is only one site. The site has two warehouses. • Trey Research needs to make sure that any energy drinks and nutritional supplements are manufactured and packaged with the highest standards. Trey Research automatically inspects products when all products are reported as finished. All products are inspected again when the items are picked. • Energy drinks require independent tests to check for dents in packaging, carbonation levels, and fill level. • Nutritional supplements require separate tests for packaging, expiration date, product seal, and product labeling. • Government compliancy and consistency testing are handled outside of the Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) system. • Resalable products are placed on one of two racks in the warehouse. Requirements - Requirements. Technology - • Trey Research will integrate all pricing and discount capabilities to its e-commerce website. Requirements. Items - • Reporting on products should be streamlined as much as possible. • The item numbering does not have to equate to the actual item number. • The future costing methods adopted must be commonly accepted for manufacturers. • Inventory costing should be done after a full inventory valuation is complete. It should take into consideration the direct materials, direct labor, and overhead that goes into an item. • Any costing method used needs the ability to track cost records about an item, cost categories, and calculation formulas for indirect costs. • The profitability for nutritional supplements manufacturing processes needs to be expressed in terms of the cost categories for routing operations and the calculation formulas for manufacturing overheads. • If a vendor can no longer deliver the raw materials for the energy drinks due to supply chain issues, the costs for using an alternative vendor to source the raw materials should be used to determine the impact on profits. • Apparel items will not be upgraded to the new costing method until after the go-live date due to resourcing and implementation limitations from the apparel team. Requirements. Pricing - • Trey Research plans to do promotional pricing. Certain products will receive special pricing during the hours of extreme sporting events that Trey Research sponsors. Before or after the event, normal pricing will resume. sporting events that Trey Research sponsors. Before or after the event, normal pricing will resume. Requirements. White labeling - • Trey Research wants to start white labeling its products under the brands of major nutritional retail store brands. These products would only be sold to specific customers. • Trey Research will provide and maintain a 'Compare to' price for customers to use to compare the white-labeled products. This Compare to price will also be the default item price for the customer if the customer accidentally lets a contract price expire. • The configuration of these restrictions must be applied automatically when creating new products for those customers. Requirements. Warehouse and inventory • If products in the warehouse must be blocked from transactions for a specific reason, such as a health and safety review, warehouse users should be able to block the products quickly from the ERP system. • All product quality tests should be processed in a uniform and consistent manner. • Creation of any quality processes for products inbound to the warehouse, from the production line, or outbound from the warehouse to consumers should be automatically created to facilitate execution. • Testing requirements: \u0000 Requirement 1: 100 percent of all nutritional supplements and 50 percent of all energy drinks must be tested when production orders are completed. After a product is in testing, 100 percent of all tests must be completed. \u0000 Requirement 2: 75 percent of all nutritional supplements and energy drinks should be tested against their required tests during an outbound process. \u0000 Damaged products must be placed in one of four bins (based on product type) during the inspection process. \u0000 You must define quarantine zones to optimize product visibility throughout the testing process. You need to configure the extreme sports discounts. Which component should you use? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 63, "stem": "Case study - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - School of Fine Art is a distribution company that sells school supply items to primary and secondary schools. These include items such as pens, pencils, paper, notebooks, chalk, desks, acrylic paints, blackboards, dry erase markers, and whiteboard paint. Due to increased demand for colored pencils, lead times are longer for these pencils. School of Fine Art plans to expand sales into this market. School of Fine Art plans to implement Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage the business. Current environment. Company structure School of Fine Art consists of two legal entities. Primary company - • Located in Dublin, Ireland. • Has a single named warehouse. • Is the primary distribution center for both companies. Second company - • Is located in Glasgow, Scotland. • Includes the following warehouses: Glasgow1, Glasgow2. ○ Glasgow1 is used primarily to supply items regionally. ○ Glasgow2 serves as local storage for vendor-owned inventory and bulk storage for School of Fine Art's inventory. Current environment. General processes School of Fine Art uses a combination of spreadsheets and paper forms to manage the business. • All sales, purchases, and inventory are tracked in spreadsheets that are password protected by managers. • Managers frequently share spreadsheet passwords so that other users can make edits on their behalf. Inventory quantities and values are unreliable. • The spreadsheets are often incorrectly updated, have entry errors, and broken formulas for calculations. • Purchase order receipts, picking lists, packing slips, and invoices are all handwritten on pre-printed, three-part forms. • Late summer is the company's busiest time. During this time, workers are typically on the warehouse floor or making rush deliveries to schools to meet last-minute needs. Current environment. Inventory and warehousing • School of Fine Art values inventory by using FIFO costing methods. • Inventory in the warehouses cannot be distinguished as available inventory or inventory that is sold to a customer and waiting to be picked. This creates inventory inflation during cycle counts and later shortages because warehouse workers count items that are already promised to customers and waiting to be shipped. • Glasgow2 space is fully allocated to vendors. • Due to space constraints, school orders for photocopiers are shipped from the vendor to the school. • Crayons are stored as separate item numbers depending on whether they are in a box or a case. This creates issues when counting inventory to determine the total number of crayons in stock. • Lack of inventory controls has led to shortages on sales orders, creating backorders and unhappy schools. • Inventory is ordered quarterly due to the seasonality of the business. • Items can change annually based on popular sizes, colors, and styles for each new school season. The creation of the different configurations is a manual process, which creates so much overhead that temporary workers are brought in to do the data entry. Current environment. Purchasing - • Reordering is manually managed by the buyers looking at the seasonal spikes for the start of the school year, slowing around the end-of-year holidays until the following school year. • Pens are readily available products that are rarely discounted for sale. • Photocopiers are only available for sale on the Glasgow region. • Photocopy paper and construction paper are ordered by the pallet into Dublin1 and must be broken down into smaller sizes. The pallets are typically broken down and then split between what stays in Dublin1 and what is shipped to Glasgow1. • Chalk and blackboards are slower sellers, so many vendors do not carry these items. School of Fine Art purchases these products from a single vendor. There are no alternative vendors available. • School of Fine Art agrees to purchase a new line of smartboards from a vendor. The agreed-upon smartboard purchase prices will have a cost price per 55-inch, 75-inch, or 85-inch smartboard. • The company purchases pencils for the following warehouses: ○ Glasgow1: • standard pencils from Vendor A • colored pencils from Vendor B ○ Dublin1: • standard pencils from Vendor A • colored pencils from Vendor A • As whiteboard paint grows in popularity, so does the demand. This causes supply shortages. Whiteboard paint is ordered six months in advance. Current environment. Customer sales • The company contractually agrees to prices for some items with schools prior to the start of each school year. • Schools may order bulk cases of products and choose to distribute further breakdowns, such as a case of crayons, which are then distributed to classrooms by the box. • Pens do not require contracts with schools because they are low margin and do not have supply chain shortages. • Painting supplies such as acrylic paint, canvases, and easels do not require a special contract and are sold at regular list price to all schools. • Schools that offer painting classes are part of a program that provides special pricing on the painting supplies. • Chalk and blackboards are ordered less frequently than they were in past years. Schools are choosing to use whiteboard paint, which is a lower cost than ordering and installing the whiteboards. Requirements. Customers and sales • The system must have the ability to limit product purchase amounts by a single school to prevent stock shortages for other schools. • Schools are obligated to purchase the agreed amount for specific items per the school year. • Customer service must be able to easily enter items for sales orders and identify stock shortages. • Sales of whiteboard paint must be limited so that one school does not buy all the inventory and force backorders for other schools. • Schools must agree to the amount of whiteboard paint they will purchase for the whole school year. Requirements. Inventory costing - • Inventory must have associated costs except for the vendor storage in Glasgow2. • The vendor storage must still contain quantities but not include cost in inventory valuations. • At the end of each month, the costing manager must be able to identify how many items will not be fully settled. • Annual configuration changes to items must be automatically created where possible. • The company must be able to track costs for colored pencils and standard pencils separately. Requirements. Inventory - Requirements. Inventory - • Warehouse workers must be able to use their mobile phones and the mobile app to take calls and create transactions in the warehouse. • The desks must use a single item number and barcode regardless of year manufactured and the vendor. • Water-based paints from the vendor must be received in pails. • Acrylic paint must be managed by batches and expiration dates. • Pencils must be categorized as colored pencils or standard pencils. The individual colors of each colored pencil (such as red, green, and blue) will not be tracked. • The creation of unique smartboard items must be kept to a minimum. Issues - • WarehouseWorker1 works in Glasgow2. The worker receives a request to ship pallets of paper from the warehouse to Glasgow1 and Dublin1. WarehouseWorker1 must create the shipments in the system to transfer the pallets of paper from Glasgow1 to Dublin1. • The number of backorders for desks has increased. Customer service representatives struggle to select a desk item number that has inventory on hand. The desks are the same item, but the manufacturer vendor and year differ. • A school calls customer service to report that its photocopier is broken. The school needs expedited shipment of a replacement. • A school that is part of the special paint program reports that a sale price on canvas last month was a better price than its paint program price. The school requests a price adjustment. • A school reports that different shipments of acrylic paints are slightly different in color. • The sales team decides to have a flash sale on pens for one month only. The person entering the Sales order line should be able to communicate the information to the customer on the Sales order line. • Schools are reporting that chalk and blackboards are broken upon receipt. A worker in Dublin1 opens some cases of these products in the warehouse and finds that they are also broken. You must implement processes to enforce inventory inspection for a percentage of each purchase order line received. You must block all inventory for a purchase order line if the inspection fails. You need to configure the whiteboard paint requirements for schools. Which two settings should you configure? Each answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Quantity commitment" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Max is enforced" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Price and discount is fixed" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Minimum release amount" }, { "label": "E", "text": "Maximum release amount AB AB (100%)" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 64, "stem": "Case study - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - School of Fine Art is a distribution company that sells school supply items to primary and secondary schools. These include items such as pens, pencils, paper, notebooks, chalk, desks, acrylic paints, blackboards, dry erase markers, and whiteboard paint. Due to increased demand for colored pencils, lead times are longer for these pencils. School of Fine Art plans to expand sales into this market. School of Fine Art plans to implement Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage the business. Current environment. Company structure School of Fine Art consists of two legal entities. Primary company - • Located in Dublin, Ireland. • Has a single named warehouse. • Is the primary distribution center for both companies. Second company - • Is located in Glasgow, Scotland. • Includes the following warehouses: Glasgow1, Glasgow2. ○ Glasgow1 is used primarily to supply items regionally. ○ Glasgow2 serves as local storage for vendor-owned inventory and bulk storage for School of Fine Art's inventory. Current environment. General processes School of Fine Art uses a combination of spreadsheets and paper forms to manage the business. • All sales, purchases, and inventory are tracked in spreadsheets that are password protected by managers. • Managers frequently share spreadsheet passwords so that other users can make edits on their behalf. Inventory quantities and values are unreliable. • The spreadsheets are often incorrectly updated, have entry errors, and broken formulas for calculations. • Purchase order receipts, picking lists, packing slips, and invoices are all handwritten on pre-printed, three-part forms. • Late summer is the company's busiest time. During this time, workers are typically on the warehouse floor or making rush deliveries to schools to meet last-minute needs. Current environment. Inventory and warehousing • School of Fine Art values inventory by using FIFO costing methods. • Inventory in the warehouses cannot be distinguished as available inventory or inventory that is sold to a customer and waiting to be picked. This creates inventory inflation during cycle counts and later shortages because warehouse workers count items that are already promised to customers and waiting to be shipped. • Glasgow2 space is fully allocated to vendors. • Due to space constraints, school orders for photocopiers are shipped from the vendor to the school. • Crayons are stored as separate item numbers depending on whether they are in a box or a case. This creates issues when counting inventory to determine the total number of crayons in stock. • Lack of inventory controls has led to shortages on sales orders, creating backorders and unhappy schools. • Inventory is ordered quarterly due to the seasonality of the business. • Items can change annually based on popular sizes, colors, and styles for each new school season. The creation of the different configurations is a manual process, which creates so much overhead that temporary workers are brought in to do the data entry. Current environment. Purchasing - • Reordering is manually managed by the buyers looking at the seasonal spikes for the start of the school year, slowing around the end-of-year holidays until the following school year. • Pens are readily available products that are rarely discounted for sale. • Photocopiers are only available for sale on the Glasgow region. • Photocopy paper and construction paper are ordered by the pallet into Dublin1 and must be broken down into smaller sizes. The pallets are typically broken down and then split between what stays in Dublin1 and what is shipped to Glasgow1. • Chalk and blackboards are slower sellers, so many vendors do not carry these items. School of Fine Art purchases these products from a single vendor. There are no alternative vendors available. • School of Fine Art agrees to purchase a new line of smartboards from a vendor. The agreed-upon smartboard purchase prices will have a cost price per 55-inch, 75-inch, or 85-inch smartboard. • The company purchases pencils for the following warehouses: ○ Glasgow1: • standard pencils from Vendor A • colored pencils from Vendor B ○ Dublin1: • standard pencils from Vendor A • colored pencils from Vendor A • As whiteboard paint grows in popularity, so does the demand. This causes supply shortages. Whiteboard paint is ordered six months in advance. Current environment. Customer sales • The company contractually agrees to prices for some items with schools prior to the start of each school year. • Schools may order bulk cases of products and choose to distribute further breakdowns, such as a case of crayons, which are then distributed to classrooms by the box. • Pens do not require contracts with schools because they are low margin and do not have supply chain shortages. • Painting supplies such as acrylic paint, canvases, and easels do not require a special contract and are sold at regular list price to all schools. • Schools that offer painting classes are part of a program that provides special pricing on the painting supplies. • Chalk and blackboards are ordered less frequently than they were in past years. Schools are choosing to use whiteboard paint, which is a lower cost than ordering and installing the whiteboards. Requirements. Customers and sales • The system must have the ability to limit product purchase amounts by a single school to prevent stock shortages for other schools. • Schools are obligated to purchase the agreed amount for specific items per the school year. • Customer service must be able to easily enter items for sales orders and identify stock shortages. • Sales of whiteboard paint must be limited so that one school does not buy all the inventory and force backorders for other schools. • Schools must agree to the amount of whiteboard paint they will purchase for the whole school year. Requirements. Inventory costing - • Inventory must have associated costs except for the vendor storage in Glasgow2. • The vendor storage must still contain quantities but not include cost in inventory valuations. • At the end of each month, the costing manager must be able to identify how many items will not be fully settled. • Annual configuration changes to items must be automatically created where possible. • The company must be able to track costs for colored pencils and standard pencils separately. Requirements. Inventory - Requirements. Inventory - • Warehouse workers must be able to use their mobile phones and the mobile app to take calls and create transactions in the warehouse. • The desks must use a single item number and barcode regardless of year manufactured and the vendor. • Water-based paints from the vendor must be received in pails. • Acrylic paint must be managed by batches and expiration dates. • Pencils must be categorized as colored pencils or standard pencils. The individual colors of each colored pencil (such as red, green, and blue) will not be tracked. • The creation of unique smartboard items must be kept to a minimum. Issues - • WarehouseWorker1 works in Glasgow2. The worker receives a request to ship pallets of paper from the warehouse to Glasgow1 and Dublin1. WarehouseWorker1 must create the shipments in the system to transfer the pallets of paper from Glasgow1 to Dublin1. • The number of backorders for desks has increased. Customer service representatives struggle to select a desk item number that has inventory on hand. The desks are the same item, but the manufacturer vendor and year differ. • A school calls customer service to report that its photocopier is broken. The school needs expedited shipment of a replacement. • A school that is part of the special paint program reports that a sale price on canvas last month was a better price than its paint program price. The school requests a price adjustment. • A school reports that different shipments of acrylic paints are slightly different in color. • The sales team decides to have a flash sale on pens for one month only. The person entering the Sales order line should be able to communicate the information to the customer on the Sales order line. • Schools are reporting that chalk and blackboards are broken upon receipt. A worker in Dublin1 opens some cases of these products in the warehouse and finds that they are also broken. You must implement processes to enforce inventory inspection for a percentage of each purchase order line received. You must block all inventory for a purchase order line if the inspection fails. You need to process the expedited photocopier replacement. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Release the order to the warehouse for shipping." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Create and release a load for the order." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Send the shipment to the warehouse before sending it to the customer." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Create an advance exchange order." } ], "answer": "D" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 65, "stem": "HOTSPOT - Case study - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - School of Fine Art is a distribution company that sells school supply items to primary and secondary schools. These include items such as pens, pencils, paper, notebooks, chalk, desks, acrylic paints, blackboards, dry erase markers, and whiteboard items such as pens, pencils, paper, notebooks, chalk, desks, acrylic paints, blackboards, dry erase markers, and whiteboard paint. Due to increased demand for colored pencils, lead times are longer for these pencils. School of Fine Art plans to expand sales into this market. School of Fine Art plans to implement Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage the business. Current environment. Company structure School of Fine Art consists of two legal entities. Primary company - • Located in Dublin, Ireland. • Has a single named warehouse. • Is the primary distribution center for both companies. Second company - • Is located in Glasgow, Scotland. • Includes the following warehouses: Glasgow1, Glasgow2. ○ Glasgow1 is used primarily to supply items regionally. ○ Glasgow2 serves as local storage for vendor-owned inventory and bulk storage for School of Fine Art's inventory. Current environment. General processes School of Fine Art uses a combination of spreadsheets and paper forms to manage the business. • All sales, purchases, and inventory are tracked in spreadsheets that are password protected by managers. • Managers frequently share spreadsheet passwords so that other users can make edits on their behalf. Inventory quantities and values are unreliable. • The spreadsheets are often incorrectly updated, have entry errors, and broken formulas for calculations. • Purchase order receipts, picking lists, packing slips, and invoices are all handwritten on pre-printed, three-part forms. • Late summer is the company's busiest time. During this time, workers are typically on the warehouse floor or making rush deliveries to schools to meet last-minute needs. Current environment. Inventory and warehousing • School of Fine Art values inventory by using FIFO costing methods. • Inventory in the warehouses cannot be distinguished as available inventory or inventory that is sold to a customer and waiting to be picked. This creates inventory inflation during cycle counts and later shortages because warehouse workers count items that are already promised to customers and waiting to be shipped. • Glasgow2 space is fully allocated to vendors. • Due to space constraints, school orders for photocopiers are shipped from the vendor to the school. • Crayons are stored as separate item numbers depending on whether they are in a box or a case. This creates issues when counting inventory to determine the total number of crayons in stock. • Lack of inventory controls has led to shortages on sales orders, creating backorders and unhappy schools. • Inventory is ordered quarterly due to the seasonality of the business. • Items can change annually based on popular sizes, colors, and styles for each new school season. The creation of the different configurations is a manual process, which creates so much overhead that temporary workers are brought in to do the data entry. Current environment. Purchasing • Reordering is manually managed by the buyers looking at the seasonal spikes for the start of the school year, slowing around the end-of-year holidays until the following school year. • Pens are readily available products that are rarely discounted for sale. • Photocopiers are only available for sale on the Glasgow region. • Photocopy paper and construction paper are ordered by the pallet into Dublin1 and must be broken down into smaller sizes. The pallets are typically broken down and then split between what stays in Dublin1 and what is shipped to Glasgow1. • Chalk and blackboards are slower sellers, so many vendors do not carry these items. School of Fine Art purchases these products from a single vendor. There are no alternative vendors available. • School of Fine Art agrees to purchase a new line of smartboards from a vendor. The agreed-upon smartboard purchase prices will have a cost price per 55-inch, 75-inch, or 85-inch smartboard. • The company purchases pencils for the following warehouses: ○ Glasgow1: • standard pencils from Vendor A • colored pencils from Vendor B ○ Dublin1: • standard pencils from Vendor A • colored pencils from Vendor A • As whiteboard paint grows in popularity, so does the demand. This causes supply shortages. Whiteboard paint is ordered six months in advance. Current environment. Customer sales • The company contractually agrees to prices for some items with schools prior to the start of each school year. • Schools may order bulk cases of products and choose to distribute further breakdowns, such as a case of crayons, which are then distributed to classrooms by the box. • Pens do not require contracts with schools because they are low margin and do not have supply chain shortages. • Painting supplies such as acrylic paint, canvases, and easels do not require a special contract and are sold at regular list price to all schools. • Schools that offer painting classes are part of a program that provides special pricing on the painting supplies. • Chalk and blackboards are ordered less frequently than they were in past years. Schools are choosing to use whiteboard paint, which is a lower cost than ordering and installing the whiteboards. Requirements. Customers and sales • The system must have the ability to limit product purchase amounts by a single school to prevent stock shortages for other schools. • Schools are obligated to purchase the agreed amount for specific items per the school year. • Customer service must be able to easily enter items for sales orders and identify stock shortages. • Sales of whiteboard paint must be limited so that one school does not buy all the inventory and force backorders for other schools. • Schools must agree to the amount of whiteboard paint they will purchase for the whole school year. Requirements. Inventory costing • Inventory must have associated costs except for the vendor storage in Glasgow2. • Inventory must have associated costs except for the vendor storage in Glasgow2. • The vendor storage must still contain quantities but not include cost in inventory valuations. • At the end of each month, the costing manager must be able to identify how many items will not be fully settled. • Annual configuration changes to items must be automatically created where possible. • The company must be able to track costs for colored pencils and standard pencils separately. Requirements. Inventory - • Warehouse workers must be able to use their mobile phones and the mobile app to take calls and create transactions in the warehouse. • The desks must use a single item number and barcode regardless of year manufactured and the vendor. • Water-based paints from the vendor must be received in pails. • Acrylic paint must be managed by batches and expiration dates. • Pencils must be categorized as colored pencils or standard pencils. The individual colors of each colored pencil (such as red, green, and blue) will not be tracked. • The creation of unique smartboard items must be kept to a minimum. Issues - • WarehouseWorker1 works in Glasgow2. The worker receives a request to ship pallets of paper from the warehouse to Glasgow1 and Dublin1. WarehouseWorker1 must create the shipments in the system to transfer the pallets of paper from Glasgow1 to Dublin1. • The number of backorders for desks has increased. Customer service representatives struggle to select a desk item number that has inventory on hand. The desks are the same item, but the manufacturer vendor and year differ. • A school calls customer service to report that its photocopier is broken. The school needs expedited shipment of a replacement. • A school that is part of the special paint program reports that a sale price on canvas last month was a better price than its paint program price. The school requests a price adjustment. • A school reports that different shipments of acrylic paints are slightly different in color. • The sales team decides to have a flash sale on pens for one month only. The person entering the Sales order line should be able to communicate the information to the customer on the Sales order line. • Schools are reporting that chalk and blackboards are broken upon receipt. A worker in Dublin1 opens some cases of these products in the warehouse and finds that they are also broken. You must implement processes to enforce inventory inspection for a percentage of each purchase order line received. You must block all inventory for a purchase order line if the inspection fails. You need to set up pricing to solve the paint program school complaint. What should you configure? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 66, "stem": "DRAG DROP - Accompany uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage procurement operations. The company plans to source some product lines from offshore vendors. The company wants to use the landed cost module feature for the shipment tracking and item costing. You need to configure the landed cost functionality. What should you configure for each requirement? To answer, drag the appropriate components to the correct requirements. Each component may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 67, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company has vendor agreements with domestic and international companies. A production controller requires the ability to process the goods in transit to the company from international vendors. Charges and costs require the following setup: • applied to domestic and international inbound shipments • separate purchase orders The company will not create inbound loads automatically. You need to determine which module to configure to meet the requirement for inbound shipments. Which module should you use? To answer, drag the appropriate modules to the correct requirements. Each module may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 68, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage procurement operations. The company plans to source some product lines from offshore vendors. The company wants to use the landed cost module feature for the shipment tracking and item costing. You need to configure the procurement requirements. What should you do? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 69, "stem": "CompanyA is a wholesaler implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. CompanyB is a retailer that has multiple retail stores and one centralized distribution center. CompanyA receives a separate sales order for each of CompanyB's retail stores. The sales orders must be shipped together to the centralized distribution center, with each retail store order picked and packed separately. You need to configure the system to ensure that CompanyB's requirements are met through the outbound shipments from CompanyA. Which two features should you configure? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Container mixing constraints" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Space utilization" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Location profile" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Allow system grouping" } ], "answer": "AD" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 70, "stem": "DRAG DROP - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Coho Vineyard & Winery is a parent company that has two subsidiaries: Coho Vineyard and Coho Winery. Coho Vineyard is based in Medford, Oregon. The vineyard grows the grapes and then produces and bottles the wine. Coho Winery, based in Grants Pass, Oregon, distributes packaged wine to businesses and consumers. The winery sells imported cheese and olive oil in addition to the wines. Current environment. Technology landscape Current environment. Technology landscape • Coho Vineyard & Winery requires financial reporting from both Coho Vineyard and Coho Winery. The parent company consolidates financials in a third-party tool. • Coho Winery currently manages inventory and financials on spreadsheets separately from the parent company. Current environment. Inventory and warehousing • The entire warehouse is temperature controlled. A refrigerated section of the warehouse is used for items that require colder storage. • The items do not have fixed locations in the warehouse. • Coho uses smart numbering for cheese items today. The items start with F for France and U for United States such as the following: • F11234 = French cheese • U14567 = US cheese • Currently, wine does not use smart numbering. • Inventory is valued at First In, First-Out (FIFO). • Olive oil has a 12-month shelf life. • WineA is expensive and not regularly stocked in the warehouse. • WineB must be in the refrigerated section of the warehouse. • WineC is non-refrigerated wine and is the majority of inventory in the warehouse. Current environment. Vendors and procurement • Cheese is purchased from vendors in two countries: France and United States. • Non-cheese items can be purchased from vendors in other countries or regions. • Olive oil is bought and sold in full cases of six each. • When Coho Vineyard produces more wine than expected in a season, rebate programs are offered to any company whose monthly purchases exceed $5,000. Requirements. General - • The Coho Vineyard & Winery parent company, as well as Coho Vineyard, will not be considered in the implementation of Dynamics 365 Finance and Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management for Coho Winery. They plan to implement them as separate legal entities in the next five years. Requirements. Inventory and warehousing • Items must be renumbered in the new system. • Separate item numbers must be used for each imported item for use in simplified reporting by source country or region. • Advanced Warehouse Management capabilities must be enabled in the new system. • Each bottle of wine has a single item number. • The vintage of each bottle will change annually and may affect the cost of the bottle. This cost must be tracked by year. • Some bottles of wine require refrigeration. The system must automatically define where items must be stored in the warehouse. • Wine must be grouped in a hierarchy such as the following: • Red • Cabernet • Merlot • White • Chardonnay • Pinot • Inventory value must be stored at each month end. • Each month, the olive oil on-hand inventory is evaluated. Anything with less than six months left on the shelf life is sold to a discount retail store. If less than 90 days remains for the shelf life, then the olive oil is donated or destroyed. • At least 20 cases of olive oil and no more than 50 cases are on hand and not reserved for upcoming customer orders. • WineB must be refrigerated. Requirements. Vendors and procurement • The cheese smart numbering system will not be used in the future. Instead, the system must use standard configurations to ensure the correct cheese items are used for the correct country or region when ordering. • Olive oil must be managed in full cases only, although the inventory cost must be calculated as cages. • Should any bottle of olive oil be broken within a case, the cases will be sold at a discounted price. • Vendor rebates must be calculated and submitted for a claim. • Rebate programs are passed on to the retailers selling Coho Winery wines. The rebates must be claimed from Coho Vineyard. • Purchase orders (POs) must be maintained online with tracked changes between the vendors and the buyers. • The controller decides WineA must not be held in financial inventory on the Coho Winery books. The winery makes an agreement with the vendor that WineA will be owned by the vendor until a later date. • Vendor1 sends bulk shipments. Coho Winery does not always have enough warehouse staff to receive inventory. The company requires Vendor1 to send advanced shipping notices (ASNs). • The operations coordinator must schedule inbound loads. The company requires automation of inbound load creation where possible. Issues - • The warehouse is at maximum capacity. Empty bin locations are not always available. • The warehouse manager wants to establish fast moving locations for WineB on the floor and refill locations from higher rack storage. • Coho Winery recently conducted an internal audit risk assessment. The risk assessment found that inventory value reports were stored in spreadsheets. The spreadsheets can easily be edited and lack controls. • After olive oil is counted, multiple cases are destroyed due to shelf life. The inventory planner must determine if a new PO should be placed for olive oil. • The vendor rebates claims are often rejected because the claims were miscalculated by not including discounts. • The purchasing manager receives multiple complaints regarding POs: • Issue 1: PO changes are not accepted and confirmed, resulting in out-of-stock issues. • Issue 2: Vendors do not have control on responses to POs. Instead, the vendors rely on emails. You need to enable the system to correctly calculate vendor claims. Which configurations should you use for the rebates? To answer, move the appropriate configurations to the correct requirements. You may use each configuration once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to move the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 71, "stem": "HOTSPOT - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Coho Vineyard & Winery is a parent company that has two subsidiaries: Coho Vineyard and Coho Winery. Coho Vineyard is based in Medford, Oregon. The vineyard grows the grapes and then produces and bottles the wine. Coho Winery, based in Grants Pass, Oregon, distributes packaged wine to businesses and consumers. The winery sells imported cheese and olive oil in addition to the wines. Current environment. Technology landscape Current environment. Technology landscape • Coho Vineyard & Winery requires financial reporting from both Coho Vineyard and Coho Winery. The parent company consolidates financials in a third-party tool. • Coho Winery currently manages inventory and financials on spreadsheets separately from the parent company. Current environment. Inventory and warehousing • The entire warehouse is temperature controlled. A refrigerated section of the warehouse is used for items that require colder storage. • The items do not have fixed locations in the warehouse. • Coho uses smart numbering for cheese items today. The items start with F for France and U for United States such as the following: • F11234 = French cheese • U14567 = US cheese • Currently, wine does not use smart numbering. • Inventory is valued at First In, First-Out (FIFO). • Olive oil has a 12-month shelf life. • WineA is expensive and not regularly stocked in the warehouse. • WineB must be in the refrigerated section of the warehouse. • WineC is non-refrigerated wine and is the majority of inventory in the warehouse. Current environment. Vendors and procurement • Cheese is purchased from vendors in two countries: France and United States. • Non-cheese items can be purchased from vendors in other countries or regions. • Olive oil is bought and sold in full cases of six each. • When Coho Vineyard produces more wine than expected in a season, rebate programs are offered to any company whose monthly purchases exceed $5,000. Requirements. General - • The Coho Vineyard & Winery parent company, as well as Coho Vineyard, will not be considered in the implementation of Dynamics 365 Finance and Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management for Coho Winery. They plan to implement them as separate legal entities in the next five years. Requirements. Inventory and warehousing • Items must be renumbered in the new system. • Separate item numbers must be used for each imported item for use in simplified reporting by source country or region. • Advanced Warehouse Management capabilities must be enabled in the new system. • Each bottle of wine has a single item number. • The vintage of each bottle will change annually and may affect the cost of the bottle. This cost must be tracked by year. • Some bottles of wine require refrigeration. The system must automatically define where items must be stored in the warehouse. • Wine must be grouped in a hierarchy such as the following: • Red • Cabernet • Merlot • White • Chardonnay • Pinot • Inventory value must be stored at each month end. • Each month, the olive oil on-hand inventory is evaluated. Anything with less than six months left on the shelf life is sold to a discount retail store. If less than 90 days remains for the shelf life, then the olive oil is donated or destroyed. • At least 20 cases of olive oil and no more than 50 cases are on hand and not reserved for upcoming customer orders. • WineB must be refrigerated. Requirements. Vendors and procurement • The cheese smart numbering system will not be used in the future. Instead, the system must use standard configurations to ensure the correct cheese items are used for the correct country or region when ordering. • Olive oil must be managed in full cases only, although the inventory cost must be calculated as cages. • Should any bottle of olive oil be broken within a case, the cases will be sold at a discounted price. • Vendor rebates must be calculated and submitted for a claim. • Rebate programs are passed on to the retailers selling Coho Winery wines. The rebates must be claimed from Coho Vineyard. • Purchase orders (POs) must be maintained online with tracked changes between the vendors and the buyers. • The controller decides WineA must not be held in financial inventory on the Coho Winery books. The winery makes an agreement with the vendor that WineA will be owned by the vendor until a later date. • Vendor1 sends bulk shipments. Coho Winery does not always have enough warehouse staff to receive inventory. The company requires Vendor1 to send advanced shipping notices (ASNs). • The operations coordinator must schedule inbound loads. The company requires automation of inbound load creation where possible. Issues - • The warehouse is at maximum capacity. Empty bin locations are not always available. • The warehouse manager wants to establish fast moving locations for WineB on the floor and refill locations from higher rack storage. • Coho Winery recently conducted an internal audit risk assessment. The risk assessment found that inventory value reports were stored in spreadsheets. The spreadsheets can easily be edited and lack controls. • After olive oil is counted, multiple cases are destroyed due to shelf life. The inventory planner must determine if a new PO should be placed for olive oil. • The vendor rebates claims are often rejected because the claims were miscalculated by not including discounts. • The purchasing manager receives multiple complaints regarding POs: • Issue 1: PO changes are not accepted and confirmed, resulting in out-of-stock issues. • Issue 2: Vendors do not have control on responses to POs. Instead, the vendors rely on emails. You need to resolve the issues of the purchasing manager. What should you configure for each requirement? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 72, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company is planning the configurations to use for the landed cost module in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company purchases goods from a single vendor. The vendor will transport the goods on a ship from LocationA to LocationC. A ship change at LocationB must be tracked in the system along the way. The entire order will be processed in a single shipment. You need to identify which landed cost concept to use in the configuration. Which landed cost concept should you use? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 73, "stem": "DRAG DROP - Case study - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm is a distribution company that supplies pickles, preserves, pickling supplies, and accessory products to local farmers’ markets as well as grocers. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm does not produce or provide canning services for any items. provide canning services for any items. Current Environment - Munson's Pickles and Preserves Farm has an accounting system that is disconnected from the warehousing system. This has caused issues with controlling and valuing inventory. With these core drivers, Munson's Pickles and Preserves Farm decides to implement Dynamics 365 Finance and Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Warehousing - • Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm has a single warehouse that serves as the distribution center for all products. • The warehouse has bulk locations as well as racking, but location names and numbers do not exist. • Bulk locations are for storage of extra inventory that will not fit into the picking locations. • The warehouse is temperature-controlled, with locations grouped into two zones: refrigerated and non-perishable. • Inventory adjustments are made regularly due to lack of inventory controls. Inventory Data - • Item numbers are inconsistent and were set up as “smart-numbering,” such as 1-23-PKL and 44-24-PICK. • Cucumbers are not grown by Munson's Pickles and Preserves Farm and may be sourced from local farmers. • Pickles come in bottle sizes of 8 oz, 16 oz, 32 oz. The bottles are packed in cases. • Pickles may be spear, chip, or whole shapes within the bottles. This does not impact the cost of the pickles when they are the same flavor. • Pickle flavors are sweet, spicy, and dill. The flavors vary in price. • Preserves come in multiple flavors, such as mango, strawberry, and grape. These are seasonal items only. Due to the varying flavors and quantities, the preserves are owned by the vendor until they are sold. The mango preserves require refrigeration. The other preserves do not require refrigeration. • Many items are sold as accessories or supplies for pickling. • Some items within inventory have an expiration date, such as vinegar. • Fast-moving items are identified by inventory turns per quarter. Sweet and spicy pickles are the most popular. Purchasing and Sales - • Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm has an online store that can be found at munsonspicklesandpreservesfarm.com. • The online store is limited to a subset of products that are accessories only, such as bottles and jars. • A new product line of kosher pickles is going to be distributed by Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm. • VendorA is the largest vendor that Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm buys products from. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm’s second largest vendor is VendorB. Requirements - Warehousing - • The warehouse manager requires fast-moving items to be easily accessible to the order pickers in AisleA, with no more than one item per bin location in AisleA. Both sweet and spicy pickles have more inventory than will fit in AisleA, resulting in bulk location storage. o Spicy pickles must have no less than half of a pallet in AisleA at any time. o Sweet pickles must have enough inventory in AisleA prior to creating waves for warehouse work. • Strawberry preserves are selling slowly this season. They are put away in higher bin locations because they are not considered fast-moving items Inventory & Data - • Item numbers must be set up to create a streamlined numbering system. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm requires that the old item number be stored in Dynamics 365 for cross reference purposes. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm has settled on 0000001 as the item format for pickles instead of 1-23-PKL. PKL will be stored as an attribute. • Item numbers for pickles must be consolidated where possible into a single item number, regardless of bottle size. • Cucumbers must be sold at actual cost because they are a special order. • Kosher pickles must be set up in the item master. The kosher pickles are the same size jars and flavors as the other pickles, except that they have a kosher designation and will be slightly more expensive. • Vinegar and other perishable items must have date tracking for the manufacturer's batch number and expiration date of the product. • A batch of mango preserves had to be thrown away because the warehouse workers put away the product into the non- perishable zone. Purchasing & Sales - • Cucumbers must be sourced from local vendors for special orders only. • Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm recently signed an exclusivity agreement with VendorA, and buyers must now only purchase from VendorA. • VendorA recently purchased a competitor company, VendorB. VendorA wants to ensure that all agreements with VendorA also apply to VendorB while they work on merging the two companies into one. • VendorC sells preserves to Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm and requires the following: o Shipment requirement: VendorC owns the product after shipment to Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm until the time of sale. o On-hand requirement: VendorC has access to view on-hand preserve inventory at Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm warehouse. Issues - • CustomerD reports that the vinegar they ordered had a week left before it expired when they received it. This did not give CustomerD enough time to use the vinegar before they had to dispose of it. CustomerD now requires that all vinegar has more than 30 days left before the expiration date. • A customer calls and states that they ordered kosher pickles and received regular pickles. Inventory Control Clerk 2 reports that kosher and non-kosher pickles of the same variety are in the same warehouse location, contributing to the picking errors. that kosher and non-kosher pickles of the same variety are in the same warehouse location, contributing to the picking errors. • A salesperson reports that the margin is incorrect on a customer’s special order because the cucumber cost was for the most recent receipt of cucumbers, not the cucumbers received for the specific customer order. • An internal audit revealed that large quantities of pickles were missing and written off as damaged on multiple occasions cover the past year. No documentation or explanation of the write offs exist. There is no documentation of disposal, and no approval from management to substantiate that the pickles were not stolen. • Jars of pickles are received as eaches. Case counts of pickle jars vary by size: o 8 oz jars are 12 per case o 16 oz jars are 6 per case o The varied counts in each case create overhead in the warehouse. • The receiving clerk in the warehouse wants to ensure that broken bottles of vinegar are moved to a damage location named LocationA. Expired vinegar should be moved to a return-to-vendor location named LocationB. All other vinegar should be put away and sold according to normal location directives. • Operator1 is picking a pallet of strawberry preserves from a location to the shipping dock. While picking up the pallet, Operator1 drops the pallet. Operator1 must make sure that the strawberry preserves are not available for shipment until the damage is evaluated. • Operator2 tries to print wave labels that contain item 0000001. The labels start to print and then jam. At the same time, the printer battery needs to be recharged and the labels need to be reprinted. You need to configure the kosher pickle requirements for VendorA. What should you configure? To answer, move the appropriate configurations to the correct requirements. You may use each configuration once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 74, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company plans to implement landed cost. The company must be able to assign statuses to inform users of a specific voyage. You need to configure the statuses for the voyages for given cost areas. Which three cost areas should you configure? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Vendor" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Purchase order" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Folio" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Shipping container" }, { "label": "E", "text": "Vessels CDE" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 75, "stem": "A Canadian company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company sources a single item from two European vendors. The purchase price agreements are different for each vendor. The shipping costs can vary with every order and have multiple legs of shipment on the water and land. You need to calculate the landed cost of the item per order to identify the most economical vendor. What should you configure?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Inventory model group" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Vessel" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Journey template" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Voyage" } ], "answer": "C" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 76, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company uses landed cost for its Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management implementation. A vendor has inconsistencies in the over- and under-delivery of items across their product catalog. Because the variances are line specific, the company must evaluate each line for the over- and under-tolerances rather than the entire order. The company must put restrictions on the vendor for what is acceptable. Maintenance after configuration must be minimized as much as possible. You need to configure the over- and under-tolerances of the voyages. Which configurations should you use? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 4, "question_num": 77, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company is configuring the landed cost functionality in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company requires configuration of a cost type code for several landed cost requirements. You need to identify which cost type code account concept to use for each requirement. Which cost type code account concepts should you use? To answer, move the appropriate account concepts to the correct requirements. You may use each account concept once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to move the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 1, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. You need to implement inventory cycle counting. Which counting methods should you use? To answer, drag the appropriate counting methods to the correct requirements. Each counting method may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Select and Place: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/warehousing/cycle-counting", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 2, "stem": "You are the warehouse manager at a distribution center. In the warehouse, items must be moved to a staging location before moving to the baydoor location for shipping. You need to set up a work template that accomplishes this pick/put scenario. Which two actions should you perform? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Create one work class ID with valid location types of staging and baydoor. Assign these to the work template details." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Create two work templates: one is a pick/put from inventory to staging and the other is from staging to baydoor." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Create a sales order work template with two pick/put pairs: one to staging and the second to baydoor." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Create two work class IDs: one with valid put location types of staging and the other of baydoor. Assign these to the appropriate put work types on the work template. BD Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/warehousing/control-warehouse-location-directives" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 3, "stem": "You are the warehouse manager at a large distribution company and are responsible for all outbound processing. You decide to implement cluster picking functionality to more efficiently aid in picking. When warehouse workers log in to the mobile device to process a cluster pick, the work items are not assigned to positions as expected. You need to validate the cluster picking setup. Which two actions should you perform? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Review the Sales order Work template." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Validate the Cluster profile's positions and sorting setup." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Validate whether there is a Cluster profile selected on the Mobile device menu item." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Review the Location directive for sales picking. BC Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/warehousing/system-directed-cluster-pick" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 4, "stem": "A company plans to use the warehouse mobile app for cluster picking. The system must break the cluster when stocking items. You need to configure the system. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "On the Mobile device menu items form, select an option for the Directed by field." }, { "label": "B", "text": "On the Cluster profile form, add a value to the Sequence Put-away field." }, { "label": "C", "text": "On the Cluster profile form, add a value to the Break cluster at field." }, { "label": "D", "text": "On the Mobile device menu items form, add a value for the Work type ג Put-away field. C Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/warehousing/system-directed-cluster-pick https://ellipsesolutions.com/dynamics-365-thing-called-cluster-picking/" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 5, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company needs to stock inventory in their warehouse. Inbound purchase order materials may need to be placed into more than one location in the warehouse. You need to configure placement for inventory in the warehouse. How should you set up location directives? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area: Reference: https://dynamics-tips.com/location-directives-and-work-templates-explained/", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 6, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company uses the Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management Warehouse management module. The company requires production waves to be processed in batch. You need to configure wave processing. In which order should you perform the actions? To answer, move all actions from the list of actions to the answer area and arrange them in the correct order. Select and Place: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/unified-operations/supply-chain/warehousing/tasks/configure-wave- processing", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 7, "stem": "DRAG DROP - You need to implement location directives in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Which objects should you use? To answer, drag the appropriate objects to the correct permissions. Each object may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Select and Place: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/unified-operations/supply-chain/warehousing/control-warehouse-location- directives directives", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 8, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company plans to use warehouse management and dock appointment scheduling in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. You need to configure the system. Which configuration options should you use? To answer, drag the appropriate configuration options to the correct requirements. Each configuration option may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Select and Place:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 9, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company creates loads to ship sales orders. Loads must be shipped by using the lowest freight rates possible. You need to use the load planning workbench to create a load for sales order shipments. Which configuration options should you use? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 10, "stem": "You are the logistics manager at a distribution company. Your primary carrier service provides rates for transportation between New York City and Colorado. These rates are a flat rate depending on the city or general area of pickup as follows: \u0000 New York City = $500 \u0000 Colorado = $450 You need to set up Transportation Management to calculate the rate from New York City to Colorado. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Use a Point-to-Point engine based on weight and miles. Assign rates from New York City as the starting location and Colorado as the ending location and break the rates out based on the weight of the package." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Use a mileage-based rate engine to configure a rate master that calculates the rate based on the miles from New York City to Colorado." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Create hubs for both locations. Add a route plan from New York City to Colorado and assign the two charges as spot rates." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Set up zones in the Zone Master for New York City and Colorado. Assign rates to each zone in the Zone Master by starting and ending location." } ], "answer": "D" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 11, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company must set up replenishment of inventory using vendor-owned consignment inventory. You need to create the replenishment order. How should you complete the replenishment order? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/unified-operations/supply-chain/inventory/tasks/create-consignment- replenishment-order", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 12, "stem": "A warehouse picks and ships product. The warehouse completes work immediately upon automatic release to the warehouse. You need to configure waves to allow for automatic work creation. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Select the wave template and attribute to automatically process." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Release to warehouse and process the work." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Automate wave creation and process the wave at release to warehouse." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Automate wave creation and automatically process work. C Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/warehousing/tasks/configure-wave-processing" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 13, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company plans to implement Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management mobile device connectivity. You need to perform a spot cycle count on the mobile device. Which three actions should you perform in sequence? To answer, move the appropriate actions from the list of actions to the answer area and arrange them in the correct order. Select and Place: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/unified-operations/supply-chain/warehousing/cycle-counting#perform-a- cycle-count-by-using-a-mobile-device", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 14, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management with basic warehouse processes. Mobile devices are not used in the two warehouses. Warehouse items that have an A classification are counted weekly through automatic cycle count journals that are created per warehouse. Items that are in both warehouses appear only in one journal for counting. Counts are inaccurate because picking is posted against items that are being counted. You need to resolve the cycle count issues. To answer, drag the appropriate configurations to the correct requirements. Each configuration may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Select and Place:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 15, "stem": "You are implementing warehousing in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. You need to configure and approve one warehouse that can be used to create additional warehouses. What should you use?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "inventory and warehouse management parameter setup" }, { "label": "B", "text": "warehouse management parameter setup only" }, { "label": "C", "text": "warehouse work template" }, { "label": "D", "text": "warehouse configuration template D Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/inventory/warehouse-template" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 16, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A client uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. You need to configure automatic freight reconciliation. Which configuration options should you use? To answer, drag the appropriate configuration options to the correct requirements. Each configuration option may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Select and Place: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/transportation/tasks/set-up-automatic-freight-reconciliation https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/transportation/tasks/set-up-automatic-freight-reconciliation", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 17, "stem": "A company has several warehouse locations. The company acquires a new warehouse. You must design a new warehouse process workflow for the new warehouse. You need to configure the workflow. Which three options should you configure? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "work pools" }, { "label": "B", "text": "cluster picking" }, { "label": "C", "text": "outbound wave processing" }, { "label": "D", "text": "work templates" }, { "label": "E", "text": "wave templates ADE Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/unified-operations/supply-chain/warehousing/warehouse-management- overview" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 18, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company plans to streamline their receiving process for shipments that arrive daily. You need to set up inbound shipment processing. In which order should you perform the actions? To answer, move the appropriate actions from the list of actions to the answer area and arrange them in the correct order. NOTE: More than one order of answer choices is correct. You will receive credit for any of the correct orders you select. Select and Place: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamicsax-2012/appuser-itpro/business-process-planning-transportation-for-inbound- loads", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 19, "stem": "A company plans to implement Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management shipping manifests. The company wants to use a multiple-level manifest process. You need to ensure that the system is configured for multiple-level manifest processing. What should you validate?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "All containers are manifested after the container group is manifested." }, { "label": "B", "text": "All containers are manifested before the container group is manifested." }, { "label": "C", "text": "The allow split picks configuration is enabled." }, { "label": "D", "text": "All container types are set up with all four attributes. B Note: There are several versions of this question in the exam. The question has two possible correct answers: 1. All containers are manifested before the container group is manifested. 2. All container groups are manifested before the shipment is manifested Other incorrect answer options you may see on the exam include the following: 1. All containers are of the status open before the group is manifested 2. All container types are set up with the returnable configuration enabled. 3. All container groups are manifested after the shipment is manifested. Reference: https://cloudblogs.microsoft.com/dynamics365/no-audience/2016/12/01/improved-packing-functionality-dynamics-365-for- operations-1611/" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 20, "stem": "A company uses the warehouse mobile app for Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. You must create a menu item for reprinting license plate labels. Reprinting a license plate label must not create warehouse work. You need to configure the warehouse mobile app to add the new menu item. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Set the Mode to Work" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Set the Mode to Indirect" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Set the Activity code to Cancel work" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Set the Activity code to None" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 21, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company uses outside carrier services for inbound and outbound deliveries. Carrier services must be scheduled so that all trucks do not show up at the same time. You need to configure the Transportation Management module to schedule the loads. How should you set up dock appointments? To answer, select the appropriate options i the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamicsax-2012/appuser-itpro/plan-appointments-for-a-load", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 22, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management for wave processing. The system must automatically create a wave when a sales order is released to the warehouse. You need to configure the system to meet this requirement. Which configuration should you enable?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Automate wave release" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Assign to open waves" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Process wave automatically threshold" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Automate wave creation D Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/warehousing/tasks/configure-wave-processing" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 23, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company uses several freight carriers. Freight is calculated by mileage. You need to configure the system. Which values should you use? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/transportation/transportation-management-engines", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 24, "stem": "A company plans to implement Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management shipping manifests. The company wants to use a multiple-level manifest process. You need to ensure that the system is configured for multiple-level manifest processing. What should you validate?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "All container groups are manifested before the shipment is manifested" }, { "label": "B", "text": "All containers are of the status open before the group is manifested" }, { "label": "C", "text": "The allow split picks configuration is enabled" }, { "label": "D", "text": "All container types are set up with all four attributes A Reference: https://cloudblogs.microsoft.com/dynamics365/no-audience/2016/12/01/improved-packing-functionality-dynamics-365-for- operations-1611/" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 25, "stem": "You are implementing containerization functionality. You must automate containerization so that containers and picking work for shipments are created when a wave is processed. The work lines will be split into quantities to fit required containers by size. You need to set up a container build template that defines the containerization process. Which three items should you set up before you create the container build template? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "a wave template that includes the containerize method" }, { "label": "B", "text": "container packing policies" }, { "label": "C", "text": "a container group" }, { "label": "D", "text": "container types" }, { "label": "E", "text": "container packing strategies ACD Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/unified-operations/supply-chain/warehousing/tasks/set-up-containerization" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 26, "stem": "You are the inventory manager at a large distribution company. You notice item P0001 has been running out regularly and the on-hand count seems to differ from what is in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. You want cycle count work to be automatically created when the quantity drops below 10 pieces, which is about once a week. You need to appropriately configure warehouse management to generate cycle count work. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Create a cycle count plan for item P0001 to run when the quantity is below 10." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Create a cycle count threshold that is percentage based that will generate work when inventory drops below 10% for item P0001." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Create a cycle count threshold that is quantity based and specify 10 for the quantity. Add P0001 as a selected item." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Create a cycle count plan for item P0001. Generate a batch job that runs once a week. C Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/unified-operations/supply-chain/warehousing/cycle-counting" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 27, "stem": "A company receives a large quantity of inventory into the warehouse. The inventory has a short shelf life and must be sent out to the stores as soon as possible. You need to use Buyer's push to transfer the inventory out to the stores. Which two actions should you perform? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Create a sales order." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Create transfer orders." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Select Product and ship open sales orders." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Select Product and distribution method. BD Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamicsax-2012/appuser-itpro/use-buyer-s-push-to-distribute-products" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 28, "stem": "You are the logistics manager at a distribution company. Your primary carrier service provides rates for transportation between New York City and Colorado. These rates are a flat rate depending on the city or general area of pickup as follows: \u0000 New York City = $500 \u0000 Colorado = $450 You need to set up Transportation Management to calculate the rate from New York City to Colorado. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Set up zones in the Zone Master for New York City and Colorado. Assign rates to each zone in the Zone Master by starting and ending location." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Using the Point-to-Point engine with an empty break master, assign rates based on starting and ending locations." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Create a Point-to-Point based Rate Master with the rates broken out by pieces." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Create a Shipping carrier and service. Create carrier accessorial charges to represent the rates for each location." } ], "answer": "A" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 29, "stem": "DRAG DROP - New order items arrive from vendors and come into a company's main warehouse. You must set up internal transportation processes in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to distribute goods to other locations. You need to set up inbound orders through transportation management. In which order should you perform the actions? To answer, move all actions from the list of actions to the answer area and arrange them in the correct order. NOTE: More than one order of answer choices is correct. You will receive credit for any of the correct orders you select. Select and Place: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/unified-operations/supply-chain/transportation/transportation-management- https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/unified-operations/supply-chain/transportation/transportation-management- overview#inbound-transportation", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 30, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. There are two warehouses. All inventory is purchased into Warehouse1 and transferred to Warehouse2 based on replenishment rules. Planned orders were generated overnight by the master planning engine and do not need to be reviewed. Warehouse1 orders for Warehouse2 do not show as available for picking and shipping. Planned orders must be available for warehouse processing as quickly as possible and processed as a group. You need to configure the system to meet the requirements. Which solution should you configure for each requirement? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/master-planning/maintain-planned-orders", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 31, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A distribution company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Users in the warehouse must have the ability to create and process transfer orders from a mobile device. You need to complete the setup. Which areas should you configure? To answer, drag the appropriate areas to the correct prerequisites. Each area may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 32, "stem": "A retail distributor is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Wholesale customers receive 10 percent off list price for the current calendar year. CustomerA is a wholesaler that agreed to a pilot program for a new product, with terms to receive a discounted set price for 100 each of the product for the next six months. The distributor will charge penalties to Customer if the 100 each are not sold within the period. You must configure pricing for Customer. Which three configurations should you set up? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Create a sales agreement with the price and discount is fixed parameter set to yes." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Create a trade agreement for wholesalers." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Set the find next parameter on trade agreements." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Create a sales agreement with the max enforced parameter set to yes." }, { "label": "E", "text": "Set the effective date on the trade agreement to begin after the sales agreement. ABE" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 33, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A distribution company implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management has two warehouses. One item is purchased and stocked in only Warehouse1. Occasionally, Warehouse2 requires this item based on customer demand. When this occurs, an order for the item must be automatically created for Warehouse2. You need to configure the automation of the order for Warehouse2. What should you configure? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 34, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The working time template is left blank when the period template is configured. You need to determine the workdays that will be used in the inventory replenishment reporting. Which workdays will be used?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "calendar setup on the warehouse" }, { "label": "B", "text": "system calendar for the country" }, { "label": "C", "text": "5-day work week" }, { "label": "D", "text": "system date dimensions" }, { "label": "E", "text": "7-day work week E" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 35, "stem": "A company is implementing the Warehouse management module in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company will receive an item in three units of measure (UOM): each, case, and pallet. The item must be counted from a mobile device in each UOM or case UOM only by the warehouse worker. You must configure the item. What should you configure?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Create a reservation hierarchy and define the rules." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Set the default inventory unit of measure to each and the default purchase and sell unit to case." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Create one unit sequence group and enable counting per unit of measure." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Set the default inventory unit of measure to each and assign the default item set up to case." }, { "label": "E", "text": "Create separate unit sequence groups, one for case counting and one for each counting." } ], "answer": "C" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 36, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management has multiple warehouses, some of which are Warehouse Management-enabled. The company must hold inventory for the following purposes: • On-hand inventory available for all transactions except for sales orders. • Automatic hold on inbound purchase order inventory. • Damaged on-hand inventory that can be transferred from a mobile device, leaving the undamaged inventory available. You need to determine the feature that applies to each company requirement. Which features should you use? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 37, "stem": "A company is using advanced warehouse functionality in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. A batch-tracked item in high-demand caused delays on sales orders. The vendor delivery is expected today. Sales orders must be held until the items are checked for quality. You need to set up batch attributes to allow for warehouse processing but hold sales orders. What should you configure?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Unavailable status, block reservation, picking and shipping" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Unavailable status, block shipping" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Available status, block shipping" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Unavailable status, block picking and shipping" }, { "label": "E", "text": "Available status, block reservation, picking and shipping" } ], "answer": "D" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 38, "stem": "A warehouse picks and ships product. The warehouse completes work immediately upon automatic release to the warehouse. You need to configure waves to allow for automatic work creation. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Select the wave template and attribute to automatically process." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Select the wave template and assign it to recurring batch job." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Automate wave creation and process the wave at release to warehouse." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Select the wave template and process the wave at release to warehouse." } ], "answer": "C" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 39, "stem": "You are the logistics manager at a distribution company. Your primary carrier service provides rates for transportation between New York City and Colorado. These rates are a flat rate depending on the city or general area of pickup as follows: • New York City = $500 • Colorado = $450 You need to set up Transportation Management to calculate the rate from New York City to Colorado. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Use a Point-to-Point engine based on weight and miles. Assign rates from New York City as the starting location and Colorado as the ending location and break the rates out based on the weight of the package." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Using the Point-to-Point engine with an empty break master, assign rates based on starting and ending locations." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Create a Shipping carrier and service. Create carrier accessorial charges to represent the rates for each location." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Set up A Transit Time Engine to track days from New York City to Colorado. Set up rates in the Rate Master tied to day breaks." } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 40, "stem": "A warehouse picks and ships product. The warehouse completes work immediately upon automatic release to the warehouse. You need to configure waves to allow for automatic work creation. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Select the wave template and assign it to recurring batch job." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Release to warehouse and process the work." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Automate wave creation and process the wave automatically at threshold." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Automate replenishment and process the wave at release." } ], "answer": "C" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 41, "stem": "You are the logistics manager at a distribution company. Your primary carrier service provides rates for transportation between New York City and Colorado. These rates are a flat rate depending on the city or general area of pickup as follows: • New York City = $500 • Colorado = $450 You need to set up Transportation Management to calculate the rate from New York City to Colorado. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Use a Point-to-Point engine based on weight and miles. Assign rates from New York City as the starting location and Colorado as the ending location and break the rates out based on the weight of the package." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Using the Point-to-Point engine with an empty break master, assign rates based on starting and ending locations." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Create a Point-to-Point based Rate Master with the rates broken out by pieces." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Set up A Transit Time Engine to track days from New York City to Colorado. Set up rates in the Rate Master tied to day breaks." } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 42, "stem": "HOTSPOT - Case study - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Trey Research is a multinational manufacturer of health and dietary supplements based in Seattle, Washington. The company is experiencing a rapid expansion not only in its supplements but as a lifestyle brand that also sells apparel. The supplements is experiencing a rapid expansion not only in its supplements but as a lifestyle brand that also sells apparel. The supplements and apparel businesses operate independently but manufacture and operate in the same legal entity. Current environment - Current environment. Technology Trey Research is migrating from an outdated, on-premises version of Dynamics AX to Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company wants to retain a lot of its current data structures and processes but adopt new efficiencies when the benefit is obvious. The company uses a third-party e-commerce site that is custom developed by an internal developer. Current environment. Items - Product numbering - All items are numbered by using a smart numbering format: [Product SKU+Size+Color+Style]. For reporting, items are queried for sales and inventory reports by using the first six digits of the item number or until the first dash is encountered. • A t-shirt could be 01001-S-Red for item 1001 in a size small with the color red. • A single energy drink could be 02001-12oz or 02001-20oz for the different sizes that product 02001 is sold in. Product attributes - • All clothing shares the same set of product attributes. • Supplements may share the same Product SKU but can have different attributes for the different size, color, or style variations of the product. • Product attributes that are unnecessary for an item should be excluded from the item. Pricing - • All items always have a default price. This price will not expire. • An item will have four different prices created for it every month, one for each customer tier, as detailed later in this section. The pricing expires at the end of the month. If no special pricing is created, the default item price will be used. • The monthly sales price in which the additional price breaks are determined is based on the estimated cost of the manufactured items. • Customers are categorized into four pricing tiers (A, B, C, and D) based on sales volume over the past 12 months. • Customers can negotiate special pricing for items in 30-day, 60-day, and 90-day increments. Quantity restrictions may be placed, depending on the item discount and promotion. • Promotional pricing is not used today. Pricing is restricted to monthly prices and customer-specific contract pricing. Cost - Items use a FIFO costing model today in their current Dynamics AX 2009 environment; however, using the FIFO costing method has created problems. Current environment. Warehouse and inventory • Warehouse requirements are simplistic. There is only one site. The site has two warehouses. • Trey Research needs to make sure that any energy drinks and nutritional supplements are manufactured and packaged with the highest standards. Trey Research automatically inspects products when all products are reported as finished. All products are inspected again when the items are picked. • Energy drinks require independent tests to check for dents in packaging, carbonation levels, and fill level. • Nutritional supplements require separate tests for packaging, expiration date, product seal, and product labeling. • Government compliancy and consistency testing are handled outside of the Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) system. • Resalable products are placed on one of two racks in the warehouse. Requirements - Requirements. Technology - • Trey Research will integrate all pricing and discount capabilities to its e-commerce website. Requirements. Items - • Reporting on products should be streamlined as much as possible. • The item numbering does not have to equate to the actual item number. • The future costing methods adopted must be commonly accepted for manufacturers. • Inventory costing should be done after a full inventory valuation is complete. It should take into consideration the direct materials, direct labor, and overhead that goes into an item. • Any costing method used needs the ability to track cost records about an item, cost categories, and calculation formulas for indirect costs. • The profitability for nutritional supplements manufacturing processes needs to be expressed in terms of the cost categories for routing operations and the calculation formulas for manufacturing overheads. • If a vendor can no longer deliver the raw materials for the energy drinks due to supply chain issues, the costs for using an alternative vendor to source the raw materials should be used to determine the impact on profits. • Apparel items will not be upgraded to the new costing method until after the go-live date due to resourcing and implementation limitations from the apparel team. Requirements. Pricing - • Trey Research plans to do promotional pricing. Certain products will receive special pricing during the hours of extreme sporting events that Trey Research sponsors. Before or after the event, normal pricing will resume. sporting events that Trey Research sponsors. Before or after the event, normal pricing will resume. Requirements. White labeling - • Trey Research wants to start white labeling its products under the brands of major nutritional retail store brands. These products would only be sold to specific customers. • Trey Research will provide and maintain a 'Compare to' price for customers to use to compare the white-labeled products. This Compare to price will also be the default item price for the customer if the customer accidentally lets a contract price expire. • The configuration of these restrictions must be applied automatically when creating new products for those customers. Requirements. Warehouse and inventory • If products in the warehouse must be blocked from transactions for a specific reason, such as a health and safety review, warehouse users should be able to block the products quickly from the ERP system. • All product quality tests should be processed in a uniform and consistent manner. • Creation of any quality processes for products inbound to the warehouse, from the production line, or outbound from the warehouse to consumers should be automatically created to facilitate execution. • Testing requirements: \u0000 Requirement 1: 100 percent of all nutritional supplements and 50 percent of all energy drinks must be tested when production orders are completed. After a product is in testing, 100 percent of all tests must be completed. \u0000 Requirement 2: 75 percent of all nutritional supplements and energy drinks should be tested against their required tests during an outbound process. \u0000 Damaged products must be placed in one of four bins (based on product type) during the inspection process. \u0000 You must define quarantine zones to optimize product visibility throughout the testing process. You need to configure the pricing for the white-labeled products. Which system object should you configure? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 43, "stem": "Case study - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Trey Research is a multinational manufacturer of health and dietary supplements based in Seattle, Washington. The company is experiencing a rapid expansion not only in its supplements but as a lifestyle brand that also sells apparel. The supplements and apparel businesses operate independently but manufacture and operate in the same legal entity. Current environment - Current environment. Technology - Current environment. Technology - Trey Research is migrating from an outdated, on-premises version of Dynamics AX to Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company wants to retain a lot of its current data structures and processes but adopt new efficiencies when the benefit is obvious. The company uses a third-party e-commerce site that is custom developed by an internal developer. Current environment. Items - Product numbering - All items are numbered by using a smart numbering format: [Product SKU+Size+Color+Style]. For reporting, items are queried for sales and inventory reports by using the first six digits of the item number or until the first dash is encountered. • A t-shirt could be 01001-S-Red for item 1001 in a size small with the color red. • A single energy drink could be 02001-12oz or 02001-20oz for the different sizes that product 02001 is sold in. Product attributes - • All clothing shares the same set of product attributes. • Supplements may share the same Product SKU but can have different attributes for the different size, color, or style variations of the product. • Product attributes that are unnecessary for an item should be excluded from the item. Pricing - • All items always have a default price. This price will not expire. • An item will have four different prices created for it every month, one for each customer tier, as detailed later in this section. The pricing expires at the end of the month. If no special pricing is created, the default item price will be used. • The monthly sales price in which the additional price breaks are determined is based on the estimated cost of the manufactured items. • Customers are categorized into four pricing tiers (A, B, C, and D) based on sales volume over the past 12 months. • Customers can negotiate special pricing for items in 30-day, 60-day, and 90-day increments. Quantity restrictions may be placed, depending on the item discount and promotion. • Promotional pricing is not used today. Pricing is restricted to monthly prices and customer-specific contract pricing. Cost - Items use a FIFO costing model today in their current Dynamics AX 2009 environment; however, using the FIFO costing method has created problems. Current environment. Warehouse and inventory • Warehouse requirements are simplistic. There is only one site. The site has two warehouses. • Trey Research needs to make sure that any energy drinks and nutritional supplements are manufactured and packaged with the highest standards. Trey Research automatically inspects products when all products are reported as finished. All products are inspected again when the items are picked. • Energy drinks require independent tests to check for dents in packaging, carbonation levels, and fill level. • Nutritional supplements require separate tests for packaging, expiration date, product seal, and product labeling. • Government compliancy and consistency testing are handled outside of the Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) system. • Resalable products are placed on one of two racks in the warehouse. Requirements - Requirements. Technology - • Trey Research will integrate all pricing and discount capabilities to its e-commerce website. Requirements. Items - • Reporting on products should be streamlined as much as possible. • The item numbering does not have to equate to the actual item number. • The future costing methods adopted must be commonly accepted for manufacturers. • Inventory costing should be done after a full inventory valuation is complete. It should take into consideration the direct materials, direct labor, and overhead that goes into an item. • Any costing method used needs the ability to track cost records about an item, cost categories, and calculation formulas for indirect costs. • The profitability for nutritional supplements manufacturing processes needs to be expressed in terms of the cost categories for routing operations and the calculation formulas for manufacturing overheads. • If a vendor can no longer deliver the raw materials for the energy drinks due to supply chain issues, the costs for using an alternative vendor to source the raw materials should be used to determine the impact on profits. • Apparel items will not be upgraded to the new costing method until after the go-live date due to resourcing and implementation limitations from the apparel team. Requirements. Pricing - • Trey Research plans to do promotional pricing. Certain products will receive special pricing during the hours of extreme sporting events that Trey Research sponsors. Before or after the event, normal pricing will resume. Requirements. White labeling - • Trey Research wants to start white labeling its products under the brands of major nutritional retail store brands. These products would only be sold to specific customers. • Trey Research will provide and maintain a 'Compare to' price for customers to use to compare the white-labeled products. This Compare to price will also be the default item price for the customer if the customer accidentally lets a contract price expire. • The configuration of these restrictions must be applied automatically when creating new products for those customers. Requirements. Warehouse and inventory • If products in the warehouse must be blocked from transactions for a specific reason, such as a health and safety review, warehouse users should be able to block the products quickly from the ERP system. • All product quality tests should be processed in a uniform and consistent manner. • All product quality tests should be processed in a uniform and consistent manner. • Creation of any quality processes for products inbound to the warehouse, from the production line, or outbound from the warehouse to consumers should be automatically created to facilitate execution. • Testing requirements: \u0000 Requirement 1: 100 percent of all nutritional supplements and 50 percent of all energy drinks must be tested when production orders are completed. After a product is in testing, 100 percent of all tests must be completed. \u0000 Requirement 2: 75 percent of all nutritional supplements and energy drinks should be tested against their required tests during an outbound process. \u0000 Damaged products must be placed in one of four bins (based on product type) during the inspection process. \u0000 You must define quarantine zones to optimize product visibility throughout the testing process. You need to configure automated testing for the following tasks: • inbound processes from manufacturing • outbound processed from the warehouse picking process How many processes should you configure?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "2" }, { "label": "B", "text": "3" }, { "label": "C", "text": "4" }, { "label": "D", "text": "10" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 44, "stem": "DRAG DROP - Case study - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - School of Fine Art is a distribution company that sells school supply items to primary and secondary schools. These include items such as pens, pencils, paper, notebooks, chalk, desks, acrylic paints, blackboards, dry erase markers, and whiteboard items such as pens, pencils, paper, notebooks, chalk, desks, acrylic paints, blackboards, dry erase markers, and whiteboard paint. Due to increased demand for colored pencils, lead times are longer for these pencils. School of Fine Art plans to expand sales into this market. School of Fine Art plans to implement Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage the business. Current environment. Company structure School of Fine Art consists of two legal entities. Primary company - • Located in Dublin, Ireland. • Has a single named warehouse. • Is the primary distribution center for both companies. Second company - • Is located in Glasgow, Scotland. • Includes the following warehouses: Glasgow1, Glasgow2. ○ Glasgow1 is used primarily to supply items regionally. ○ Glasgow2 serves as local storage for vendor-owned inventory and bulk storage for School of Fine Art's inventory. Current environment. General processes School of Fine Art uses a combination of spreadsheets and paper forms to manage the business. • All sales, purchases, and inventory are tracked in spreadsheets that are password protected by managers. • Managers frequently share spreadsheet passwords so that other users can make edits on their behalf. Inventory quantities and values are unreliable. • The spreadsheets are often incorrectly updated, have entry errors, and broken formulas for calculations. • Purchase order receipts, picking lists, packing slips, and invoices are all handwritten on pre-printed, three-part forms. • Late summer is the company's busiest time. During this time, workers are typically on the warehouse floor or making rush deliveries to schools to meet last-minute needs. Current environment. Inventory and warehousing • School of Fine Art values inventory by using FIFO costing methods. • Inventory in the warehouses cannot be distinguished as available inventory or inventory that is sold to a customer and waiting to be picked. This creates inventory inflation during cycle counts and later shortages because warehouse workers count items that are already promised to customers and waiting to be shipped. • Glasgow2 space is fully allocated to vendors. • Due to space constraints, school orders for photocopiers are shipped from the vendor to the school. • Crayons are stored as separate item numbers depending on whether they are in a box or a case. This creates issues when counting inventory to determine the total number of crayons in stock. • Lack of inventory controls has led to shortages on sales orders, creating backorders and unhappy schools. • Inventory is ordered quarterly due to the seasonality of the business. • Items can change annually based on popular sizes, colors, and styles for each new school season. The creation of the different configurations is a manual process, which creates so much overhead that temporary workers are brought in to do the data entry. Current environment. Purchasing • Reordering is manually managed by the buyers looking at the seasonal spikes for the start of the school year, slowing around the end-of-year holidays until the following school year. • Pens are readily available products that are rarely discounted for sale. • Photocopiers are only available for sale on the Glasgow region. • Photocopy paper and construction paper are ordered by the pallet into Dublin1 and must be broken down into smaller sizes. The pallets are typically broken down and then split between what stays in Dublin1 and what is shipped to Glasgow1. • Chalk and blackboards are slower sellers, so many vendors do not carry these items. School of Fine Art purchases these products from a single vendor. There are no alternative vendors available. • School of Fine Art agrees to purchase a new line of smartboards from a vendor. The agreed-upon smartboard purchase prices will have a cost price per 55-inch, 75-inch, or 85-inch smartboard. • The company purchases pencils for the following warehouses: ○ Glasgow1: • standard pencils from Vendor A • colored pencils from Vendor B ○ Dublin1: • standard pencils from Vendor A • colored pencils from Vendor A • As whiteboard paint grows in popularity, so does the demand. This causes supply shortages. Whiteboard paint is ordered six months in advance. Current environment. Customer sales • The company contractually agrees to prices for some items with schools prior to the start of each school year. • Schools may order bulk cases of products and choose to distribute further breakdowns, such as a case of crayons, which are then distributed to classrooms by the box. • Pens do not require contracts with schools because they are low margin and do not have supply chain shortages. • Painting supplies such as acrylic paint, canvases, and easels do not require a special contract and are sold at regular list price to all schools. • Schools that offer painting classes are part of a program that provides special pricing on the painting supplies. • Chalk and blackboards are ordered less frequently than they were in past years. Schools are choosing to use whiteboard paint, which is a lower cost than ordering and installing the whiteboards. Requirements. Customers and sales • The system must have the ability to limit product purchase amounts by a single school to prevent stock shortages for other schools. • Schools are obligated to purchase the agreed amount for specific items per the school year. • Customer service must be able to easily enter items for sales orders and identify stock shortages. • Sales of whiteboard paint must be limited so that one school does not buy all the inventory and force backorders for other schools. • Schools must agree to the amount of whiteboard paint they will purchase for the whole school year. Requirements. Inventory costing • Inventory must have associated costs except for the vendor storage in Glasgow2. • Inventory must have associated costs except for the vendor storage in Glasgow2. • The vendor storage must still contain quantities but not include cost in inventory valuations. • At the end of each month, the costing manager must be able to identify how many items will not be fully settled. • Annual configuration changes to items must be automatically created where possible. • The company must be able to track costs for colored pencils and standard pencils separately. Requirements. Inventory - • Warehouse workers must be able to use their mobile phones and the mobile app to take calls and create transactions in the warehouse. • The desks must use a single item number and barcode regardless of year manufactured and the vendor. • Water-based paints from the vendor must be received in pails. • Acrylic paint must be managed by batches and expiration dates. • Pencils must be categorized as colored pencils or standard pencils. The individual colors of each colored pencil (such as red, green, and blue) will not be tracked. • The creation of unique smartboard items must be kept to a minimum. Issues - • WarehouseWorker1 works in Glasgow2. The worker receives a request to ship pallets of paper from the warehouse to Glasgow1 and Dublin1. WarehouseWorker1 must create the shipments in the system to transfer the pallets of paper from Glasgow1 to Dublin1. • The number of backorders for desks has increased. Customer service representatives struggle to select a desk item number that has inventory on hand. The desks are the same item, but the manufacturer vendor and year differ. • A school calls customer service to report that its photocopier is broken. The school needs expedited shipment of a replacement. • A school that is part of the special paint program reports that a sale price on canvas last month was a better price than its paint program price. The school requests a price adjustment. • A school reports that different shipments of acrylic paints are slightly different in color. • The sales team decides to have a flash sale on pens for one month only. The person entering the Sales order line should be able to communicate the information to the customer on the Sales order line. • Schools are reporting that chalk and blackboards are broken upon receipt. A worker in Dublin1 opens some cases of these products in the warehouse and finds that they are also broken. You must implement processes to enforce inventory inspection for a percentage of each purchase order line received. You must block all inventory for a purchase order line if the inspection fails. You must meet the requirement for WarehouseWorker1. Which process should you use? To answer, drag the appropriate processes to the correct locations. Each process may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 45, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage procurement operations. The company sources the majority of items from foreign vendors based in different countries/regions. Each country/region has different exporters. Exporter details for every shipment is required for compliance. You need to report shipments by exporters. What should you configure?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Shipping container" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Vessel" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Voyage" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Folio" }, { "label": "E", "text": "Purchase order" } ], "answer": "D" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 46, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. A customer placed multiple sales orders. The customer requires the orders to ship on a single truck. You need to configure the system to consolidate the multiple outbound sales orders onto a single truck for delivery. What should you configure?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Vessel" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Voyage" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Load" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Legs" } ], "answer": "C" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 47, "stem": "A company with two legal entities uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. You are creating new products and learn that CompanyA plans to use Warehouse management (WMS) but CompanyB will not. Each storage, tracking, and production dimension name and configuration must be identical in each company. You need to set up the dimensions that affect the WMS for the new products. Which two actions should you perform? Each correct answer presents a complete solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Assign a tracking group to the product and release it to both companies, changing one tracking group after release." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Leave storage group blank on the product and assign after release to both companies." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Assign storage group to the product and release to both companies, changing one after release." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Create a product master and assign configuration technology." } ], "answer": "BD" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 48, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company acquired a multinational food packaging business that has 30 facilities operating in multiple countries/regions. Packaging machines must be systematically registered and tracked across all facilities. You need to create the packing machine assets to meet the tracking requirements. What should you create?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "functional location type" }, { "label": "B", "text": "functional location lifecycle state" }, { "label": "C", "text": "functional location" }, { "label": "D", "text": "functional location lifecycle model" } ], "answer": "C" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 49, "stem": "A company is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management and is exploring the various capabilities. The company has the following requirements: • Track a single inbound vessel containing multiple shipping containers • Track the path from the origin to the destination You need to determine which landed cost functionality can be used to meet the requirements. Which landed cost function should you use?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Container" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Route segments" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Journey" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Load" } ], "answer": "C" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 50, "stem": "An e-commerce retail company is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company often has scenarios where additional freight charges are incurred due to weight discrepancies and fuel surcharges but doesn't always want to review minimal variations to expected charges. The company wants to utilize the capabilities of the system for reconciling freight charges. You need to configure the system to accommodate for the freight charge discrepancies. What should you configure?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Freight bill type" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Set freight match required to ‘Yes’" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Freight bill type assignment" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Freight bill audit master" } ], "answer": "D" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 51, "stem": "HOTSPOT - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Coho Vineyard & Winery is a parent company that has two subsidiaries: Coho Vineyard and Coho Winery. Coho Vineyard is based in Medford, Oregon. The vineyard grows the grapes and then produces and bottles the wine. Coho Winery, based in Grants Pass, Oregon, distributes packaged wine to businesses and consumers. The winery sells imported cheese and olive oil in addition to the wines. Current environment. Technology landscape Current environment. Technology landscape • Coho Vineyard & Winery requires financial reporting from both Coho Vineyard and Coho Winery. The parent company consolidates financials in a third-party tool. • Coho Winery currently manages inventory and financials on spreadsheets separately from the parent company. Current environment. Inventory and warehousing • The entire warehouse is temperature controlled. A refrigerated section of the warehouse is used for items that require colder storage. • The items do not have fixed locations in the warehouse. • Coho uses smart numbering for cheese items today. The items start with F for France and U for United States such as the following: • F11234 = French cheese • U14567 = US cheese • Currently, wine does not use smart numbering. • Inventory is valued at First In, First-Out (FIFO). • Olive oil has a 12-month shelf life. • WineA is expensive and not regularly stocked in the warehouse. • WineB must be in the refrigerated section of the warehouse. • WineC is non-refrigerated wine and is the majority of inventory in the warehouse. Current environment. Vendors and procurement • Cheese is purchased from vendors in two countries: France and United States. • Non-cheese items can be purchased from vendors in other countries or regions. • Olive oil is bought and sold in full cases of six each. • When Coho Vineyard produces more wine than expected in a season, rebate programs are offered to any company whose monthly purchases exceed $5,000. Requirements. General - • The Coho Vineyard & Winery parent company, as well as Coho Vineyard, will not be considered in the implementation of Dynamics 365 Finance and Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management for Coho Winery. They plan to implement them as separate legal entities in the next five years. Requirements. Inventory and warehousing • Items must be renumbered in the new system. • Separate item numbers must be used for each imported item for use in simplified reporting by source country or region. • Advanced Warehouse Management capabilities must be enabled in the new system. • Each bottle of wine has a single item number. • The vintage of each bottle will change annually and may affect the cost of the bottle. This cost must be tracked by year. • Some bottles of wine require refrigeration. The system must automatically define where items must be stored in the warehouse. • Wine must be grouped in a hierarchy such as the following: • Red • Cabernet • Merlot • White • Chardonnay • Pinot • Inventory value must be stored at each month end. • Each month, the olive oil on-hand inventory is evaluated. Anything with less than six months left on the shelf life is sold to a discount retail store. If less than 90 days remains for the shelf life, then the olive oil is donated or destroyed. • At least 20 cases of olive oil and no more than 50 cases are on hand and not reserved for upcoming customer orders. • WineB must be refrigerated. Requirements. Vendors and procurement • The cheese smart numbering system will not be used in the future. Instead, the system must use standard configurations to ensure the correct cheese items are used for the correct country or region when ordering. • Olive oil must be managed in full cases only, although the inventory cost must be calculated as cages. • Should any bottle of olive oil be broken within a case, the cases will be sold at a discounted price. • Vendor rebates must be calculated and submitted for a claim. • Rebate programs are passed on to the retailers selling Coho Winery wines. The rebates must be claimed from Coho Vineyard. • Purchase orders (POs) must be maintained online with tracked changes between the vendors and the buyers. • The controller decides WineA must not be held in financial inventory on the Coho Winery books. The winery makes an agreement with the vendor that WineA will be owned by the vendor until a later date. • Vendor1 sends bulk shipments. Coho Winery does not always have enough warehouse staff to receive inventory. The company requires Vendor1 to send advanced shipping notices (ASNs). • The operations coordinator must schedule inbound loads. The company requires automation of inbound load creation where possible. Issues - • The warehouse is at maximum capacity. Empty bin locations are not always available. • The warehouse manager wants to establish fast moving locations for WineB on the floor and refill locations from higher rack storage. • Coho Winery recently conducted an internal audit risk assessment. The risk assessment found that inventory value reports were stored in spreadsheets. The spreadsheets can easily be edited and lack controls. • After olive oil is counted, multiple cases are destroyed due to shelf life. The inventory planner must determine if a new PO should be placed for olive oil. • The vendor rebates claims are often rejected because the claims were miscalculated by not including discounts. • The purchasing manager receives multiple complaints regarding POs: • Issue 1: PO changes are not accepted and confirmed, resulting in out-of-stock issues. • Issue 2: Vendors do not have control on responses to POs. Instead, the vendors rely on emails. You need to configure the requirements for the operations coordinator and the inbound load for Vendor1. What should you configure for each requirement? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 52, "stem": "HOTSPOT - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Coho Vineyard & Winery is a parent company that has two subsidiaries: Coho Vineyard and Coho Winery. Coho Vineyard is based in Medford, Oregon. The vineyard grows the grapes and then produces and bottles the wine. Coho Winery, based in Grants Pass, Oregon, distributes packaged wine to businesses and consumers. The winery sells imported cheese and olive oil in addition to the wines. Current environment. Technology landscape Current environment. Technology landscape • Coho Vineyard & Winery requires financial reporting from both Coho Vineyard and Coho Winery. The parent company consolidates financials in a third-party tool. • Coho Winery currently manages inventory and financials on spreadsheets separately from the parent company. Current environment. Inventory and warehousing • The entire warehouse is temperature controlled. A refrigerated section of the warehouse is used for items that require colder storage. • The items do not have fixed locations in the warehouse. • Coho uses smart numbering for cheese items today. The items start with F for France and U for United States such as the following: • F11234 = French cheese • U14567 = US cheese • Currently, wine does not use smart numbering. • Inventory is valued at First In, First-Out (FIFO). • Olive oil has a 12-month shelf life. • WineA is expensive and not regularly stocked in the warehouse. • WineB must be in the refrigerated section of the warehouse. • WineC is non-refrigerated wine and is the majority of inventory in the warehouse. Current environment. Vendors and procurement • Cheese is purchased from vendors in two countries: France and United States. • Non-cheese items can be purchased from vendors in other countries or regions. • Olive oil is bought and sold in full cases of six each. • When Coho Vineyard produces more wine than expected in a season, rebate programs are offered to any company whose monthly purchases exceed $5,000. Requirements. General - • The Coho Vineyard & Winery parent company, as well as Coho Vineyard, will not be considered in the implementation of Dynamics 365 Finance and Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management for Coho Winery. They plan to implement them as separate legal entities in the next five years. Requirements. Inventory and warehousing • Items must be renumbered in the new system. • Separate item numbers must be used for each imported item for use in simplified reporting by source country or region. • Advanced Warehouse Management capabilities must be enabled in the new system. • Each bottle of wine has a single item number. • The vintage of each bottle will change annually and may affect the cost of the bottle. This cost must be tracked by year. • Some bottles of wine require refrigeration. The system must automatically define where items must be stored in the warehouse. • Wine must be grouped in a hierarchy such as the following: • Red • Cabernet • Merlot • White • Chardonnay • Pinot • Inventory value must be stored at each month end. • Each month, the olive oil on-hand inventory is evaluated. Anything with less than six months left on the shelf life is sold to a discount retail store. If less than 90 days remains for the shelf life, then the olive oil is donated or destroyed. • At least 20 cases of olive oil and no more than 50 cases are on hand and not reserved for upcoming customer orders. • WineB must be refrigerated. Requirements. Vendors and procurement • The cheese smart numbering system will not be used in the future. Instead, the system must use standard configurations to ensure the correct cheese items are used for the correct country or region when ordering. • Olive oil must be managed in full cases only, although the inventory cost must be calculated as cages. • Should any bottle of olive oil be broken within a case, the cases will be sold at a discounted price. • Vendor rebates must be calculated and submitted for a claim. • Rebate programs are passed on to the retailers selling Coho Winery wines. The rebates must be claimed from Coho Vineyard. • Purchase orders (POs) must be maintained online with tracked changes between the vendors and the buyers. • The controller decides WineA must not be held in financial inventory on the Coho Winery books. The winery makes an agreement with the vendor that WineA will be owned by the vendor until a later date. • Vendor1 sends bulk shipments. Coho Winery does not always have enough warehouse staff to receive inventory. The company requires Vendor1 to send advanced shipping notices (ASNs). • The operations coordinator must schedule inbound loads. The company requires automation of inbound load creation where possible. Issues - • The warehouse is at maximum capacity. Empty bin locations are not always available. • The warehouse manager wants to establish fast moving locations for WineB on the floor and refill locations from higher rack storage. • Coho Winery recently conducted an internal audit risk assessment. The risk assessment found that inventory value reports were stored in spreadsheets. The spreadsheets can easily be edited and lack controls. • After olive oil is counted, multiple cases are destroyed due to shelf life. The inventory planner must determine if a new PO should be placed for olive oil. • The vendor rebates claims are often rejected because the claims were miscalculated by not including discounts. • The purchasing manager receives multiple complaints regarding POs: • Issue 1: PO changes are not accepted and confirmed, resulting in out-of-stock issues. • Issue 2: Vendors do not have control on responses to POs. Instead, the vendors rely on emails. You need to configure the WineB requirements. What should you configure for each requirement? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 53, "stem": "DRAG DROP - Case study - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm is a distribution company that supplies pickles, preserves, pickling supplies, and accessory products to local farmers’ markets as well as grocers. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm does not produce or provide canning services for any items. provide canning services for any items. Current Environment - Munson's Pickles and Preserves Farm has an accounting system that is disconnected from the warehousing system. This has caused issues with controlling and valuing inventory. With these core drivers, Munson's Pickles and Preserves Farm decides to implement Dynamics 365 Finance and Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Warehousing - • Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm has a single warehouse that serves as the distribution center for all products. • The warehouse has bulk locations as well as racking, but location names and numbers do not exist. • Bulk locations are for storage of extra inventory that will not fit into the picking locations. • The warehouse is temperature-controlled, with locations grouped into two zones: refrigerated and non-perishable. • Inventory adjustments are made regularly due to lack of inventory controls. Inventory Data - • Item numbers are inconsistent and were set up as “smart-numbering,” such as 1-23-PKL and 44-24-PICK. • Cucumbers are not grown by Munson's Pickles and Preserves Farm and may be sourced from local farmers. • Pickles come in bottle sizes of 8 oz, 16 oz, 32 oz. The bottles are packed in cases. • Pickles may be spear, chip, or whole shapes within the bottles. This does not impact the cost of the pickles when they are the same flavor. • Pickle flavors are sweet, spicy, and dill. The flavors vary in price. • Preserves come in multiple flavors, such as mango, strawberry, and grape. These are seasonal items only. Due to the varying flavors and quantities, the preserves are owned by the vendor until they are sold. The mango preserves require refrigeration. The other preserves do not require refrigeration. • Many items are sold as accessories or supplies for pickling. • Some items within inventory have an expiration date, such as vinegar. • Fast-moving items are identified by inventory turns per quarter. Sweet and spicy pickles are the most popular. Purchasing and Sales - • Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm has an online store that can be found at munsonspicklesandpreservesfarm.com. • The online store is limited to a subset of products that are accessories only, such as bottles and jars. • A new product line of kosher pickles is going to be distributed by Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm. • VendorA is the largest vendor that Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm buys products from. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm’s second largest vendor is VendorB. Requirements - Warehousing - • The warehouse manager requires fast-moving items to be easily accessible to the order pickers in AisleA, with no more than one item per bin location in AisleA. Both sweet and spicy pickles have more inventory than will fit in AisleA, resulting in bulk location storage. o Spicy pickles must have no less than half of a pallet in AisleA at any time. o Sweet pickles must have enough inventory in AisleA prior to creating waves for warehouse work. • Strawberry preserves are selling slowly this season. They are put away in higher bin locations because they are not considered fast-moving items Inventory & Data - • Item numbers must be set up to create a streamlined numbering system. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm requires that the old item number be stored in Dynamics 365 for cross reference purposes. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm has settled on 0000001 as the item format for pickles instead of 1-23-PKL. PKL will be stored as an attribute. • Item numbers for pickles must be consolidated where possible into a single item number, regardless of bottle size. • Cucumbers must be sold at actual cost because they are a special order. • Kosher pickles must be set up in the item master. The kosher pickles are the same size jars and flavors as the other pickles, except that they have a kosher designation and will be slightly more expensive. • Vinegar and other perishable items must have date tracking for the manufacturer's batch number and expiration date of the product. • A batch of mango preserves had to be thrown away because the warehouse workers put away the product into the non- perishable zone. Purchasing & Sales - • Cucumbers must be sourced from local vendors for special orders only. • Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm recently signed an exclusivity agreement with VendorA, and buyers must now only purchase from VendorA. • VendorA recently purchased a competitor company, VendorB. VendorA wants to ensure that all agreements with VendorA also apply to VendorB while they work on merging the two companies into one. • VendorC sells preserves to Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm and requires the following: o Shipment requirement: VendorC owns the product after shipment to Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm until the time of sale. o On-hand requirement: VendorC has access to view on-hand preserve inventory at Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm warehouse. Issues - • CustomerD reports that the vinegar they ordered had a week left before it expired when they received it. This did not give CustomerD enough time to use the vinegar before they had to dispose of it. CustomerD now requires that all vinegar has more than 30 days left before the expiration date. • A customer calls and states that they ordered kosher pickles and received regular pickles. Inventory Control Clerk 2 reports that kosher and non-kosher pickles of the same variety are in the same warehouse location, contributing to the picking errors. that kosher and non-kosher pickles of the same variety are in the same warehouse location, contributing to the picking errors. • A salesperson reports that the margin is incorrect on a customer’s special order because the cucumber cost was for the most recent receipt of cucumbers, not the cucumbers received for the specific customer order. • An internal audit revealed that large quantities of pickles were missing and written off as damaged on multiple occasions cover the past year. No documentation or explanation of the write offs exist. There is no documentation of disposal, and no approval from management to substantiate that the pickles were not stolen. • Jars of pickles are received as eaches. Case counts of pickle jars vary by size: o 8 oz jars are 12 per case o 16 oz jars are 6 per case o The varied counts in each case create overhead in the warehouse. • The receiving clerk in the warehouse wants to ensure that broken bottles of vinegar are moved to a damage location named LocationA. Expired vinegar should be moved to a return-to-vendor location named LocationB. All other vinegar should be put away and sold according to normal location directives. • Operator1 is picking a pallet of strawberry preserves from a location to the shipping dock. While picking up the pallet, Operator1 drops the pallet. Operator1 must make sure that the strawberry preserves are not available for shipment until the damage is evaluated. • Operator2 tries to print wave labels that contain item 0000001. The labels start to print and then jam. At the same time, the printer battery needs to be recharged and the labels need to be reprinted. You need to configure the requirements for VendorC. What should you configure? To answer, move the appropriate features to the correct requirement types. You may use each feature once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 54, "stem": "DRAG DROP - Case study - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm is a distribution company that supplies pickles, preserves, pickling supplies, and accessory products to local farmers’ markets as well as grocers. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm does not produce or provide canning services for any items. provide canning services for any items. Current Environment - Munson's Pickles and Preserves Farm has an accounting system that is disconnected from the warehousing system. This has caused issues with controlling and valuing inventory. With these core drivers, Munson's Pickles and Preserves Farm decides to implement Dynamics 365 Finance and Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Warehousing - • Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm has a single warehouse that serves as the distribution center for all products. • The warehouse has bulk locations as well as racking, but location names and numbers do not exist. • Bulk locations are for storage of extra inventory that will not fit into the picking locations. • The warehouse is temperature-controlled, with locations grouped into two zones: refrigerated and non-perishable. • Inventory adjustments are made regularly due to lack of inventory controls. Inventory Data - • Item numbers are inconsistent and were set up as “smart-numbering,” such as 1-23-PKL and 44-24-PICK. • Cucumbers are not grown by Munson's Pickles and Preserves Farm and may be sourced from local farmers. • Pickles come in bottle sizes of 8 oz, 16 oz, 32 oz. The bottles are packed in cases. • Pickles may be spear, chip, or whole shapes within the bottles. This does not impact the cost of the pickles when they are the same flavor. • Pickle flavors are sweet, spicy, and dill. The flavors vary in price. • Preserves come in multiple flavors, such as mango, strawberry, and grape. These are seasonal items only. Due to the varying flavors and quantities, the preserves are owned by the vendor until they are sold. The mango preserves require refrigeration. The other preserves do not require refrigeration. • Many items are sold as accessories or supplies for pickling. • Some items within inventory have an expiration date, such as vinegar. • Fast-moving items are identified by inventory turns per quarter. Sweet and spicy pickles are the most popular. Purchasing and Sales - • Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm has an online store that can be found at munsonspicklesandpreservesfarm.com. • The online store is limited to a subset of products that are accessories only, such as bottles and jars. • A new product line of kosher pickles is going to be distributed by Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm. • VendorA is the largest vendor that Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm buys products from. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm’s second largest vendor is VendorB. Requirements - Warehousing - • The warehouse manager requires fast-moving items to be easily accessible to the order pickers in AisleA, with no more than one item per bin location in AisleA. Both sweet and spicy pickles have more inventory than will fit in AisleA, resulting in bulk location storage. o Spicy pickles must have no less than half of a pallet in AisleA at any time. o Sweet pickles must have enough inventory in AisleA prior to creating waves for warehouse work. • Strawberry preserves are selling slowly this season. They are put away in higher bin locations because they are not considered fast-moving items Inventory & Data - • Item numbers must be set up to create a streamlined numbering system. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm requires that the old item number be stored in Dynamics 365 for cross reference purposes. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm has settled on 0000001 as the item format for pickles instead of 1-23-PKL. PKL will be stored as an attribute. • Item numbers for pickles must be consolidated where possible into a single item number, regardless of bottle size. • Cucumbers must be sold at actual cost because they are a special order. • Kosher pickles must be set up in the item master. The kosher pickles are the same size jars and flavors as the other pickles, except that they have a kosher designation and will be slightly more expensive. • Vinegar and other perishable items must have date tracking for the manufacturer's batch number and expiration date of the product. • A batch of mango preserves had to be thrown away because the warehouse workers put away the product into the non- perishable zone. Purchasing & Sales - • Cucumbers must be sourced from local vendors for special orders only. • Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm recently signed an exclusivity agreement with VendorA, and buyers must now only purchase from VendorA. • VendorA recently purchased a competitor company, VendorB. VendorA wants to ensure that all agreements with VendorA also apply to VendorB while they work on merging the two companies into one. • VendorC sells preserves to Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm and requires the following: o Shipment requirement: VendorC owns the product after shipment to Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm until the time of sale. o On-hand requirement: VendorC has access to view on-hand preserve inventory at Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm warehouse. Issues - • CustomerD reports that the vinegar they ordered had a week left before it expired when they received it. This did not give CustomerD enough time to use the vinegar before they had to dispose of it. CustomerD now requires that all vinegar has more than 30 days left before the expiration date. • A customer calls and states that they ordered kosher pickles and received regular pickles. Inventory Control Clerk 2 reports that kosher and non-kosher pickles of the same variety are in the same warehouse location, contributing to the picking errors. that kosher and non-kosher pickles of the same variety are in the same warehouse location, contributing to the picking errors. • A salesperson reports that the margin is incorrect on a customer’s special order because the cucumber cost was for the most recent receipt of cucumbers, not the cucumbers received for the specific customer order. • An internal audit revealed that large quantities of pickles were missing and written off as damaged on multiple occasions cover the past year. No documentation or explanation of the write offs exist. There is no documentation of disposal, and no approval from management to substantiate that the pickles were not stolen. • Jars of pickles are received as cases. Case counts of pickle jars vary by size: o 8 oz jars are 12 per case o 16 oz jars are 6 per case o The varied counts in each case create overhead in the warehouse. • The receiving clerk in the warehouse wants to ensure that broken bottles of vinegar are moved to a damage location named LocationA. Expired vinegar should be moved to a return-to-vendor location named LocationB. All other vinegar should be put away and sold according to normal location directives. • Operator1 is picking a pallet of strawberry preserves from a location to the shipping dock. While picking up the pallet, Operator1 drops the pallet. Operator] must make sure that the strawberry preserves are not available for shipment until the damage is evaluated. • Operator2 tries to print wave labels that contain item 0000001. The labels start to print and then jam. At the same time, the printer battery needs to be recharged and the labels need to be reprinted. You need to configure the replenishment method for AisleA. What should you configure? To answer, move the appropriate replenishment strategies to the correct items. You may use each replenishment strategy once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 55, "stem": "A company uses transportation management to manage its outbound shipments to customers. The company fulfils customer orders directly from multiple warehouses. A customer requests receipt of an order in one unified shipment. The product must be consolidated from multiple warehouses, not one shipment from each warehouse. You need to configure the component to consolidate the loads before sending them to the customer. Which component should you configure?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "workbench profiles" }, { "label": "B", "text": "cross docking" }, { "label": "C", "text": "shipping containers" }, { "label": "D", "text": "hubs" }, { "label": "E", "text": "resource grows" } ], "answer": "D" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 56, "stem": "A manufacturing company is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company plans to relocate an existing manufacturing facility to a larger facility soon. The company has the following requirements: • The existing facility must be configured to manage fixed assets. • The new facility must be preconfigured in the system and ready for the transition. The controller is concerned that people might use the preconfiguration before the transition. You need to configure the system to minimize the risk of use before the transition. What should you configure?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "release products" }, { "label": "B", "text": "set item stopped flag" }, { "label": "C", "text": "product lifecycle state" }, { "label": "D", "text": "location lifecycle state" }, { "label": "E", "text": "blocked locations" } ], "answer": "D" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 57, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company is configuring the handheld warehouse mobile device in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Several warehouse activities are documented as required configurations. The activity configurations require a menu item in the device interface. You need to create the menu items. Which menu item mode should you use for each activity? To answer, move the appropriate menu item modes to the correct activities. You may use each menu item mode once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to move the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 58, "stem": "You are the logistics manager at a distribution company. Your primary carrier service provides rates for transportation between New York City and Colorado. These rates are a flat rate depending on the city or general area of pickup as follows: • New York City = $500 • Colorado = $450 You need to set up Transportation Management to calculate the rate from New York City to Colorado. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Create a Point-to-Point based Rate Master with the rates broken out by pieces." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Using the Point-to-Point engine with an empty break master, assign rates based on starting and ending locations." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Set up zones in the Zone Master for New York City and Colorado. Assign rates to each zone in the Zone Master by starting and ending location." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Use a mileage-based rate engine to configure a rate master that calculates the rate based on the miles from New York City to Colorado." } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 59, "stem": "A warehouse picks and ships product. The warehouse completes work immediately upon automatic release to the warehouse. You need to configure waves to allow for automatic work creation. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Automate wave creation and automatically process work." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Automate wave creation and process the wave at release to warehouse." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Select the wave template and attribute to automatically process." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Automate replenishment and process the wave at release." } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 60, "stem": "A company is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company has WarehouseA and WarehouseB. Both warehouses pick, pack, and ship inventory. Forklifts operate throughout the day. The technicians who service the forklifts are located at WarehouseA. WarehouseB has a forklift that shuts down intermittently. WarehouseB requires a temporary forklift while the repairs to the forklift are completed. You need to configure the system for the repairs and temporary forklift. What should you configure?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "inventory movement" }, { "label": "B", "text": "maintenance request" }, { "label": "C", "text": "transfer journal" }, { "label": "D", "text": "transfer order" } ], "answer": "D" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 61, "stem": "A company is configuring Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management for its transportation management requirements. When the company ships a container through a specific route, specific equipment with minimum and maximum weights must be used. You need to configure the equipment and limits. What should you configure?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "route guide" }, { "label": "B", "text": "route plans" }, { "label": "C", "text": "constraints" }, { "label": "D", "text": "hub types" }, { "label": "E", "text": "hubs" } ], "answer": "A" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 62, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management for its operations in its primary distribution center. The company is opening a second warehouse for its e-commerce operations. The second warehouse requires only half of the warehouse operations on the mobile device that the primary distribution center uses. Several workers from the primary distribution center will help open the new warehouse alongside new workers. The primary distribution center workers will still work in the existing distribution center at times but need to default their warehouse menu to the new warehouse menu when they log in. You need to configure the warehouse menus. Which configurations should you use? To answer, move the appropriate forms to the correct requirements. You may use each form once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to move the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 5, "question_num": 63, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A distribution company is implementing freight reconciliation in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The accounting manager requires that any freight invoices that cannot be automatically matched must post the difference to a specific ledger account. You need to set up the freight reconciliation. What should you configure? To answer, move the appropriate configurations to the correct requirements. You may use each configuration once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to move the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 1, "stem": "A retailer that uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management is conducting master planning runs with 300,000 items in a single planned order run on average. Optimizations are needed to improve performance. Most of the items in the master planning runs do not have dependencies on the other items. Planning multiple items together in a single group will help with performance. You need to configure the system to increase performance. Which configuration should you use?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Number of tasks in a helper bundle" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Number of threads" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Use of cache" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Time fences" }, { "label": "E", "text": "Number of orders in a firming bundle A Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/master-planning/master-planning-performance" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 2, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Sales of an item doubles during the holiday season. You plan to revise the minimum coverage proposal of the item. You need to update the item's new minimum quantity in safety stock journal lines. What are two possible ways to achieve this goal? Each correct answer presents a complete solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Update the Multiplication factor field. Calculate the minimum proposal for the inventory level." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Update the New minimum quantity value to match the value in the Calculated minimum quantity field." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Select the Service level. Calculate the minimum proposal for the inventory level." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Select the Use the calculated minimum quantity as the new minimum quantity parameter option. Calculate the minimum proposal for the inventory level." } ], "answer": "AB" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 3, "stem": "You are the planner for a distribution company. You observe an increase in planned orders for item C0001. You must track the source for these planned orders and break them out based on their demand. You are not concerned with safety stock maximums for this item. You need to ensure that the master planning batch job will create a unique planned purchase order for every new demand requirement for C0001. Which coverage code should you use?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Manual" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Period" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Min/Max" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Requirement D Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/master-planning/coverage-settings" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 4, "stem": "SIMULATION - You are a functional consultant for a company named Contoso Entertainment System USA (USMF). You need to regenerate a master plan named DynPlan for item number D0023. To complete this task, sign in to Dynamics 365 portal. See explanation below. You specify the planning method in the Master planning run dialog box. To open this dialog box, go to Master planning > Master planning > Run > Master planning, or select Run in the Master planning workspace. Regeneration - The regeneration planning method deletes existing planned orders, unless they are firmed. It generates new planned orders, based on all the requirements. Regeneration is the only planning method that is available for static plans. \u0000 Changes in supply are considered. These changes include changes in the forecast. \u0000 This method respects the Period coverage code. \u0000 This method supports product substitution functionality (PI). Select DynPlan in the Master Plan field. Select Regeneration in the Planning Method field. Enter D0023 in the Item Number field.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 5, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A manufacturing company is setting up a new warehouse. The warehouse must store a product that is currently stored in another warehouse. You need to create new item coverage for the warehouse. Which four actions should you perform in sequence? To answer, move the appropriate actions from the list of actions to the answer area and arrange them in the correct order. Select and Place:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 6, "stem": "A company operates a chain of retail coffee shops and a distribution center. Each coffee shop and the distribution center are distinct warehouses. Cups and lids are replenished from a single distribution center. You need to configure store replenishment for coffee cup lids. Which three actions should you perform? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Set the coverage plan by dimension for warehouse on the Storage dimension group." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Set the minimum item coverage to the safety stock quantity. Set the maximum to the maximum quantity of stock to reorder above the safety stock quantity." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Set the minimum item coverage to the safety stock quantity. Set the maximum item coverage to 0." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Create a coverage group assignment for the item." }, { "label": "E", "text": "Set the minimum item coverage to 0. Set the maximum item coverage to the number of lids to keep on hand." } ], "answer": "ABD" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 7, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to sell consumer electronics to retailers across North America. An inventory manager needs to view purchase orders by different periods of time for all warehouses. If there are insufficient orders for expected demand, the manager must create new purchase or transfer orders to meet the demand versus the current on-hand inventory that is already allocated for future demand. The company also needs to keep a surplus of 5 percent of inventory for unexpected demand. You need to identify a solution to meet these requirements. Which feature should you use for each requirement? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area: Reference: https://community.dynamics.com/ax/f/microsoft-dynamics-ax-forum/147370/supply-schedule-form/497235", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 8, "stem": "A company uses planning optimization in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Automatic firming is enabled. Some of the planned purchase orders are not being firmed as expected. The inventory planners therefore need to manually process planned purchase orders. You need to include the planned purchase orders in automatic firming. What are two possible configurations you can use? Each correct answer presents a complete solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Lead Time" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Automatic firming time fence (days)" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Requirements Date" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Freeze time fence on master plan AB Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/master-planning/planning-optimization/planning-optimization- auto-firming" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 9, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company is consistently short on inventory for a group of produced finished good items. This creates customer service issues. You need to ensure that production orders are automatically created when inventory is low. Which two actions should you perform? Each answer represents a partial solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Update the item maximum." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Update the item minimum." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Set Capable to Promise." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Create a safety stock journal." }, { "label": "E", "text": "Create a transfer journal." } ], "answer": "BD" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 10, "stem": "A company uses planning optimization in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. A planning optimization job is triggered by mistake from the user interface. The planning optimization job is running with incorrect runtime filters. You need to resolve the issue. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Cancel the job from the plan history." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Cancel the job from the dialog box." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Disable the environment add-in." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Cancel the planning optimization fit analysis. A Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/master-planning/planning-optimization/cancel-planning-job" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 11, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company implements Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company needs to improve the reliability of their forecasting data. You need to implement demand forecasting to meet the requirements. What should you do? To answer, drag the appropriate actions to the correct requirements. Each action may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Select and Place: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/master-planning/introduction-demand-forecasting https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/master-planning/manual-adjustments-baseline-forecast", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 12, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. You need to determine which planning engine meets each business requirement. Which planning engine should you use for each requirement? To answer, drag the appropriate planning engines to the correct requirements. Each planning engine may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Select and Place: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/learn/modules/planning-optimization/10-auto-firming https://docs.microsoft.com/en- us/dynamics365/supply-chain/master-planning/planning-optimization/planning-optimization-overview", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 13, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management with master planning. The company needs to enable planning optimization functionality to improve master planning processes. You need to advise which prerequisites the company must fulfill to enable planning optimization. What must the company do? To answer, drag the appropriate types to the correct prerequisites. Each type may be used once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Select and Place: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/master-planning/planning-optimization/get-started", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 14, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A manufacturing company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. You must update the safety stock level for raw materials. You need to calculate and process minimum coverage proposals based on data from historical transactions. Which three actions should you perform in sequence? To answer, move the appropriate actions from the list of actions to the answer area and arrange them in the correct order. Select and Place: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/production-control/tasks/use-safety-stock-journal-update- minimum-coverage", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 15, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company implements Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. You complete the prerequisites to implement the master planning optimization. You need to configure the planning optimization feature. What should you do? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/master-planning/planning-optimization/get-started", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 16, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company that has three legal entities is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. One legal entity supplies the other two legal entities as customers with inventory. Intercompany master planning must be set up and run in the least amount of time. You need to configure the system to meet the requirements. What should you configure? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area: Reference: http://d365tour.com/en/microsoft-dynamics-d365o/master-planning-d365fo/intercompany-master-planning/", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 17, "stem": "HOTSPOT - You are configuring the period templates that are used for inventory inquiries. Today's date is November 3, 2020. The period templates configuration is shown in the following graphic. You set the value for the Direction field to backward. Use the drop-down menus to select the answer choice that answers each question based on the information presented in the graphic. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 18, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A client uses master planning in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The client wants to make sure that the item coverage groups are configured properly. You need to validate the configurations. Which configurations should you validate for each scenario? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/master-planning/tasks/define-coverage-rules-items", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 19, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management for master planning in manufacturing processes. Master planning runs have increased in processing time over the past month. You need to identify the impact of configuration changes on performance from a single location. Which objects should you use? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/master-planning/tasks/monitor-master-planning-run", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 20, "stem": "You use Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage inventory. Multiple forms are currently required to make insights against inventory supply metrics for an item actionable. You need to use the supply schedule form to streamline operations. Which three objects can you use to achieve the goal? Each correct answer presents a complete solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Transfer orders" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Safety stock journals" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Scheduled Kanban" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Production orders" }, { "label": "E", "text": "Demand forecast" } ], "answer": "ACD" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 21, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management for inventory management in a single warehouse. The warehouse is experiencing vendor supply issues with several specific groups of products. The demand and supply for products needs to be viewed for the warehouse using a master planning model for different periods of time. You need to view the information in a single location. Which configuration should you use for each requirement? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 22, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A manufacturing company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. You must review the safety stock level for raw materials. You need to calculate the minimum coverage proposals based on standard deviation. Which three actions should you perform in sequence? To answer, move the appropriate actions from the list of actions to the answer area and arrange them in the correct order.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 23, "stem": "A manufacturing company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The procurement manager updates the minimum stock levels by using the safety stock journal. The manager encounters a setup error while calculating the proposal for the minimum inventory level by using the service level option. You need to identify the cause of the error. What is the cause of the error?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "The Multiplication factor value was left blank." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Safety stock journal lines were created by including the current month’s transactions." }, { "label": "C", "text": "The Use the calculated minimum quantity as the new minimum quantity option was not used." }, { "label": "D", "text": "The Lead time margin value was left blank." }, { "label": "E", "text": "The Calculate standard deviation option was not used while creating the journal lines. E" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 24, "stem": "A company uses the built-in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management master planning engine. Planned orders are automatically firming and are firmed during the current week. You need to reconfigure the system for the new Planning Optimization master planning engine. What should you change?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "firming time fence to one week" }, { "label": "B", "text": "firming time fence to lead-time plus one week" }, { "label": "C", "text": "open orders' firming date to be the requirement date" }, { "label": "D", "text": "firming time fence to be longer than the lead time" }, { "label": "E", "text": "firming time fence to 0" } ], "answer": "A" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 25, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management master planning. The company plans to run master planning throughout the day. Planning Optimization is not configured. The company administrator reports that they are not able to configure any master planning features or enable master planning in Dynamics 365. You need to implement Planning Optimization. What should you do first?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Place the environment into maintenance mode." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Deallocate the current environment." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Enable the Planning Optimization configuration key." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Set the value of the Use Planning Optimization field to yes." }, { "label": "E", "text": "Activate the Planning Optimization license." } ], "answer": "A" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 26, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A manufacturing company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company plans to move to the new Planning Optimization functionality. Several processes are no longer operating as expected. You need to identify any missing functionality and the number of records impacted. Which tool should you use? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 27, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company plans to implement master planning. You need to configure the master planning solution to perform master planning runs in the middle of each day instead of at the end of each day. Which solution component should you use? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 28, "stem": "A company is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company frequently uses consigned inventory. The company wants to minimize entry time for the inventory. You must configure the default settings for consignment replenishment lines. Which three options can you configure? Each correct answer presents a complete solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Default site" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Multiple order quantity" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Stopped" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Standard order quantity" }, { "label": "E", "text": "Default warehouse ADE" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 29, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company wants to configure the quality orders and nonconformances for the following tasks: • Recording timesheets associated with repair costs • Documenting outcomes of test results • Creating a certificate of analysis You need to configure the features for these tasks. What should you configure? To answer, drag the appropriate features to the correct tasks. Each feature may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 30, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company implements master planning. The company reports delays in the supply chain that have resulted in late deliveries for products. You must simulate several broad delays across all products in the supply chain when calculating lead times. Daily planning for items must not be impacted. You need to configure the system. What should you configure?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Planned orders" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Receipt margins" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Master plans" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Coverage groups" }, { "label": "E", "text": "Released products E" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 31, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company classifies and tracks products based on how useful they are for achieving their business goals. Certain product classifications are important in relation to inventory controls and margins. Other classifications have a small profit margin and are less important for inventory variances. The classification configuration must feed into existing classification reports and system logic. You need to configure the products for the classifications. Where should you configure the classifications?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Unreleased product variant" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Released product variant" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Product attributes" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Unreleased product" }, { "label": "E", "text": "Released product" } ], "answer": "C" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 32, "stem": "A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company provides warehouse workers with handheld devices to perform inventory operations. Periodic inventory audits are required due to the frequent theft of some inventory items from a warehouse. Some inventory has been fully depleted. On-hand inventory quantities of other items are consistently incorrect. You need to configure the system to automatically create cycle-counting work. Which two methods can you use? Each correct answer presents a complete solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "threshold parameters" }, { "label": "B", "text": "work pool" }, { "label": "C", "text": "cycle count plan" }, { "label": "D", "text": "work policies" }, { "label": "E", "text": "inventory journals" } ], "answer": "AC" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 33, "stem": "A company implements Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company uses the demand forecasting service to generate a statistical baseline forecast for one allocation key at a time. The process takes too long to complete. You need to ensure better performance of the service. What should you configure?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Storage account name" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Storage account key" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Custom storage account" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Request response mode" } ], "answer": "D" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 34, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company implements master planning. The company identifies several supply chain issues. You need to configure safety margins for the company. Which type of safety margin should you use? To answer, drag the appropriate safety margin types to the correct issues. Each safety margin type may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 35, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company requires that historical transactional data from the current system be used to determine future inventory needs. Transactions that fall outside of a standard deviation must be excluded. You need to configure the system to meet the requirements. What should you configure? To answer, drag the appropriate configurations to the correct requirements. Each configuration may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 36, "stem": "A company uses planning optimization in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. A new item is set up for production with a bill of materials (BOM) and is included in planning optimization. You need to identify the planning output for the item. What are two parts of the output? Each answer represents a partial solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "warning" }, { "label": "B", "text": "production order" }, { "label": "C", "text": "purchase order" }, { "label": "D", "text": "action message" } ], "answer": "BD" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 37, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management for new warehouse management operations. A three-tier workflow is being implemented for planned order approval. It is anticipated that a few days will need to be added to process the new planned orders. During the yearly renegotiation of pricing, contractual lead times rather than the actual lead times are used. Vendor score card analysis shows that certain vendors are often late in their shipments from their contractual lead time dates. Shipping delays to customers are likely for the next three months while the new warehouse operations are adopted. You need to configure safety margins to account for the new system processes. Which safety margin should you use for each process? To answer, drag the appropriate safety margins to the correct processes. Each safety margin may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 38, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage procurement operations. A purchasing clerk must process a purchasing request from an offshore vendor with the landed cost. You need to explain the steps needed to perform this process. Which five actions should you perform in sequence? To answer, move the appropriate actions from the list of actions to the answer area and arrange them in the correct order.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 39, "stem": "Case study - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - School of Fine Art is a distribution company that sells school supply items to primary and secondary schools. These include items such as pens, pencils, paper, notebooks, chalk, desks, acrylic paints, blackboards, dry erase markers, and whiteboard paint. Due to increased demand for colored pencils, lead times are longer for these pencils. School of Fine Art plans to expand sales into this market. School of Fine Art plans to implement Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage the business. Current environment. Company structure School of Fine Art consists of two legal entities. Primary company - • Located in Dublin, Ireland. • Has a single named warehouse. • Is the primary distribution center for both companies. Second company - • Is located in Glasgow, Scotland. • Includes the following warehouses: Glasgow1, Glasgow2. ○ Glasgow1 is used primarily to supply items regionally. ○ Glasgow2 serves as local storage for vendor-owned inventory and bulk storage for School of Fine Art's inventory. Current environment. General processes School of Fine Art uses a combination of spreadsheets and paper forms to manage the business. • All sales, purchases, and inventory are tracked in spreadsheets that are password protected by managers. • Managers frequently share spreadsheet passwords so that other users can make edits on their behalf. Inventory quantities and values are unreliable. • The spreadsheets are often incorrectly updated, have entry errors, and broken formulas for calculations. • Purchase order receipts, picking lists, packing slips, and invoices are all handwritten on pre-printed, three-part forms. • Late summer is the company's busiest time. During this time, workers are typically on the warehouse floor or making rush deliveries to schools to meet last-minute needs. Current environment. Inventory and warehousing • School of Fine Art values inventory by using FIFO costing methods. • Inventory in the warehouses cannot be distinguished as available inventory or inventory that is sold to a customer and waiting to be picked. This creates inventory inflation during cycle counts and later shortages because warehouse workers count items that are already promised to customers and waiting to be shipped. • Glasgow2 space is fully allocated to vendors. • Due to space constraints, school orders for photocopiers are shipped from the vendor to the school. • Crayons are stored as separate item numbers depending on whether they are in a box or a case. This creates issues when counting inventory to determine the total number of crayons in stock. • Lack of inventory controls has led to shortages on sales orders, creating backorders and unhappy schools. • Inventory is ordered quarterly due to the seasonality of the business. • Items can change annually based on popular sizes, colors, and styles for each new school season. The creation of the different configurations is a manual process, which creates so much overhead that temporary workers are brought in to do the data entry. Current environment. Purchasing - • Reordering is manually managed by the buyers looking at the seasonal spikes for the start of the school year, slowing around the end-of-year holidays until the following school year. • Pens are readily available products that are rarely discounted for sale. • Photocopiers are only available for sale on the Glasgow region. • Photocopy paper and construction paper are ordered by the pallet into Dublin1 and must be broken down into smaller sizes. The pallets are typically broken down and then split between what stays in Dublin1 and what is shipped to Glasgow1. • Chalk and blackboards are slower sellers, so many vendors do not carry these items. School of Fine Art purchases these products from a single vendor. There are no alternative vendors available. • School of Fine Art agrees to purchase a new line of smartboards from a vendor. The agreed-upon smartboard purchase prices will have a cost price per 55-inch, 75-inch, or 85-inch smartboard. • The company purchases pencils for the following warehouses: ○ Glasgow1: • standard pencils from Vendor A • colored pencils from Vendor B ○ Dublin1: • standard pencils from Vendor A • colored pencils from Vendor A • As whiteboard paint grows in popularity, so does the demand. This causes supply shortages. Whiteboard paint is ordered six months in advance. Current environment. Customer sales • The company contractually agrees to prices for some items with schools prior to the start of each school year. • Schools may order bulk cases of products and choose to distribute further breakdowns, such as a case of crayons, which are then distributed to classrooms by the box. • Pens do not require contracts with schools because they are low margin and do not have supply chain shortages. • Painting supplies such as acrylic paint, canvases, and easels do not require a special contract and are sold at regular list price to all schools. • Schools that offer painting classes are part of a program that provides special pricing on the painting supplies. • Chalk and blackboards are ordered less frequently than they were in past years. Schools are choosing to use whiteboard paint, which is a lower cost than ordering and installing the whiteboards. Requirements. Customers and sales • The system must have the ability to limit product purchase amounts by a single school to prevent stock shortages for other schools. • Schools are obligated to purchase the agreed amount for specific items per the school year. • Customer service must be able to easily enter items for sales orders and identify stock shortages. • Sales of whiteboard paint must be limited so that one school does not buy all the inventory and force backorders for other schools. • Schools must agree to the amount of whiteboard paint they will purchase for the whole school year. Requirements. Inventory costing - • Inventory must have associated costs except for the vendor storage in Glasgow2. • The vendor storage must still contain quantities but not include cost in inventory valuations. • At the end of each month, the costing manager must be able to identify how many items will not be fully settled. • Annual configuration changes to items must be automatically created where possible. • The company must be able to track costs for colored pencils and standard pencils separately. Requirements. Inventory - Requirements. Inventory - • Warehouse workers must be able to use their mobile phones and the mobile app to take calls and create transactions in the warehouse. • The desks must use a single item number and barcode regardless of year manufactured and the vendor. • Water-based paints from the vendor must be received in pails. • Acrylic paint must be managed by batches and expiration dates. • Pencils must be categorized as colored pencils or standard pencils. The individual colors of each colored pencil (such as red, green, and blue) will not be tracked. • The creation of unique smartboard items must be kept to a minimum. Issues - • WarehouseWorker1 works in Glasgow2. The worker receives a request to ship pallets of paper from the warehouse to Glasgow1 and Dublin1. WarehouseWorker1 must create the shipments in the system to transfer the pallets of paper from Glasgow1 to Dublin1. • The number of backorders for desks has increased. Customer service representatives struggle to select a desk item number that has inventory on hand. The desks are the same item, but the manufacturer vendor and year differ. • A school calls customer service to report that its photocopier is broken. The school needs expedited shipment of a replacement. • A school that is part of the special paint program reports that a sale price on canvas last month was a better price than its paint program price. The school requests a price adjustment. • A school reports that different shipments of acrylic paints are slightly different in color. • The sales team decides to have a flash sale on pens for one month only. The person entering the Sales order line should be able to communicate the information to the customer on the Sales order line. • Schools are reporting that chalk and blackboards are broken upon receipt. A worker in Dublin1 opens some cases of these products in the warehouse and finds that they are also broken. You must implement processes to enforce inventory inspection for a percentage of each purchase order line received. You must block all inventory for a purchase order line if the inspection fails. You need to set up the manufacturer and year for the desks. What should you configure first?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "attribute type" }, { "label": "B", "text": "variant" }, { "label": "C", "text": "friendly name" }, { "label": "D", "text": "item type" }, { "label": "E", "text": "attribute definition" } ], "answer": "A" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 40, "stem": "HOTSPOT - Case study - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - School of Fine Art is a distribution company that sells school supply items to primary and secondary schools. These include items such as pens, pencils, paper, notebooks, chalk, desks, acrylic paints, blackboards, dry erase markers, and whiteboard items such as pens, pencils, paper, notebooks, chalk, desks, acrylic paints, blackboards, dry erase markers, and whiteboard paint. Due to increased demand for colored pencils, lead times are longer for these pencils. School of Fine Art plans to expand sales into this market. School of Fine Art plans to implement Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage the business. Current environment. Company structure School of Fine Art consists of two legal entities. Primary company - • Located in Dublin, Ireland. • Has a single named warehouse. • Is the primary distribution center for both companies. Second company - • Is located in Glasgow, Scotland. • Includes the following warehouses: Glasgow1, Glasgow2. ○ Glasgow1 is used primarily to supply items regionally. ○ Glasgow2 serves as local storage for vendor-owned inventory and bulk storage for School of Fine Art's inventory. Current environment. General processes School of Fine Art uses a combination of spreadsheets and paper forms to manage the business. • All sales, purchases, and inventory are tracked in spreadsheets that are password protected by managers. • Managers frequently share spreadsheet passwords so that other users can make edits on their behalf. Inventory quantities and values are unreliable. • The spreadsheets are often incorrectly updated, have entry errors, and broken formulas for calculations. • Purchase order receipts, picking lists, packing slips, and invoices are all handwritten on pre-printed, three-part forms. • Late summer is the company's busiest time. During this time, workers are typically on the warehouse floor or making rush deliveries to schools to meet last-minute needs. Current environment. Inventory and warehousing • School of Fine Art values inventory by using FIFO costing methods. • Inventory in the warehouses cannot be distinguished as available inventory or inventory that is sold to a customer and waiting to be picked. This creates inventory inflation during cycle counts and later shortages because warehouse workers count items that are already promised to customers and waiting to be shipped. • Glasgow2 space is fully allocated to vendors. • Due to space constraints, school orders for photocopiers are shipped from the vendor to the school. • Crayons are stored as separate item numbers depending on whether they are in a box or a case. This creates issues when counting inventory to determine the total number of crayons in stock. • Lack of inventory controls has led to shortages on sales orders, creating backorders and unhappy schools. • Inventory is ordered quarterly due to the seasonality of the business. • Items can change annually based on popular sizes, colors, and styles for each new school season. The creation of the different configurations is a manual process, which creates so much overhead that temporary workers are brought in to do the data entry. Current environment. Purchasing • Reordering is manually managed by the buyers looking at the seasonal spikes for the start of the school year, slowing around the end-of-year holidays until the following school year. • Pens are readily available products that are rarely discounted for sale. • Photocopiers are only available for sale on the Glasgow region. • Photocopy paper and construction paper are ordered by the pallet into Dublin1 and must be broken down into smaller sizes. The pallets are typically broken down and then split between what stays in Dublin1 and what is shipped to Glasgow1. • Chalk and blackboards are slower sellers, so many vendors do not carry these items. School of Fine Art purchases these products from a single vendor. There are no alternative vendors available. • School of Fine Art agrees to purchase a new line of smartboards from a vendor. The agreed-upon smartboard purchase prices will have a cost price per 55-inch, 75-inch, or 85-inch smartboard. • The company purchases pencils for the following warehouses: ○ Glasgow1: • standard pencils from Vendor A • colored pencils from Vendor B ○ Dublin1: • standard pencils from Vendor A • colored pencils from Vendor A • As whiteboard paint grows in popularity, so does the demand. This causes supply shortages. Whiteboard paint is ordered six months in advance. Current environment. Customer sales • The company contractually agrees to prices for some items with schools prior to the start of each school year. • Schools may order bulk cases of products and choose to distribute further breakdowns, such as a case of crayons, which are then distributed to classrooms by the box. • Pens do not require contracts with schools because they are low margin and do not have supply chain shortages. • Painting supplies such as acrylic paint, canvases, and easels do not require a special contract and are sold at regular list price to all schools. • Schools that offer painting classes are part of a program that provides special pricing on the painting supplies. • Chalk and blackboards are ordered less frequently than they were in past years. Schools are choosing to use whiteboard paint, which is a lower cost than ordering and installing the whiteboards. Requirements. Customers and sales • The system must have the ability to limit product purchase amounts by a single school to prevent stock shortages for other schools. • Schools are obligated to purchase the agreed amount for specific items per the school year. • Customer service must be able to easily enter items for sales orders and identify stock shortages. • Sales of whiteboard paint must be limited so that one school does not buy all the inventory and force backorders for other schools. • Schools must agree to the amount of whiteboard paint they will purchase for the whole school year. Requirements. Inventory costing • Inventory must have associated costs except for the vendor storage in Glasgow2. • Inventory must have associated costs except for the vendor storage in Glasgow2. • The vendor storage must still contain quantities but not include cost in inventory valuations. • At the end of each month, the costing manager must be able to identify how many items will not be fully settled. • Annual configuration changes to items must be automatically created where possible. • The company must be able to track costs for colored pencils and standard pencils separately. Requirements. Inventory - • Warehouse workers must be able to use their mobile phones and the mobile app to take calls and create transactions in the warehouse. • The desks must use a single item number and barcode regardless of year manufactured and the vendor. • Water-based paints from the vendor must be received in pails. • Acrylic paint must be managed by batches and expiration dates. • Pencils must be categorized as colored pencils or standard pencils. The individual colors of each colored pencil (such as red, green, and blue) will not be tracked. • The creation of unique smartboard items must be kept to a minimum. Issues - • WarehouseWorker1 works in Glasgow2. The worker receives a request to ship pallets of paper from the warehouse to Glasgow1 and Dublin1. WarehouseWorker1 must create the shipments in the system to transfer the pallets of paper from Glasgow1 to Dublin1. • The number of backorders for desks has increased. Customer service representatives struggle to select a desk item number that has inventory on hand. The desks are the same item, but the manufacturer vendor and year differ. • A school calls customer service to report that its photocopier is broken. The school needs expedited shipment of a replacement. • A school that is part of the special paint program reports that a sale price on canvas last month was a better price than its paint program price. The school requests a price adjustment. • A school reports that different shipments of acrylic paints are slightly different in color. • The sales team decides to have a flash sale on pens for one month only. The person entering the Sales order line should be able to communicate the information to the customer on the Sales order line. • Schools are reporting that chalk and blackboards are broken upon receipt. A worker in Dublin1 opens some cases of these products in the warehouse and finds that they are also broken. You must implement processes to enforce inventory inspection for a percentage of each purchase order line received. You must block all inventory for a purchase order line if the inspection fails. You must configure pen flash sale prices. What should you configure? To answer, select the appropriate option in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 41, "stem": "HOTSPOT - Case study - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - School of Fine Art is a distribution company that sells school supply items to primary and secondary schools. These include items such as pens, pencils, paper, notebooks, chalk, desks, acrylic paints, blackboards, dry erase markers, and whiteboard items such as pens, pencils, paper, notebooks, chalk, desks, acrylic paints, blackboards, dry erase markers, and whiteboard paint. Due to increased demand for colored pencils, lead times are longer for these pencils. School of Fine Art plans to expand sales into this market. School of Fine Art plans to implement Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage the business. Current environment. Company structure School of Fine Art consists of two legal entities. Primary company - • Located in Dublin, Ireland. • Has a single named warehouse. • Is the primary distribution center for both companies. Second company - • Is located in Glasgow, Scotland. • Includes the following warehouses: Glasgow1, Glasgow2. ○ Glasgow1 is used primarily to supply items regionally. ○ Glasgow2 serves as local storage for vendor-owned inventory and bulk storage for School of Fine Art's inventory. Current environment. General processes School of Fine Art uses a combination of spreadsheets and paper forms to manage the business. • All sales, purchases, and inventory are tracked in spreadsheets that are password protected by managers. • Managers frequently share spreadsheet passwords so that other users can make edits on their behalf. Inventory quantities and values are unreliable. • The spreadsheets are often incorrectly updated, have entry errors, and broken formulas for calculations. • Purchase order receipts, picking lists, packing slips, and invoices are all handwritten on pre-printed, three-part forms. • Late summer is the company's busiest time. During this time, workers are typically on the warehouse floor or making rush deliveries to schools to meet last-minute needs. Current environment. Inventory and warehousing • School of Fine Art values inventory by using FIFO costing methods. • Inventory in the warehouses cannot be distinguished as available inventory or inventory that is sold to a customer and waiting to be picked. This creates inventory inflation during cycle counts and later shortages because warehouse workers count items that are already promised to customers and waiting to be shipped. • Glasgow2 space is fully allocated to vendors. • Due to space constraints, school orders for photocopiers are shipped from the vendor to the school. • Crayons are stored as separate item numbers depending on whether they are in a box or a case. This creates issues when counting inventory to determine the total number of crayons in stock. • Lack of inventory controls has led to shortages on sales orders, creating backorders and unhappy schools. • Inventory is ordered quarterly due to the seasonality of the business. • Items can change annually based on popular sizes, colors, and styles for each new school season. The creation of the different configurations is a manual process, which creates so much overhead that temporary workers are brought in to do the data entry. Current environment. Purchasing • Reordering is manually managed by the buyers looking at the seasonal spikes for the start of the school year, slowing around the end-of-year holidays until the following school year. • Pens are readily available products that are rarely discounted for sale. • Photocopiers are only available for sale on the Glasgow region. • Photocopy paper and construction paper are ordered by the pallet into Dublin1 and must be broken down into smaller sizes. The pallets are typically broken down and then split between what stays in Dublin1 and what is shipped to Glasgow1. • Chalk and blackboards are slower sellers, so many vendors do not carry these items. School of Fine Art purchases these products from a single vendor. There are no alternative vendors available. • School of Fine Art agrees to purchase a new line of smartboards from a vendor. The agreed-upon smartboard purchase prices will have a cost price per 55-inch, 75-inch, or 85-inch smartboard. • The company purchases pencils for the following warehouses: ○ Glasgow1: • standard pencils from Vendor A • colored pencils from Vendor B ○ Dublin1: • standard pencils from Vendor A • colored pencils from Vendor A • As whiteboard paint grows in popularity, so does the demand. This causes supply shortages. Whiteboard paint is ordered six months in advance. Current environment. Customer sales • The company contractually agrees to prices for some items with schools prior to the start of each school year. • Schools may order bulk cases of products and choose to distribute further breakdowns, such as a case of crayons, which are then distributed to classrooms by the box. • Pens do not require contracts with schools because they are low margin and do not have supply chain shortages. • Painting supplies such as acrylic paint, canvases, and easels do not require a special contract and are sold at regular list price to all schools. • Schools that offer painting classes are part of a program that provides special pricing on the painting supplies. • Chalk and blackboards are ordered less frequently than they were in past years. Schools are choosing to use whiteboard paint, which is a lower cost than ordering and installing the whiteboards. Requirements. Customers and sales • The system must have the ability to limit product purchase amounts by a single school to prevent stock shortages for other schools. • Schools are obligated to purchase the agreed amount for specific items per the school year. • Customer service must be able to easily enter items for sales orders and identify stock shortages. • Sales of whiteboard paint must be limited so that one school does not buy all the inventory and force backorders for other schools. • Schools must agree to the amount of whiteboard paint they will purchase for the whole school year. Requirements. Inventory costing • Inventory must have associated costs except for the vendor storage in Glasgow2. • Inventory must have associated costs except for the vendor storage in Glasgow2. • The vendor storage must still contain quantities but not include cost in inventory valuations. • At the end of each month, the costing manager must be able to identify how many items will not be fully settled. • Annual configuration changes to items must be automatically created where possible. • The company must be able to track costs for colored pencils and standard pencils separately. Requirements. Inventory - • Warehouse workers must be able to use their mobile phones and the mobile app to take calls and create transactions in the warehouse. • The desks must use a single item number and barcode regardless of year manufactured and the vendor. • Water-based paints from the vendor must be received in pails. • Acrylic paint must be managed by batches and expiration dates. • Pencils must be categorized as colored pencils or standard pencils. The individual colors of each colored pencil (such as red, green, and blue) will not be tracked. • The creation of unique smartboard items must be kept to a minimum. Issues - • WarehouseWorker1 works in Glasgow2. The worker receives a request to ship pallets of paper from the warehouse to Glasgow1 and Dublin1. WarehouseWorker1 must create the shipments in the system to transfer the pallets of paper from Glasgow1 to Dublin1. • The number of backorders for desks has increased. Customer service representatives struggle to select a desk item number that has inventory on hand. The desks are the same item, but the manufacturer vendor and year differ. • A school calls customer service to report that its photocopier is broken. The school needs expedited shipment of a replacement. • A school that is part of the special paint program reports that a sale price on canvas last month was a better price than its paint program price. The school requests a price adjustment. • A school reports that different shipments of acrylic paints are slightly different in color. • The sales team decides to have a flash sale on pens for one month only. The person entering the Sales order line should be able to communicate the information to the customer on the Sales order line. • Schools are reporting that chalk and blackboards are broken upon receipt. A worker in Dublin1 opens some cases of these products in the warehouse and finds that they are also broken. You must implement processes to enforce inventory inspection for a percentage of each purchase order line received. You must block all inventory for a purchase order line if the inspection fails. You need to configure the vendor pricing for pencils. What should you do? To answer, select the appropriate option in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 42, "stem": "HOTSPOT - Case study - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - School of Fine Art is a distribution company that sells school supply items to primary and secondary schools. These include items such as pens, pencils, paper, notebooks, chalk, desks, acrylic paints, blackboards, dry erase markers, and whiteboard items such as pens, pencils, paper, notebooks, chalk, desks, acrylic paints, blackboards, dry erase markers, and whiteboard paint. Due to increased demand for colored pencils, lead times are longer for these pencils. School of Fine Art plans to expand sales into this market. School of Fine Art plans to implement Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage the business. Current environment. Company structure School of Fine Art consists of two legal entities. Primary company - • Located in Dublin, Ireland. • Has a single named warehouse. • Is the primary distribution center for both companies. Second company - • Is located in Glasgow, Scotland. • Includes the following warehouses: Glasgow1, Glasgow2. ○ Glasgow1 is used primarily to supply items regionally. ○ Glasgow2 serves as local storage for vendor-owned inventory and bulk storage for School of Fine Art's inventory. Current environment. General processes School of Fine Art uses a combination of spreadsheets and paper forms to manage the business. • All sales, purchases, and inventory are tracked in spreadsheets that are password protected by managers. • Managers frequently share spreadsheet passwords so that other users can make edits on their behalf. Inventory quantities and values are unreliable. • The spreadsheets are often incorrectly updated, have entry errors, and broken formulas for calculations. • Purchase order receipts, picking lists, packing slips, and invoices are all handwritten on pre-printed, three-part forms. • Late summer is the company's busiest time. During this time, workers are typically on the warehouse floor or making rush deliveries to schools to meet last-minute needs. Current environment. Inventory and warehousing • School of Fine Art values inventory by using FIFO costing methods. • Inventory in the warehouses cannot be distinguished as available inventory or inventory that is sold to a customer and waiting to be picked. This creates inventory inflation during cycle counts and later shortages because warehouse workers count items that are already promised to customers and waiting to be shipped. • Glasgow2 space is fully allocated to vendors. • Due to space constraints, school orders for photocopiers are shipped from the vendor to the school. • Crayons are stored as separate item numbers depending on whether they are in a box or a case. This creates issues when counting inventory to determine the total number of crayons in stock. • Lack of inventory controls has led to shortages on sales orders, creating backorders and unhappy schools. • Inventory is ordered quarterly due to the seasonality of the business. • Items can change annually based on popular sizes, colors, and styles for each new school season. The creation of the different configurations is a manual process, which creates so much overhead that temporary workers are brought in to do the data entry. Current environment. Purchasing • Reordering is manually managed by the buyers looking at the seasonal spikes for the start of the school year, slowing around the end-of-year holidays until the following school year. • Pens are readily available products that are rarely discounted for sale. • Photocopiers are only available for sale on the Glasgow region. • Photocopy paper and construction paper are ordered by the pallet into Dublin1 and must be broken down into smaller sizes. The pallets are typically broken down and then split between what stays in Dublin1 and what is shipped to Glasgow1. • Chalk and blackboards are slower sellers, so many vendors do not carry these items. School of Fine Art purchases these products from a single vendor. There are no alternative vendors available. • School of Fine Art agrees to purchase a new line of smartboards from a vendor. The agreed-upon smartboard purchase prices will have a cost price per 55-inch, 75-inch, or 85-inch smartboard. • The company purchases pencils for the following warehouses: ○ Glasgow1: • standard pencils from Vendor A • colored pencils from Vendor B ○ Dublin1: • standard pencils from Vendor A • colored pencils from Vendor A • As whiteboard paint grows in popularity, so does the demand. This causes supply shortages. Whiteboard paint is ordered six months in advance. Current environment. Customer sales • The company contractually agrees to prices for some items with schools prior to the start of each school year. • Schools may order bulk cases of products and choose to distribute further breakdowns, such as a case of crayons, which are then distributed to classrooms by the box. • Pens do not require contracts with schools because they are low margin and do not have supply chain shortages. • Painting supplies such as acrylic paint, canvases, and easels do not require a special contract and are sold at regular list price to all schools. • Schools that offer painting classes are part of a program that provides special pricing on the painting supplies. • Chalk and blackboards are ordered less frequently than they were in past years. Schools are choosing to use whiteboard paint, which is a lower cost than ordering and installing the whiteboards. Requirements. Customers and sales • The system must have the ability to limit product purchase amounts by a single school to prevent stock shortages for other schools. • Schools are obligated to purchase the agreed amount for specific items per the school year. • Customer service must be able to easily enter items for sales orders and identify stock shortages. • Sales of whiteboard paint must be limited so that one school does not buy all the inventory and force backorders for other schools. • Schools must agree to the amount of whiteboard paint they will purchase for the whole school year. Requirements. Inventory costing • Inventory must have associated costs except for the vendor storage in Glasgow2. • Inventory must have associated costs except for the vendor storage in Glasgow2. • The vendor storage must still contain quantities but not include cost in inventory valuations. • At the end of each month, the costing manager must be able to identify how many items will not be fully settled. • Annual configuration changes to items must be automatically created where possible. • The company must be able to track costs for colored pencils and standard pencils separately. Requirements. Inventory - • Warehouse workers must be able to use their mobile phones and the mobile app to take calls and create transactions in the warehouse. • The desks must use a single item number and barcode regardless of year manufactured and the vendor. • Water-based paints from the vendor must be received in pails. • Acrylic paint must be managed by batches and expiration dates. • Pencils must be categorized as colored pencils or standard pencils. The individual colors of each colored pencil (such as red, green, and blue) will not be tracked. • The creation of unique smartboard items must be kept to a minimum. Issues - • WarehouseWorker1 works in Glasgow2. The worker receives a request to ship pallets of paper from the warehouse to Glasgow1 and Dublin1. WarehouseWorker1 must create the shipments in the system to transfer the pallets of paper from Glasgow1 to Dublin1. • The number of backorders for desks has increased. Customer service representatives struggle to select a desk item number that has inventory on hand. The desks are the same item, but the manufacturer vendor and year differ. • A school calls customer service to report that its photocopier is broken. The school needs expedited shipment of a replacement. • A school that is part of the special paint program reports that a sale price on canvas last month was a better price than its paint program price. The school requests a price adjustment. • A school reports that different shipments of acrylic paints are slightly different in color. • The sales team decides to have a flash sale on pens for one month only. The person entering the Sales order line should be able to communicate the information to the customer on the Sales order line. • Schools are reporting that chalk and blackboards are broken upon receipt. A worker in Dublin1 opens some cases of these products in the warehouse and finds that they are also broken. You must implement processes to enforce inventory inspection for a percentage of each purchase order line received. You must block all inventory for a purchase order line if the inspection fails. You must configure the acrylic paint requirements. What should you configure? To answer, select the appropriate option in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 43, "stem": "Case study - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - School of Fine Art is a distribution company that sells school supply items to primary and secondary schools. These include items such as pens, pencils, paper, notebooks, chalk, desks, acrylic paints, blackboards, dry erase markers, and whiteboard paint. Due to increased demand for colored pencils, lead times are longer for these pencils. School of Fine Art plans to expand sales into this market. School of Fine Art plans to implement Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage the business. Current environment. Company structure School of Fine Art consists of two legal entities. Primary company - • Located in Dublin, Ireland. • Has a single named warehouse. • Is the primary distribution center for both companies. Second company - • Is located in Glasgow, Scotland. • Includes the following warehouses: Glasgow1, Glasgow2. ○ Glasgow1 is used primarily to supply items regionally. ○ Glasgow2 serves as local storage for vendor-owned inventory and bulk storage for School of Fine Art's inventory. Current environment. General processes School of Fine Art uses a combination of spreadsheets and paper forms to manage the business. • All sales, purchases, and inventory are tracked in spreadsheets that are password protected by managers. • Managers frequently share spreadsheet passwords so that other users can make edits on their behalf. Inventory quantities and values are unreliable. • The spreadsheets are often incorrectly updated, have entry errors, and broken formulas for calculations. • Purchase order receipts, picking lists, packing slips, and invoices are all handwritten on pre-printed, three-part forms. • Late summer is the company's busiest time. During this time, workers are typically on the warehouse floor or making rush deliveries to schools to meet last-minute needs. Current environment. Inventory and warehousing • School of Fine Art values inventory by using FIFO costing methods. • Inventory in the warehouses cannot be distinguished as available inventory or inventory that is sold to a customer and waiting to be picked. This creates inventory inflation during cycle counts and later shortages because warehouse workers count items that are already promised to customers and waiting to be shipped. • Glasgow2 space is fully allocated to vendors. • Due to space constraints, school orders for photocopiers are shipped from the vendor to the school. • Crayons are stored as separate item numbers depending on whether they are in a box or a case. This creates issues when counting inventory to determine the total number of crayons in stock. • Lack of inventory controls has led to shortages on sales orders, creating backorders and unhappy schools. • Inventory is ordered quarterly due to the seasonality of the business. • Items can change annually based on popular sizes, colors, and styles for each new school season. The creation of the different configurations is a manual process, which creates so much overhead that temporary workers are brought in to do the data entry. Current environment. Purchasing - • Reordering is manually managed by the buyers looking at the seasonal spikes for the start of the school year, slowing around the end-of-year holidays until the following school year. • Pens are readily available products that are rarely discounted for sale. • Photocopiers are only available for sale on the Glasgow region. • Photocopy paper and construction paper are ordered by the pallet into Dublin1 and must be broken down into smaller sizes. The pallets are typically broken down and then split between what stays in Dublin1 and what is shipped to Glasgow1. • Chalk and blackboards are slower sellers, so many vendors do not carry these items. School of Fine Art purchases these products from a single vendor. There are no alternative vendors available. • School of Fine Art agrees to purchase a new line of smartboards from a vendor. The agreed-upon smartboard purchase prices will have a cost price per 55-inch, 75-inch, or 85-inch smartboard. • The company purchases pencils for the following warehouses: ○ Glasgow1: • standard pencils from Vendor A • colored pencils from Vendor B ○ Dublin1: • standard pencils from Vendor A • colored pencils from Vendor A • As whiteboard paint grows in popularity, so does the demand. This causes supply shortages. Whiteboard paint is ordered six months in advance. Current environment. Customer sales • The company contractually agrees to prices for some items with schools prior to the start of each school year. • Schools may order bulk cases of products and choose to distribute further breakdowns, such as a case of crayons, which are then distributed to classrooms by the box. • Pens do not require contracts with schools because they are low margin and do not have supply chain shortages. • Painting supplies such as acrylic paint, canvases, and easels do not require a special contract and are sold at regular list price to all schools. • Schools that offer painting classes are part of a program that provides special pricing on the painting supplies. • Chalk and blackboards are ordered less frequently than they were in past years. Schools are choosing to use whiteboard paint, which is a lower cost than ordering and installing the whiteboards. Requirements. Customers and sales • The system must have the ability to limit product purchase amounts by a single school to prevent stock shortages for other schools. • Schools are obligated to purchase the agreed amount for specific items per the school year. • Customer service must be able to easily enter items for sales orders and identify stock shortages. • Sales of whiteboard paint must be limited so that one school does not buy all the inventory and force backorders for other schools. • Schools must agree to the amount of whiteboard paint they will purchase for the whole school year. Requirements. Inventory costing - • Inventory must have associated costs except for the vendor storage in Glasgow2. • The vendor storage must still contain quantities but not include cost in inventory valuations. • At the end of each month, the costing manager must be able to identify how many items will not be fully settled. • Annual configuration changes to items must be automatically created where possible. • The company must be able to track costs for colored pencils and standard pencils separately. Requirements. Inventory - Requirements. Inventory - • Warehouse workers must be able to use their mobile phones and the mobile app to take calls and create transactions in the warehouse. • The desks must use a single item number and barcode regardless of year manufactured and the vendor. • Water-based paints from the vendor must be received in pails. • Acrylic paint must be managed by batches and expiration dates. • Pencils must be categorized as colored pencils or standard pencils. The individual colors of each colored pencil (such as red, green, and blue) will not be tracked. • The creation of unique smartboard items must be kept to a minimum. Issues - • WarehouseWorker1 works in Glasgow2. The worker receives a request to ship pallets of paper from the warehouse to Glasgow1 and Dublin1. WarehouseWorker1 must create the shipments in the system to transfer the pallets of paper from Glasgow1 to Dublin1. • The number of backorders for desks has increased. Customer service representatives struggle to select a desk item number that has inventory on hand. The desks are the same item, but the manufacturer vendor and year differ. • A school calls customer service to report that its photocopier is broken. The school needs expedited shipment of a replacement. • A school that is part of the special paint program reports that a sale price on canvas last month was a better price than its paint program price. The school requests a price adjustment. • A school reports that different shipments of acrylic paints are slightly different in color. • The sales team decides to have a flash sale on pens for one month only. The person entering the Sales order line should be able to communicate the information to the customer on the Sales order line. • Schools are reporting that chalk and blackboards are broken upon receipt. A worker in Dublin1 opens some cases of these products in the warehouse and finds that they are also broken. You must implement processes to enforce inventory inspection for a percentage of each purchase order line received. You must block all inventory for a purchase order line if the inspection fails. You need to provide the information for the costing manager. What should you do first?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Check cost prices." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Check for open quantities." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Close and adjust cancellation." }, { "label": "D", "text": "View close settlements." } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 44, "stem": "Case study - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - School of Fine Art is a distribution company that sells school supply items to primary and secondary schools. These include items such as pens, pencils, paper, notebooks, chalk, desks, acrylic paints, blackboards, dry erase markers, and whiteboard paint. Due to increased demand for colored pencils, lead times are longer for these pencils. School of Fine Art plans to expand sales into this market. School of Fine Art plans to implement Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage the business. Current environment. Company structure School of Fine Art consists of two legal entities. Primary company - • Located in Dublin, Ireland. • Has a single named warehouse. • Is the primary distribution center for both companies. Second company - • Is located in Glasgow, Scotland. • Includes the following warehouses: Glasgow1, Glasgow2. ○ Glasgow1 is used primarily to supply items regionally. ○ Glasgow2 serves as local storage for vendor-owned inventory and bulk storage for School of Fine Art's inventory. Current environment. General processes School of Fine Art uses a combination of spreadsheets and paper forms to manage the business. • All sales, purchases, and inventory are tracked in spreadsheets that are password protected by managers. • Managers frequently share spreadsheet passwords so that other users can make edits on their behalf. Inventory quantities and values are unreliable. • The spreadsheets are often incorrectly updated, have entry errors, and broken formulas for calculations. • Purchase order receipts, picking lists, packing slips, and invoices are all handwritten on pre-printed, three-part forms. • Late summer is the company's busiest time. During this time, workers are typically on the warehouse floor or making rush deliveries to schools to meet last-minute needs. Current environment. Inventory and warehousing • School of Fine Art values inventory by using FIFO costing methods. • Inventory in the warehouses cannot be distinguished as available inventory or inventory that is sold to a customer and waiting to be picked. This creates inventory inflation during cycle counts and later shortages because warehouse workers count items that are already promised to customers and waiting to be shipped. • Glasgow2 space is fully allocated to vendors. • Due to space constraints, school orders for photocopiers are shipped from the vendor to the school. • Crayons are stored as separate item numbers depending on whether they are in a box or a case. This creates issues when counting inventory to determine the total number of crayons in stock. • Lack of inventory controls has led to shortages on sales orders, creating backorders and unhappy schools. • Inventory is ordered quarterly due to the seasonality of the business. • Items can change annually based on popular sizes, colors, and styles for each new school season. The creation of the different configurations is a manual process, which creates so much overhead that temporary workers are brought in to do the data entry. Current environment. Purchasing - • Reordering is manually managed by the buyers looking at the seasonal spikes for the start of the school year, slowing around the end-of-year holidays until the following school year. • Pens are readily available products that are rarely discounted for sale. • Photocopiers are only available for sale on the Glasgow region. • Photocopy paper and construction paper are ordered by the pallet into Dublin1 and must be broken down into smaller sizes. The pallets are typically broken down and then split between what stays in Dublin1 and what is shipped to Glasgow1. • Chalk and blackboards are slower sellers, so many vendors do not carry these items. School of Fine Art purchases these products from a single vendor. There are no alternative vendors available. • School of Fine Art agrees to purchase a new line of smartboards from a vendor. The agreed-upon smartboard purchase prices will have a cost price per 55-inch, 75-inch, or 85-inch smartboard. • The company purchases pencils for the following warehouses: ○ Glasgow1: • standard pencils from Vendor A • colored pencils from Vendor B ○ Dublin1: • standard pencils from Vendor A • colored pencils from Vendor A • As whiteboard paint grows in popularity, so does the demand. This causes supply shortages. Whiteboard paint is ordered six months in advance. Current environment. Customer sales • The company contractually agrees to prices for some items with schools prior to the start of each school year. • Schools may order bulk cases of products and choose to distribute further breakdowns, such as a case of crayons, which are then distributed to classrooms by the box. • Pens do not require contracts with schools because they are low margin and do not have supply chain shortages. • Painting supplies such as acrylic paint, canvases, and easels do not require a special contract and are sold at regular list price to all schools. • Schools that offer painting classes are part of a program that provides special pricing on the painting supplies. • Chalk and blackboards are ordered less frequently than they were in past years. Schools are choosing to use whiteboard paint, which is a lower cost than ordering and installing the whiteboards. Requirements. Customers and sales • The system must have the ability to limit product purchase amounts by a single school to prevent stock shortages for other schools. • Schools are obligated to purchase the agreed amount for specific items per the school year. • Customer service must be able to easily enter items for sales orders and identify stock shortages. • Sales of whiteboard paint must be limited so that one school does not buy all the inventory and force backorders for other schools. • Schools must agree to the amount of whiteboard paint they will purchase for the whole school year. Requirements. Inventory costing - • Inventory must have associated costs except for the vendor storage in Glasgow2. • The vendor storage must still contain quantities but not include cost in inventory valuations. • At the end of each month, the costing manager must be able to identify how many items will not be fully settled. • Annual configuration changes to items must be automatically created where possible. • The company must be able to track costs for colored pencils and standard pencils separately. Requirements. Inventory - Requirements. Inventory - • Warehouse workers must be able to use their mobile phones and the mobile app to take calls and create transactions in the warehouse. • The desks must use a single item number and barcode regardless of year manufactured and the vendor. • Water-based paints from the vendor must be received in pails. • Acrylic paint must be managed by batches and expiration dates. • Pencils must be categorized as colored pencils or standard pencils. The individual colors of each colored pencil (such as red, green, and blue) will not be tracked. • The creation of unique smartboard items must be kept to a minimum. Issues - • WarehouseWorker1 works in Glasgow2. The worker receives a request to ship pallets of paper from the warehouse to Glasgow1 and Dublin1. WarehouseWorker1 must create the shipments in the system to transfer the pallets of paper from Glasgow1 to Dublin1. • The number of backorders for desks has increased. Customer service representatives struggle to select a desk item number that has inventory on hand. The desks are the same item, but the manufacturer vendor and year differ. • A school calls customer service to report that its photocopier is broken. The school needs expedited shipment of a replacement. • A school that is part of the special paint program reports that a sale price on canvas last month was a better price than its paint program price. The school requests a price adjustment. • A school reports that different shipments of acrylic paints are slightly different in color. • The sales team decides to have a flash sale on pens for one month only. The person entering the Sales order line should be able to communicate the information to the customer on the Sales order line. • Schools are reporting that chalk and blackboards are broken upon receipt. A worker in Dublin1 opens some cases of these products in the warehouse and finds that they are also broken. You must implement processes to enforce inventory inspection for a percentage of each purchase order line received. You must block all inventory for a purchase order line if the inspection fails. You need to configure the system to identify the complaints for the chalk and blackboard items. Which two settings should you configure? Each answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Quarantine zone" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Item sampling" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Quality orders" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Inventory status" } ], "answer": "CD" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 45, "stem": "This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Coho Vineyard & Winery is a parent company that has two subsidiaries: Coho Vineyard and Coho Winery. Coho Vineyard is based in Medford, Oregon. The vineyard grows the grapes and then produces and bottles the wine. Coho Winery, based in Grants Pass, Oregon, distributes packaged wine to businesses and consumers. The winery sells imported cheese and olive oil in addition to the wines. Current environment. Technology landscape • Coho Vineyard & Winery requires financial reporting from both Coho Vineyard and Coho Winery. The parent company consolidates financials in a third-party tool. • Coho Winery currently manages inventory and financials on spreadsheets separately from the parent company. Current environment. Inventory and warehousing • The entire warehouse is temperature controlled. A refrigerated section of the warehouse is used for items that require colder storage. • The items do not have fixed locations in the warehouse. • Coho uses smart numbering for cheese items today. The items start with F for France and U for United States such as the following: • F11234 = French cheese • U14567 = US cheese • Currently, wine does not use smart numbering. • Inventory is valued at First In, First-Out (FIFO). • Olive oil has a 12-month shelf life. • WineA is expensive and not regularly stocked in the warehouse. • WineB must be in the refrigerated section of the warehouse. • WineC is non-refrigerated wine and is the majority of inventory in the warehouse. Current environment. Vendors and procurement • Cheese is purchased from vendors in two countries: France and United States. • Non-cheese items can be purchased from vendors in other countries or regions. • Olive oil is bought and sold in full cases of six each. • When Coho Vineyard produces more wine than expected in a season, rebate programs are offered to any company whose monthly purchases exceed $5,000. Requirements. General - • The Coho Vineyard & Winery parent company, as well as Coho Vineyard, will not be considered in the implementation of Dynamics 365 Finance and Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management for Coho Winery. They plan to implement them as separate legal entities in the next five years. Requirements. Inventory and warehousing • Items must be renumbered in the new system. • Separate item numbers must be used for each imported item for use in simplified reporting by source country or region. • Advanced Warehouse Management capabilities must be enabled in the new system. • Each bottle of wine has a single item number. • The vintage of each bottle will change annually and may affect the cost of the bottle. This cost must be tracked by year. • Some bottles of wine require refrigeration. The system must automatically define where items must be stored in the warehouse. • Wine must be grouped in a hierarchy such as the following: • Red • Cabernet • Merlot • White • Chardonnay • Pinot • Inventory value must be stored at each month end. • Each month, the olive oil on-hand inventory is evaluated. Anything with less than six months left on the shelf life is sold to a discount retail store. If less than 90 days remains for the shelf life, then the olive oil is donated or destroyed. • At least 20 cases of olive oil and no more than 50 cases are on hand and not reserved for upcoming customer orders. • WineB must be refrigerated. Requirements. Vendors and procurement • The cheese smart numbering system will not be used in the future. Instead, the system must use standard configurations to ensure the correct cheese items are used for the correct country or region when ordering. • Olive oil must be managed in full cases only, although the inventory cost must be calculated as cages. • Should any bottle of olive oil be broken within a case, the cases will be sold at a discounted price. • Vendor rebates must be calculated and submitted for a claim. • Rebate programs are passed on to the retailers selling Coho Winery wines. The rebates must be claimed from Coho Vineyard. • Purchase orders (POs) must be maintained online with tracked changes between the vendors and the buyers. • The controller decides WineA must not be held in financial inventory on the Coho Winery books. The winery makes an agreement with the vendor that WineA will be owned by the vendor until a later date. • Vendor1 sends bulk shipments. Coho Winery does not always have enough warehouse staff to receive inventory. The company requires Vendor1 to send advanced shipping notices (ASNs). • The operations coordinator must schedule inbound loads. The company requires automation of inbound load creation where possible. Issues - • The warehouse is at maximum capacity. Empty bin locations are not always available. • The warehouse manager wants to establish fast moving locations for WineB on the floor and refill locations from higher rack storage. • Coho Winery recently conducted an internal audit risk assessment. The risk assessment found that inventory value reports were stored in spreadsheets. The spreadsheets can easily be edited and lack controls. • After olive oil is counted, multiple cases are destroyed due to shelf life. The inventory planner must determine if a new PO should be placed for olive oil. • The vendor rebates claims are often rejected because the claims were miscalculated by not including discounts. • The purchasing manager receives multiple complaints regarding POs: • Issue 1: PO changes are not accepted and confirmed, resulting in out-of-stock issues. • Issue 2: Vendors do not have control on responses to POs. Instead, the vendors rely on emails. You need to resolve the issue noted by the inventory planner. What should you do next to solve the issue?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Run master planning." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Review planned orders." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Process the safety stock journal." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Create a PO from the sales order. C C (50%) A (50%)" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 46, "stem": "Case study - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm is a distribution company that supplies pickles, preserves, pickling supplies, and accessory products to local farmers’ markets as well as grocers. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm does not produce or provide canning services for any items. Current Environment - Munson's Pickles and Preserves Farm has an accounting system that is disconnected from the warehousing system. This has caused issues with controlling and valuing inventory. With these core drivers, Munson's Pickles and Preserves Farm decides to implement Dynamics 365 Finance and Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Exam MB-330 All Actual Questions(2025/10/23) Warehousing - • Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm has a single warehouse that serves as the distribution center for all products. • The warehouse has bulk locations as well as racking, but location names and numbers do not exist. • Bulk locations are for storage of extra inventory that will not fit into the picking locations. • The warehouse is temperature-controlled, with locations grouped into two zones: refrigerated and non-perishable. • Inventory adjustments are made regularly due to lack of inventory controls. Inventory Data - • Item numbers are inconsistent and were set up as “smart-numbering,” such as 1-23-PKL and 44-24-PICK. • Cucumbers are not grown by Munson's Pickles and Preserves Farm and may be sourced from local farmers. • Pickles come in bottle sizes of 8 oz, 16 oz, 32 oz. The bottles are packed in cases. • Pickles may be spear, chip, or whole shapes within the bottles. This does not impact the cost of the pickles when they are the same flavor. • Pickle flavors are sweet, spicy, and dill. The flavors vary in price. • Preserves come in multiple flavors, such as mango, strawberry, and grape. These are seasonal items only. Due to the varying flavors and quantities, the preserves are owned by the vendor until they are sold. The mango preserves require refrigeration. The other preserves do not require refrigeration. • Many items are sold as accessories or supplies for pickling. • Some items within inventory have an expiration date, such as vinegar. • Fast-moving items are identified by inventory turns per quarter. Sweet and spicy pickles are the most popular. Purchasing and Sales - • Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm has an online store that can be found at munsonspicklesandpreservesfarm.com. • The online store is limited to a subset of products that are accessories only, such as bottles and jars. • A new product line of kosher pickles is going to be distributed by Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm. • VendorA is the largest vendor that Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm buys products from. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm’s second largest vendor is VendorB. Requirements - Warehousing - • The warehouse manager requires fast-moving items to be easily accessible to the order pickers in AisleA, with no more than one item per bin location in AisleA. Both sweet and spicy pickles have more inventory than will fit in AisleA, resulting in bulk location storage. o Spicy pickles must have no less than half of a pallet in AisleA at any time. o Sweet pickles must have enough inventory in AisleA prior to creating waves for warehouse work. • Strawberry preserves are selling slowly this season. They are put away in higher bin locations because they are not considered fast-moving items Inventory & Data - • Item numbers must be set up to create a streamlined numbering system. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm requires that the old item number be stored in Dynamics 365 for cross reference purposes. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm has settled on 0000001 as the item format for pickles instead of 1-23-PKL. PKL will be stored as an attribute. • Item numbers for pickles must be consolidated where possible into a single item number, regardless of bottle size. • Cucumbers must be sold at actual cost because they are a special order. • Kosher pickles must be set up in the item master. The kosher pickles are the same size jars and flavors as the other pickles, except that they have a kosher designation and will be slightly more expensive. • Vinegar and other perishable items must have date tracking for the manufacturer's batch number and expiration date of the product. • A batch of mango preserves had to be thrown away because the warehouse workers put away the product into the non- perishable zone. Purchasing & Sales - • Cucumbers must be sourced from local vendors for special orders only. • Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm recently signed an exclusivity agreement with VendorA, and buyers must now only purchase from VendorA. • VendorA recently purchased a competitor company, VendorB. VendorA wants to ensure that all agreements with VendorA also apply to VendorB while they work on merging the two companies into one. • VendorC sells preserves to Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm and requires the following: o Shipment requirement: VendorC owns the product after shipment to Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm until the time of sale. o On-hand requirement: VendorC has access to view on-hand preserve inventory at Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm warehouse. Issues - • CustomerD reports that the vinegar they ordered had a week left before it expired when they received it. This did not give CustomerD enough time to use the vinegar before they had to dispose of it. CustomerD now requires that all vinegar has more than 30 days left before the expiration date. • A customer calls and states that they ordered kosher pickles and received regular pickles. Inventory Control Clerk 2 reports that kosher and non-kosher pickles of the same variety are in the same warehouse location, contributing to the picking errors. • A salesperson reports that the margin is incorrect on a customer’s special order because the cucumber cost was for the most recent receipt of cucumbers, not the cucumbers received for the specific customer order. • An internal audit revealed that large quantities of pickles were missing and written off as damaged on multiple occasions cover the past year. No documentation or explanation of the write offs exist. There is no documentation of disposal, and no approval from management to substantiate that the pickles were not stolen. • Jars of pickles are received as eaches. Case counts of pickle jars vary by size: o 8 oz jars are 12 per case o 16 oz jars are 6 per case o The varied counts in each case create overhead in the warehouse. • The receiving clerk in the warehouse wants to ensure that broken bottles of vinegar are moved to a damage location named LocationA. Expired vinegar should be moved to a return-to-vendor location named LocationB. All other vinegar should be put away and sold according to normal location directives. • Operator1 is picking a pallet of strawberry preserves from a location to the shipping dock. While picking up the pallet, Operator1 drops the pallet. Operator1 must make sure that the strawberry preserves are not available for shipment until the damage is evaluated. • Operator2 tries to print wave labels that contain item 0000001. The labels start to print and then jam. At the same time, the printer battery needs to be recharged and the labels need to be reprinted. You need to meet the requirements for CustomerD. Which two parameters should you configure? Each answer presents part of the solution. Which two parameters should you configure? Each answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "FIFO with include physical value" }, { "label": "B", "text": "FEFO date-controlled" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Wave templates" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Reservation hierarchy" }, { "label": "E", "text": "Sellable days BE" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 47, "stem": "HOTSPOT - Case study - This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm is a distribution company that supplies pickles, preserves, pickling supplies, and accessory products to local farmers’ markets as well as grocers. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm does not produce or provide canning services for any items. provide canning services for any items. Current Environment - Munson's Pickles and Preserves Farm has an accounting system that is disconnected from the warehousing system. This has caused issues with controlling and valuing inventory. With these core drivers, Munson's Pickles and Preserves Farm decides to implement Dynamics 365 Finance and Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. Warehousing - • Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm has a single warehouse that serves as the distribution center for all products. • The warehouse has bulk locations as well as racking, but location names and numbers do not exist. • Bulk locations are for storage of extra inventory that will not fit into the picking locations. • The warehouse is temperature-controlled, with locations grouped into two zones: refrigerated and non-perishable. • Inventory adjustments are made regularly due to lack of inventory controls. Inventory Data - • Item numbers are inconsistent and were set up as “smart-numbering,” such as 1-23-PKL and 44-24-PICK. • Cucumbers are not grown by Munson's Pickles and Preserves Farm and may be sourced from local farmers. • Pickles come in bottle sizes of 8 oz, 16 oz, 32 oz. The bottles are packed in cases. • Pickles may be spear, chip, or whole shapes within the bottles. This does not impact the cost of the pickles when they are the same flavor. • Pickle flavors are sweet, spicy, and dill. The flavors vary in price. • Preserves come in multiple flavors, such as mango, strawberry, and grape. These are seasonal items only. Due to the varying flavors and quantities, the preserves are owned by the vendor until they are sold. The mango preserves require refrigeration. The other preserves do not require refrigeration. • Many items are sold as accessories or supplies for pickling. • Some items within inventory have an expiration date, such as vinegar. • Fast-moving items are identified by inventory turns per quarter. Sweet and spicy pickles are the most popular. Purchasing and Sales - • Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm has an online store that can be found at munsonspicklesandpreservesfarm.com. • The online store is limited to a subset of products that are accessories only, such as bottles and jars. • A new product line of kosher pickles is going to be distributed by Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm. • VendorA is the largest vendor that Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm buys products from. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm’s second largest vendor is VendorB. Requirements - Warehousing - • The warehouse manager requires fast-moving items to be easily accessible to the order pickers in AisleA, with no more than one item per bin location in AisleA. Both sweet and spicy pickles have more inventory than will fit in AisleA, resulting in bulk location storage. o Spicy pickles must have no less than half of a pallet in AisleA at any time. o Sweet pickles must have enough inventory in AisleA prior to creating waves for warehouse work. • Strawberry preserves are selling slowly this season. They are put away in higher bin locations because they are not considered fast-moving items Inventory & Data - • Item numbers must be set up to create a streamlined numbering system. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm requires that the old item number be stored in Dynamics 365 for cross reference purposes. Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm has settled on 0000001 as the item format for pickles instead of 1-23-PKL. PKL will be stored as an attribute. • Item numbers for pickles must be consolidated where possible into a single item number, regardless of bottle size. • Cucumbers must be sold at actual cost because they are a special order. • Kosher pickles must be set up in the item master. The kosher pickles are the same size jars and flavors as the other pickles, except that they have a kosher designation and will be slightly more expensive. • Vinegar and other perishable items must have date tracking for the manufacturer's batch number and expiration date of the product. • A batch of mango preserves had to be thrown away because the warehouse workers put away the product into the non- perishable zone. Purchasing & Sales - • Cucumbers must be sourced from local vendors for special orders only. • Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm recently signed an exclusivity agreement with VendorA, and buyers must now only purchase from VendorA. • VendorA recently purchased a competitor company, VendorB. VendorA wants to ensure that all agreements with VendorA also apply to VendorB while they work on merging the two companies into one. • VendorC sells preserves to Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm and requires the following: o Shipment requirement: VendorC owns the product after shipment to Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm until the time of sale. o On-hand requirement: VendorC has access to view on-hand preserve inventory at Munson’s Pickles and Preserves Farm warehouse. Issues - • CustomerD reports that the vinegar they ordered had a week left before it expired when they received it. This did not give CustomerD enough time to use the vinegar before they had to dispose of it. CustomerD now requires that all vinegar has more than 30 days left before the expiration date. • A customer calls and states that they ordered kosher pickles and received regular pickles. Inventory Control Clerk 2 reports that kosher and non-kosher pickles of the same variety are in the same warehouse location, contributing to the picking errors. that kosher and non-kosher pickles of the same variety are in the same warehouse location, contributing to the picking errors. • A salesperson reports that the margin is incorrect on a customer’s special order because the cucumber cost was for the most recent receipt of cucumbers, not the cucumbers received for the specific customer order. • An internal audit revealed that large quantities of pickles were missing and written off as damaged on multiple occasions cover the past year. No documentation or explanation of the write offs exist. There is no documentation of disposal, and no approval from management to substantiate that the pickles were not stolen. • Jars of pickles are received as cases. Case counts of pickle jars vary by size: o 8 oz jars are 12 per case o 16 oz jars are 6 per case o The varied counts in each case create overhead in the warehouse. • The receiving clerk in the warehouse wants to ensure that broken bottles of vinegar are moved to a damage location named LocationA. Expired vinegar should be moved to a return-to-vendor location named LocationB. All other vinegar should be put away and sold according to normal location directives. • Operator1 is picking a pallet of strawberry preserves from a location to the shipping dock. While picking up the pallet, Operator1 drops the pallet. Operator] must make sure that the strawberry preserves are not available for shipment until the damage is evaluated. • Operator2 tries to print wave labels that contain item 0000001. The labels start to print and then jam. At the same time, the printer battery needs to be recharged and the labels need to be reprinted. You need to resolve Operator2’s label issue. Which solutions will achieve the resolution of the labels? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 48, "stem": "HOTSPOT - A company runs master planning in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company wants to move to Planning Optimization for improved performance and efficiencies. You need to configure the system to stop master planning and begin Planning Optimization. What should you do? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 49, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. A group of machines requires monthly maintenance that includes the replacement of spare parts such as belts and oil. A subset of the machines also has existing maintenance requests. The service manager is concerned that an insufficient number of technicians and parts are available to complete the requests. The company must determine the following: • The impact of upcoming work orders prior to scheduling. • The spare parts required for existing maintenance orders. You need to determine the required forecasting. Which forecasting component should you configure for each requirement? To answer, drag the appropriate forecasting components to the correct requirements. Each forecasting component may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 50, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. A planner observes that an item has last-minute orders placed. These orders drive new demand that is dependent upon POs arriving on schedule. The planner determines the vendor is inconsistent with turnaround time. You need to configure the system to adjust for the vendor turnaround and add a buffer of two days prior to reordering product. What should you configure for each requirement? To answer, move the appropriate configurations to the correct requirements. You may use each configuration once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to move the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 51, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company is implementing Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The company has two buying groups: one for domestic items and the other for imported items, the imported items have a long lead time for purchasing and processing once they are received at the port of entry. Most domestic items have a short lead time. A specialty domestic item has an increased lead time. Planners must update configurations to maintain the exceptions because there are thousands of items. You need to configure the coverage groups for the least amount of system maintenance. What should you configure? To answer, move the appropriate coverage groups to the correct requirements. You may use each coverage group once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to move the split bar between panes or scroll to view content.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 52, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The sales team reports that sales orders were not delivered on schedule, but inventory is on-hand. A planner identifies two scenarios: • Sales Order 1 was placed at the last minute, and existing inventory was pegged to another sales order with a later delivery date. • Sales Order 2 had inventory pegged to a late purchase order (PO). The PO triggered an action item to cancel and reorder. You need to configure the system to account for the scenarios when running future master plans. Which configuration should you recommend to the planner? To answer, move the appropriate configurations to the correct requirements. You may use each configuration once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to move the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 6, "question_num": 53, "stem": "DRAG DROP - A distribution company uses Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management, The materials manager reports that purchase orders for a group of items are often placed too late to full sales orders because of long lead times. To avoid creating additional work for the team, the manager requires mass update of master planning settings to items as needed. You need to configure master planning to meet the requirements. What should you configure? To answer, move the appropriate configurations to the correct requirements. You may use each configuration once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to move the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 7, "question_num": 1, "stem": "Introductory Info This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Wide World Importers is a distribution company whose primary customers are small boutique shops which sell globally-sourced products including unique or hand-crafted items such as perfumes and ceramicware. Through the Wide World Importers sales cycle, the commission-based sales team identifies opportunities and negotiates with shops by using a quoting process. The products may or may not already exist in the company's current product list. The company has the following divisions and areas of responsibility: Current environment - Wide World Importers use Dynamics 365 Finance and Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. There is a single legal entity. The primary distribution center for the company is located in Las Vegas, Nevada, USA. There is an additional warehouse in California which receives imported goods from container ships. When goods are received in California, the goods are transferred to Nevada for distribution. No orders are shipped directly from California. Requirements. Sales - The company has two teams of sales representatives: East and West. Each team has one representative for each of the following categories of goods: perfumes, ceramicware, and all other goods. Sales representatives are paid commissions based on sales. Commissions must be paid based on the home office location for customers. For example, commission for a customer that is headquartered in the Western United States is paid to the West group of sales representatives. Sales representatives are responsible for driving new business. Company executives must be able to see metrics that define the companies that the sales representatives is targeting, where there is potential to do business, and where quotes are being generated. Customer records must not be created until a sale is confirmed. The sales team quoted a new perfume for a customer named Customer1. The customer has shipping locations in the following regions: United States, Austria, and Japan. Sales must only be made to the US and Japan due to product ingredients. Automated checks must be put into place so that users do not have to remember to select the correct item. Requirements. Testing - The company periodically performs testing on ceramicware as it is received to determine whether the products contain lead. The company labels and markets ceramicware as Lead Free or Not for food use. Perfumes may contain restricted ingredients that cannot be sold to customers in the European Union. The company performs testing on perfumes and has processes to ensure that perfumes containing restricted ingredients are not sold to customers in Europe. Ten percent of all ceramicware items received must be tested for lead. The process for managing testing must be automated. There must be tolerances setup that define the acceptable amount of lead levels in a product. Requirements. Inventory management The inventory team must control costing of items by using FIFO principles. The finance team must be able to see updated FIFO adjustments throughout the month but will only settle FIFO for month-end reporting. Inventory close must be run at the end of each month. A report must be provided to the finance team that includes the physical quantities and inventory value for items, with totals at the bottom. The warehouse team needs a similar report but does not want the inventory value included. During inventory close, some items cannot be fully costed because the issue cannot be settled against the receipt. The finance team must know which items were excluded. Other inventory requirements - Inventory must be reserved against physical inventory. Items must be grouped so that the inventory costing can be posted to the ledger by using the following groups: perfumes, ceramicware, other goods. All goods are FIFO. Financial reports must be grouped by these three categories, even though transactions from all categories post to the same ledger accounts. Wide World Importers plans to import a specific type of pottery from a local company in Mexico that makes the goods. The pottery must be available in orange or red colors. The cost is the same regardless of the color selection. A new line of perfumes is being introduced. The procurement team must be able to identify which perfumes are men's or women's fragrances, and must be able to further categorize perfumes as Perfume, Eau de Perfume, Eau de Toilette, Eau de Cologne, or Eau Fraiche. You must set up a structure of products for classifying each item for purchase, sales, and reporting analysis. Issue - Customer service representatives report that some inventory shows as ordered reserved when the ordered reserved parameter is turned off. An item that typically carried is out of stock. A customer named Customer2 wants to place a special rush order for the item. This will result in a significantly increased cost from the supplier. The finance team does not want to have this special order affect the FIFO tiers. Question You need to configure the system to support the inventory costing requirement. Which two actions should you perform? Each answer represents a complete solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "one default item group for all items" }, { "label": "B", "text": "one item group each for perfume, ceramicware, and other goods" }, { "label": "C", "text": "one FIFO item model group and one Standard item model group" }, { "label": "D", "text": "one FIFO item group" }, { "label": "E", "text": "one financial dimension for each item group BE" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 7, "question_num": 2, "stem": "You need to configure the structure for the new line of perfumes. What should you do first?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Create a procurement category hierarchy." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Create a new product with tracking dimensions." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Create a new product with storage dimensions." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Create product configurations." }, { "label": "E", "text": "Set up a new product master and implement serial tracking." } ], "answer": "A" }, { "topic": 7, "question_num": 3, "stem": "You need to address the inventory costing requirements. What are two possible ways to achieve the goal? Each answer represents a complete solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Use FIFO with marking." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Create purchase orders from sales orders." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Set up commodity pricing." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Create a costing version." }, { "label": "E", "text": "Set up a costing sheet." } ], "answer": "AB" }, { "topic": 7, "question_num": 4, "stem": "You need to configure the system to support the pottery line. What should you do first?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Set up a new product with product configuration." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Create a new product with tracking dimensions." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Create a new product master with pre-defined product variants." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Create a new product with storage dimensions. C Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/pim/tasks/create-predefined-product-variants" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 8, "question_num": 1, "stem": "Introductory Info This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Best for You Organics Company started as a home - based business. The founders began making handmade soaps and bath products in their kitchen. As sales increased, the business established a production facility and distribution center that supplies three retail stores. Soaps and bath products are manufactured in the production facility and are stocked in the warehouse for distribution to the retail stores. Employees at retail stores use mobile point of sale (MPOS) tablet devices to sell the products to customers. The company structure is a single legal entity with two sites as shown in the diagram below:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 9, "question_num": 1, "stem": "Introductory Info This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Adventure Works Cycles is high-end bicycle manufacturer in North America. The company sells 40 standard models as well as 100 limited - edition models per year to boutique retailers domestically. Adventure Works has had the most success with the limited - edition bicycles. These bicycles have high margins, high demand, and a strong following with the younger generation biking community. Current environment - Technology - During a recent global pandemic, the sales of bicycles increased enormously. To support this growth, Adventure Works is going to invest in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to standardize and streamline operations. Operations are currently managed with a custom enterprise resource planning (ERP) system and Microsoft Excel worksheets that address ERP product gaps. Many processes are still maintained in Excel worksheets and then loaded into the ERP application. Adventure Works wants to implement only those Dynamics 365 features that are areas of future investment for Microsoft, even if it means they implement fewer features.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 10, "question_num": 1, "stem": "Introductory Info This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Best for You Organics Company started as a home - based business. The founders began making handmade soaps and bath products in their kitchen. As sales increased, the business established a production facility and distribution center that supplies three retail stores. Soaps and bath products are manufactured in the production facility and are stocked in the warehouse for distribution to the retail stores. Employees at retail stores use mobile point of sale (MPOS) tablet devices to sell the products to customers. The company structure is a single legal entity with two sites as shown in the diagram below: Current environment - Best for You Organics plans to introduce a new product line of face creams. Each product in the new line uses the same base ingredients but includes a different extract (for example, lime, avocado, kiwi). The marketing department is preparing to introduce the new product line. Minimal inventory will be held in the warehouse. The company uses a cloud-based deployment of Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage finances for all company operations and locations. The company does not use Bill of Materials (BOM) versioning. The production and warehouse facility is set up with the following organizational hierarchy: External customers include: CustomerA: a walk-in store customer (business-to-consumer) CustomerB: a customer with an existing account (business-to-business) External vendors include: VendorA: a trucking company VendorB: a raw materials supplier Requirements. General - The new product line must be set up in the system and readily available for sale when the company introduces the product line to the public at an upcoming trade show. Requirements. Production - You must configure the system to produce the new products: Ensure that the warehouse stocks the minimum quantities of raw materials to produce the products. Use a single version per item. Implement FIFO inventory valuation methods. Track raw and finished goods using different General ledger accounts. Use a primary location to determine where to stock product in the warehouse. Configure alternate locations in the warehouse to hold overstock products and refill the primary location as-needed. Requirements. Shipments - You identify the following requirements related to shipping: Ship product to retail stores weekly. Stores require a packing slip to check in merchandise. Drivers require transport documentation and charge per mile to the stores. Shipments to Store1 must be scheduled for Monday, Wednesday, or Friday. Store1 will sometimes pick up their own deliveries when an order is small because they have their own van. Shipments to Store2 and Store3 must be scheduled for Tuesday or Thursday. You must transmit Advance Shipping Notifications (ASN's) to the stores prior to deliveries. You must transmit Advance Shipping Notifications (ASN's) to the stores prior to deliveries. Set up the system configuration to allow for store transfers. Set up the system so that products may be shipped to the retail stores as bulk orders. Set up the transport providers to deliver products from the warehouse to the retails stores. Requirements. Reporting - Once the new products are available in stores, review 30 days of historical sales data from day-to-day transactions will determine the reorder quantities. Set up reporting to allow the product line to be costed and tracked independent of other items. Requirements. Pricing and inventory You identify the following requirements related to pricing and inventory: Determine the quantity of the new products that can be produced and ready for sale within the first 90 days. Ensure that specialty packaging is on hand for retail sales. The packaging must be shipped directly to the stores from the vendor. Stores must not inventory the packaging materials. Stores must maintain a 30-day supply of specialty packaging materials. Stores must reorder packaging materials as needed. Retail store customers must pay full retail price. Resellers must receive a 10 percent discount off the list price. Question You need to complete the shipments. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Confirm the load and generate packing slips and bills of lading." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Confirm shipments, generate shipping documents, and send an ASN." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Confirm shipments and generate pick/put work." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Confirm the load, generate picking lists, and send an ASN. B Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamicsax-2012/appuser-itpro/confirm-a-load-for-shipping" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 10, "question_num": 2, "stem": "HOTSPOT - You need to consolidate orders and prepare to rate shop shipments. How should you complete the setup? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 10, "question_num": 3, "stem": "HOTSPOT - You need to create new location directives. Which values should you use? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamicsax-2012/appuser-itpro/create-a-location-directive https://docs.microsoft.com/en- us/dynamics365/supply-chain/transportation/tasks/set-up-location-directive-purchase-order-put-away", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 10, "question_num": 4, "stem": "HOTSPOT - Employee3 needs to schedule deliveries. How should Employee3 plan for a carrier to deliver goods to Store2? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 10, "question_num": 5, "stem": "HOTSPOT - You need to configure transport providers for delivering products to the retail stores from Vendor1. How should you complete the configuration? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/transportation/tasks/set-up-shipping-carriers", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 10, "question_num": 6, "stem": "You need to complete the shipments.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Confirm the load and generate packing slips and bills of lading." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Create waves to generate work for shipping loads and send an ASN." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Confirm shipments and generate pick/put work." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Create work for printing shipping documents and send an ASN. B Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/warehousing/wave-processing" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 11, "question_num": 1, "stem": "Introductory Info This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Adventure Works Cycles builds stock and custom mountain bikes and is headquartered in San Diego. It has the following assembly and warehouse locations: Denver, Colorado, United States San Diego, California, United States Budapest, Hungary Most manufacturing is outsourced, with each facility only assembling the bikes. Parts are stocked at all facilities and may be transferred between warehouses or legal entities. All of the parts are at standard cost. Current environment. Organizational structure The following diagram shows the structure of Adventure Works Cycles. Each of the physical locations in the United States (US) is a warehouse. Hungary assembles and distributes products to the rest of the European Union (EU). The EU legal entity is expected to add additional warehouse locations. All legal entities roll up to a financial consolidation company.", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 12, "question_num": 1, "stem": "Introductory Info This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Best for You Organics Company started as a home - based business. The founders began making handmade soaps and bath products in their kitchen. As sales increased, the business established a production facility and distribution center that supplies three retail stores. Soaps and bath products are manufactured in the production facility and are stocked in the warehouse for distribution to the retail stores. Employees at retail stores use mobile point of sale (MPOS) tablet devices to sell the products to customers. The company structure is a single legal entity with two sites as shown in the diagram below: Current environment - Best for You Organics plans to introduce a new product line of face creams. Each product in the new line uses the same base ingredients but includes a different extract (for example, lime, avocado, kiwi). The marketing department is preparing to introduce the new product line. Minimal inventory will be held in the warehouse. The company uses a cloud-based deployment of Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage finances for all company operations and locations. The company does not use Bill of Materials (BOM) versioning. The production and warehouse facility is set up with the following organizational hierarchy: External customers include: CustomerA: a walk-in store customer (business-to-consumer) CustomerB: a customer with an existing account (business-to-business) External vendors include: VendorA: a trucking company VendorB: a raw materials supplier Requirements. General - The new product line must be set up in the system and readily available for sale when the company introduces the product line to the public at an upcoming trade show. Requirements. Production - You must configure the system to produce the new products: Ensure that the warehouse stocks the minimum quantities of raw materials to produce the products. Use a single version per item. Implement FIFO inventory valuation methods. Track raw and finished goods using different General ledger accounts. Use a primary location to determine where to stock product in the warehouse. Configure alternate locations in the warehouse to hold overstock products and refill the primary location as-needed. Requirements. Shipments - You identify the following requirements related to shipping: Ship product to retail stores weekly. Stores require a packing slip to check in merchandise. Drivers require transport documentation and charge per mile to the stores. Shipments to Store1 must be scheduled for Monday, Wednesday, or Friday. Store1 will sometimes pick up their own deliveries when an order is small because they have their own van. Shipments to Store2 and Store3 must be scheduled for Tuesday or Thursday. You must transmit Advance Shipping Notifications (ASN's) to the stores prior to deliveries. You must transmit Advance Shipping Notifications (ASN's) to the stores prior to deliveries. Set up the system configuration to allow for store transfers. Set up the system so that products may be shipped to the retail stores as bulk orders. Set up the transport providers to deliver products from the warehouse to the retails stores. Requirements. Reporting - Once the new products are available in stores, review 30 days of historical sales data from day-to-day transactions will determine the reorder quantities. Set up reporting to allow the product line to be costed and tracked independent of other items. Requirements. Pricing and inventory You identify the following requirements related to pricing and inventory: Determine the quantity of the new products that can be produced and ready for sale within the first 90 days. Ensure that specialty packaging is on hand for retail sales. The packaging must be shipped directly to the stores from the vendor. Stores must not inventory the packaging materials. Stores must maintain a 30-day supply of specialty packaging materials. Stores must reorder packaging materials as needed. Retail store customers must pay full retail price. Resellers must receive a 10 percent discount off the list price. Question HOTSPOT - You need to configure automatic warehouse inventory replenishment for items. How should you complete the setup? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 12, "question_num": 2, "stem": "You need to set up reordering for new items. Which two actions should you perform? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Create one coverage group for raw materials and one for finished goods." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Set the item coverage manual flag on the warehouse to Yes." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Create separate coverage groups for raw materials, finished goods, and retail packaging." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Set the item coverage manual flag on the warehouse to No." }, { "label": "E", "text": "Create one coverage group for retail packaging items and another for items in the warehouse. CD Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/master-planning/coverage-settings" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 13, "question_num": 1, "stem": "Introductory Info This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Adventure Works Cycles is high-end bicycle manufacturer in North America. The company sells 40 standard models as well as 100 limited - edition models per year to boutique retailers domestically. Adventure Works has had the most success with the limited - edition bicycles. These bicycles have high margins, high demand, and a strong following with the younger generation biking community. Current environment - Technology - During a recent global pandemic, the sales of bicycles increased enormously. To support this growth, Adventure Works is going to invest in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to standardize and streamline operations. Operations are currently managed with a custom enterprise resource planning (ERP) system and Microsoft Excel worksheets that address ERP product gaps. Many processes are still maintained in Excel worksheets and then loaded into the ERP application. Adventure Works wants to implement only those Dynamics 365 features that are areas of future investment for Microsoft, even if it means they implement fewer features. if it means they implement fewer features. Bicycles - Bicycle models can either be standard or made in a limited - edition release. Bicycles are built based on a single item number that can have different sizes and frame styles. The sizes are XS, S, M, L, and XL. The frame styles are Male, Female, and Unisex. The size and frame style combinations have different prices and barcodes. All other bicycle properties are informational only. Information-only properties do not have standardization or validation, which makes it easy to mistype data during product entry and difficult to identify mistakes. Some limited - edition bicycles are not properly marked as limited edition in the current product management system due to the yes/no key indicator defaulting to no. This causes significant issues with item search and reporting on the different bicycle models. Limited - edition bicycles - The most recent limited - edition models include integrated face mask holders and extra storage containers welded to the bicycle frame. The bicycles are restricted to one purchase per retailer per week. The bicycles are announced on social media and are available for sale to retailers on the same day they are announced. Customers can buy the bicycles at retailers shortly after they are announced. The bicycles are sometimes available only through charity auctions. Sales - Due to the global pandemic, it is difficult to keep products in stock. Retailers are buying as much inventory as possible each week. Retailers email their sales to Adventure Works. The sales team in charge of each retailer manually enters the information into a shared Excel worksheet. Retailers are required to submit one consolidated sales order by Wednesday every week so that the Adventure Works fulfillment team can organize and adjust sales order quantities based on availability. Retailers are invoiced every three to five weeks. Adventure Works uses a manual process for invoicing. The increased volume of purchases makes it difficult to keep up with invoicing. To accommodate the demand for the Adventure Works limited - edition bicycles, the sales team enters orders for these items for fulfillment as soon as they appear on the SKU list. Retailers can sometimes bypass Adventure Works order restriction policy. When this happens, it creates additional work for the fulfillment team. Outbound - Finished bicycles are assigned a unique code to identify and track each bicycle. Each bicycle that is picked for an outbound order is transferred to a quality control bench where it undergoes a 21 - point mechanical inspection. Bicycles that pass the mechanical inspection have their unique bicycle identification number recorded in the completed inspection list. The number is also recorded in the shipping manifest for customers to be able to verify that the bicycle that was tested is the one that they received. If a bicycle does not pass the mechanical inspection, the bicycle is moved to a quarantine location and another bicycle is picked and tested as a replacement for the order. Inventory - Replenishment is simple but manual. It is currently all handled in Excel. Every bicycle part for each standard model has a line in an Excel worksheet. Adventure Works wants each storage space in the warehouse to be filled to capacity with the current products. The team knows how many bill of materials (BOM) items can fit in the spaces without overflowing. BOM items that make up the bicycles have different storage capacities. Adventure Works uses Excel worksheets to make decisions about planned orders by period based on the supply and demand for finished bicycles. Wheels - There are four types of wheels for all the bicycle models. Customers often order a spare tire. Wheels sometimes just disappear from the warehouse storage. Adventure Works purchases wheels from only one manufacturer. Master planning - There is no formal master planning process. Replenishment activities occur weekly. Requirements - Bicycles - All BOM items used the manufacturing process must be configured as unique products in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The following manufactured bicycles’ properties must be configured in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management: * Size: XS, S, M, L, XL - * Frame style: Men, Women, Unisex - * Limited edition: [Blank], No, Yes * Year: 2010-2020 - * Manufacturer’s note: Free form text up to 250 characters * Rear suspension travel: 130 millimeters, 150 millimeters * Full suspension: No, Yes - Sales - Limited - edition bicycles must be systematically restricted to one bicycle per sales order. Overrides must not be allowed. Retailers must automatically be invoiced once a month in a consolidated invoice for all delivered sales orders. Limited - edition model bicycles must not be allowed for inclusion on sales orders until the bicycles’ official release date. Outbound - A bicycle’s unique identification number must systematically be created as part of the standardized business process. Bicycles must be pulled from a bin location in a First In, First Out (FIFO) inventory model and moved to a packing station. Inventory - Overflow of any bicycle parts in the warehouse must be prevented, except for wheels. System - generated recommendations to adjust Adventure Works’ on - hand stock of wheels based on historical trends must be provided. BOM items must be replenished before they run out. There must always be quantity available on - hand. The system must maintain all inventory requirements through automated processes. Master planning (MRP) Master planning (MRP) The tool that replaces the Excel worksheet must be able to show the supply and demand for the product family of finished bicycles and BOMs by period in a single screen. This single form screen will also be used for general supply and demand inquiry only and not require intensive processing tasks. Inquiries to this form may result in non - system decisions and not with creating any planned orders. The tool must allow for the creation of new planned production, sales, purchase, and transfer orders. The MRP solution must have the best performance possible and allow for planned orders to be run in the middle of the day. Planned orders that will not be firmed must not be changed. Adventure Works wants to be able to reference the planned orders later against any manual orders created until they feel more comfortable with the system. Once Adventure Works is comfortable with the numbers that the system recommends, Adventure Works wants to implement a mechanism to fully automate the generation of orders. Question You need to enable the automatic firming of planned orders from the master planning solution. Where do you enable the functionality?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Lifecycle Services" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Master planning parameters" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Feature management workspace" }, { "label": "D", "text": "On the released item C Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/master-planning/planning-optimization/planned-order-firming" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 13, "question_num": 2, "stem": "HOTSPOT - You need to configure the solution to replace the Excel spreadsheet. Which feature should you use for each requirement? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area: Reference: https://dynamicsunplugged.wordpress.com/2019/12/23/why-you-need-to-start-using-the-supply-schedule-in-msdyn365fo- msdyn365scm-now/", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 13, "question_num": 3, "stem": "You need to recommend a process for planned orders that will not be firmed. What should you recommend?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Change the status to Unprocessed" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Set the planned order to Completed" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Delete the planned order" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Change the status to Approved" }, { "label": "E", "text": "Remove the planned order from selection" } ], "answer": "B" }, { "topic": 13, "question_num": 4, "stem": "You need to identify all potential gaps in the master planning solution for Adventure Works' implementation. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Read the release notes and master planning entries in the Microsoft Ideas portal." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Finish relevant material requirements planning system configurations and data imports and run a fit analysis." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Identify the gaps through the known issues in Lifecycle Services." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Upload all task recordings for MRP business processes into Azure DevOps for analysis. B Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/master-planning/planning-optimization/planning-optimization- fit-analysis" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 13, "question_num": 5, "stem": "HOTSPOT - You need to implement business processes to address concerns about the wheel inventory. Which features should you use? To answer, select the appropriate option in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/master-planning/safety-stock-replenishment", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 13, "question_num": 6, "stem": "HOTSPOT - You need to configure the replenishment of the bicycle parts. Which configurations should you use? To answer, select the appropriate option in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/master-planning/planning-optimization/replenishment- methods-quantity-modification", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 13, "question_num": 7, "stem": "HOTSPOT - You need to implement the master planning solution for Adventure Works. Which solutions should you use? To answer, select the appropriate option in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 14, "question_num": 1, "stem": "Introductory Info This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Adventure Works Cycles builds stock and custom mountain bikes and is headquartered in San Diego. It has the following assembly and warehouse locations: Denver, Colorado, United States San Diego, California, United States Budapest, Hungary Most manufacturing is outsourced, with each facility only assembling the bikes. Parts are stocked at all facilities and may be transferred between warehouses or legal entities. All of the parts are at standard cost. Current environment. Organizational structure The following diagram shows the structure of Adventure Works Cycles. Each of the physical locations in the United States (US) is a warehouse. Hungary assembles and distributes products to the rest of the European Union (EU). The EU legal entity is expected to add additional warehouse locations. All legal entities roll up to a financial consolidation company. Current environment. Purchasing - Higher quality tires that are used in new orders have become popular. Due to the volume of orders, the company wants to negotiate pricing with VendorC. The vendor agrees to a discounted price for 500 tires purchased within the next six months. Once the 500 tires have been purchased, the discount will be re - evaluated based on demand. Once a purchase is approved, for audit purposes it cannot be changed. Whenever possible, parts are purchased from vendors also within the EU. A purchase order was placed for a bike seat manufacturer in Italy. Parts for custom orders may not always be kept in stock and will need to be procured. Current environment. Purchase requisitions The following flow chart depicts the purchase requisition process: Requirements. Purchasing - Items for purchase requisitions are governed by each country. Each of the country-specific products will be grouped together for selection. Purchase orders must follow the requisition process. All existing purchase orders for brakes must account for the change to VendorB. Requirements. Inventory - Standard costs are based on purchase fluctuations within a single month. Tires use floating zones due to limited warehouse space. Requirements. Operations - Due to recent brake failures, Adventure Works Cycles plans to purchase brakes from VendorB instead of VendorA. Although the brakes from Vendor B will continue to use the same item number as the brakes from VendorA, the price is slightly higher from VendorB. Adventure Works Cycles will pay list price from VendorB. The order from VendorB needs approval and the usual approver for purchase requisitions is on vacation. All brakes from VendorA that are in stock must be tested. The process for brake testing must be implemented for all inbound orders. Quality orders must be automatically created upon receipt of the first shipment against a purchase order only. Inventory stocking locations must be consolidated after the brakes are tested. UserC needs to consolidate brake inventory after it has been cleared for sale. Ordering of the new brakes order will incur an additional cost because it is a rush order. Requirements. Custom orders - Custom orders are placed for items that do not exist in the item master. Hungary does not process custom orders. The United States does process custom paint orders. Most custom paint colors are special order and require purchase requisitions. Quotes must be obtained from a minimum of two suppliers per company policy and compared for shipping, costs, and other variables. Quotes will not be selected based on lowest price only. Issues - A special order for 2.6 high-end tires is received. This item is no longer in stock from the current vendor. Goods have been received in stock, but the matching invoice has not yet been received at the time of month close. UserA needs to set up pricing for the items purchased from VendorC and ensure that accounting validates the receipt and invoice against the agreement. UserB needs to send out a request for quotation (RFQ) for custom paint. The vendor will be selected based on pricing, volume discounts, and lead time. Question HOTSPOT - Negotiations with the vendor are complete. You need to set up the new price for tires. What should you configure to meet the business requirements? To answer, select the appropriate options in the area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/procurement/purchase-agreements", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 14, "question_num": 2, "stem": "You need to set up the procurement category hierarchy in accordance with company policy. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Add four nodes to the category hierarchy, one for US, one for Hungary, one for California, and one for Colorado." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Create category hierarchy nodes per each country underneath the consolidated legal entity." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Add three nodes to the category hierarchy, one for Hungary, one for California, and one for Colorado." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Create a procurement category hierarchy and assign purchase policy per legal entity only." } ], "answer": "D" }, { "topic": 14, "question_num": 3, "stem": "HOTSPOT - You need to define the value of the brakes. What should you set up? To answer, select the appropriate options in the area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 15, "question_num": 1, "stem": "Introductory Info This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Best for You Organics Company started as a home - based business. The founders began making handmade soaps and bath products in their kitchen. As sales increased, the business established a production facility and distribution center that supplies three retail stores. Soaps and bath products are manufactured in the production facility and are stocked in the warehouse for distribution to the retail stores. Employees at retail stores use mobile point of sale (MPOS) tablet devices to sell the products to customers. The company structure is a single legal entity with two sites as shown in the diagram below: Current environment - Best for You Organics plans to introduce a new product line of face creams. Each product in the new line uses the same base ingredients but includes a different extract (for example, lime, avocado, kiwi). The marketing department is preparing to introduce the new product line. Minimal inventory will be held in the warehouse. The company uses a cloud-based deployment of Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to manage finances for all company operations and locations. The company does not use Bill of Materials (BOM) versioning. The production and warehouse facility is set up with the following organizational hierarchy: External customers include: CustomerA: a walk-in store customer (business-to-consumer) CustomerB: a customer with an existing account (business-to-business) External vendors include: VendorA: a trucking company VendorB: a raw materials supplier Requirements. General - The new product line must be set up in the system and readily available for sale when the company introduces the product line to the public at an upcoming trade show. Requirements. Production - You must configure the system to produce the new products: Ensure that the warehouse stocks the minimum quantities of raw materials to produce the products. Use a single version per item. Implement FIFO inventory valuation methods. Track raw and finished goods using different General ledger accounts. Use a primary location to determine where to stock product in the warehouse. Configure alternate locations in the warehouse to hold overstock products and refill the primary location as-needed. Requirements. Shipments - You identify the following requirements related to shipping: Ship product to retail stores weekly. Stores require a packing slip to check in merchandise. Drivers require transport documentation and charge per mile to the stores. Shipments to Store1 must be scheduled for Monday, Wednesday, or Friday. Store1 will sometimes pick up their own deliveries when an order is small because they have their own van. Shipments to Store2 and Store3 must be scheduled for Tuesday or Thursday. You must transmit Advance Shipping Notifications (ASN's) to the stores prior to deliveries. You must transmit Advance Shipping Notifications (ASN's) to the stores prior to deliveries. Set up the system configuration to allow for store transfers. Set up the system so that products may be shipped to the retail stores as bulk orders. Set up the transport providers to deliver products from the warehouse to the retails stores. Requirements. Reporting - Once the new products are available in stores, review 30 days of historical sales data from day-to-day transactions will determine the reorder quantities. Set up reporting to allow the product line to be costed and tracked independent of other items. Requirements. Pricing and inventory You identify the following requirements related to pricing and inventory: Determine the quantity of the new products that can be produced and ready for sale within the first 90 days. Ensure that specialty packaging is on hand for retail sales. The packaging must be shipped directly to the stores from the vendor. Stores must not inventory the packaging materials. Stores must maintain a 30-day supply of specialty packaging materials. Stores must reorder packaging materials as needed. Retail store customers must pay full retail price. Resellers must receive a 10 percent discount off the list price. Question You need to set up financial components for the new items. Which two actions should you perform? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Assign items to a FIFO item model group." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Assign the raw materials to a standard cost item model group. Assign finished goods to a FIFO item model group." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Create item model groups for raw materials and finished goods by using different ledger accounts. Assign items to these groups." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Assign raw materials to a standard cost item group. Assign finished goods to a FIFO item group." }, { "label": "E", "text": "Create item groups for raw materials and finished goods by using different ledger accounts. Assign items to these groups. AE" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 15, "question_num": 2, "stem": "Employee1 needs to set up the new items for the product line. Which two actions should Employee1 perform? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Create new finished goods and release to the legal entity. Raw material products are not required for these items." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Create new finished goods with predefined variants and release to the legal entity." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Create new raw materials with variants and release to the legal entity." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Create new raw materials and release to the legal entity." }, { "label": "E", "text": "Create new finished goods and release to the legal entity. DE" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 15, "question_num": 3, "stem": "Employee1 must set up the new BOM. Which three actions should Employee1 perform? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Create a new BOM for Store1, Store2, and Store3." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Activate the BOM." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Add the raw materials to the BOM and approve the BOM version." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Add the raw materials to the BOM and approve it." }, { "label": "E", "text": "Create a new BOM for Site1 only. BCE Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/production-control/bill-of-material-bom" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 16, "question_num": 1, "stem": "Introductory Info This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Adventure Works Cycles is high-end bicycle manufacturer in North America. The company sells 40 standard models as well as 100 limited - edition models per year to boutique retailers domestically. Adventure Works has had the most success with the limited - edition bicycles. These bicycles have high margins, high demand, and a strong following with the younger generation biking community. Current environment - Technology - During a recent global pandemic, the sales of bicycles increased enormously. To support this growth, Adventure Works is going to invest in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management to standardize and streamline operations. Operations are currently managed with a custom enterprise resource planning (ERP) system and Microsoft Excel worksheets that address ERP product gaps. Many processes are still maintained in Excel worksheets and then loaded into the ERP application. Adventure Works wants to implement only those Dynamics 365 features that are areas of future investment for Microsoft, even if it means they implement fewer features. if it means they implement fewer features. Bicycles - Bicycle models can either be standard or made in a limited - edition release. Bicycles are built based on a single item number that can have different sizes and frame styles. The sizes are XS, S, M, L, and XL. The frame styles are Male, Female, and Unisex. The size and frame style combinations have different prices and barcodes. All other bicycle properties are informational only. Information-only properties do not have standardization or validation, which makes it easy to mistype data during product entry and difficult to identify mistakes. Some limited - edition bicycles are not properly marked as limited edition in the current product management system due to the yes/no key indicator defaulting to no. This causes significant issues with item search and reporting on the different bicycle models. Limited - edition bicycles - The most recent limited - edition models include integrated face mask holders and extra storage containers welded to the bicycle frame. The bicycles are restricted to one purchase per retailer per week. The bicycles are announced on social media and are available for sale to retailers on the same day they are announced. Customers can buy the bicycles at retailers shortly after they are announced. The bicycles are sometimes available only through charity auctions. Sales - Due to the global pandemic, it is difficult to keep products in stock. Retailers are buying as much inventory as possible each week. Retailers email their sales to Adventure Works. The sales team in charge of each retailer manually enters the information into a shared Excel worksheet. Retailers are required to submit one consolidated sales order by Wednesday every week so that the Adventure Works fulfillment team can organize and adjust sales order quantities based on availability. Retailers are invoiced every three to five weeks. Adventure Works uses a manual process for invoicing. The increased volume of purchases makes it difficult to keep up with invoicing. To accommodate the demand for the Adventure Works limited - edition bicycles, the sales team enters orders for these items for fulfillment as soon as they appear on the SKU list. Retailers can sometimes bypass Adventure Works order restriction policy. When this happens, it creates additional work for the fulfillment team. Outbound - Finished bicycles are assigned a unique code to identify and track each bicycle. Each bicycle that is picked for an outbound order is transferred to a quality control bench where it undergoes a 21 - point mechanical inspection. Bicycles that pass the mechanical inspection have their unique bicycle identification number recorded in the completed inspection list. The number is also recorded in the shipping manifest for customers to be able to verify that the bicycle that was tested is the one that they received. If a bicycle does not pass the mechanical inspection, the bicycle is moved to a quarantine location and another bicycle is picked and tested as a replacement for the order. Inventory - Replenishment is simple but manual. It is currently all handled in Excel. Every bicycle part for each standard model has a line in an Excel worksheet. Adventure Works wants each storage space in the warehouse to be filled to capacity with the current products. The team knows how many bill of materials (BOM) items can fit in the spaces without overflowing. BOM items that make up the bicycles have different storage capacities. Adventure Works uses Excel worksheets to make decisions about planned orders by period based on the supply and demand for finished bicycles. Wheels - There are four types of wheels for all the bicycle models. Customers often order a spare tire. Wheels sometimes just disappear from the warehouse storage. Adventure Works purchases wheels from only one manufacturer. Master planning - There is no formal master planning process. Replenishment activities occur weekly. Requirements - Bicycles - All BOM items used the manufacturing process must be configured as unique products in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. The following manufactured bicycles’ properties must be configured in Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management: * Size: XS, S, M, L, XL - * Frame style: Men, Women, Unisex - * Limited edition: [Blank], No, Yes * Year: 2010-2020 - * Manufacturer’s note: Free form text up to 250 characters * Rear suspension travel: 130 millimeters, 150 millimeters * Full suspension: No, Yes - Sales - Limited - edition bicycles must be systematically restricted to one bicycle per sales order. Overrides must not be allowed. Retailers must automatically be invoiced once a month in a consolidated invoice for all delivered sales orders. Limited - edition model bicycles must not be allowed for inclusion on sales orders until the bicycles’ official release date. Outbound - A bicycle’s unique identification number must systematically be created as part of the standardized business process. Bicycles must be pulled from a bin location in a First In, First Out (FIFO) inventory model and moved to a packing station. Inventory - Overflow of any bicycle parts in the warehouse must be prevented, except for wheels. System - generated recommendations to adjust Adventure Works’ on - hand stock of wheels based on historical trends must be provided. BOM items must be replenished before they run out. There must always be quantity available on - hand. The system must maintain all inventory requirements through automated processes. Master planning (MRP) Master planning (MRP) The tool that replaces the Excel worksheet must be able to show the supply and demand for the product family of finished bicycles and BOMs by period in a single screen. This single form screen will also be used for general supply and demand inquiry only and not require intensive processing tasks. Inquiries to this form may result in non - system decisions and not with creating any planned orders. The tool must allow for the creation of new planned production, sales, purchase, and transfer orders. The MRP solution must have the best performance possible and allow for planned orders to be run in the middle of the day. Planned orders that will not be firmed must not be changed. Adventure Works wants to be able to reference the planned orders later against any manual orders created until they feel more comfortable with the system. Once Adventure Works is comfortable with the numbers that the system recommends, Adventure Works wants to implement a mechanism to fully automate the generation of orders. Question HOTSPOT - You need to configure the bike properties based on the requirements. Which configuration should you use for each requirement? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/pim/set-up-maintain-product-configuration-model", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 16, "question_num": 2, "stem": "HOTSPOT - You need to ensure that a customer can verify that a bike they purchased has passed the 21-point inspection. Which configurations should you use? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 16, "question_num": 3, "stem": "You need to configure the limited-edition bicycle to meet the requirement for the official release date. Where should you configure this?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Released product" }, { "label": "B", "text": "Sales price trade agreement" }, { "label": "C", "text": "Product lifecycle state" }, { "label": "D", "text": "Default order settings" } ], "answer": "C" }, { "topic": 16, "question_num": 4, "stem": "HOTSPOT - You need to configure a product attribute to indicate whether a product is a limited edition. Which configuration should you use for each attribute. To answer, select the appropriate option in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 17, "question_num": 1, "stem": "Introductory Info This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Best for You Organics Company started as a home - based business. The founders began making handmade soaps and bath products in their kitchen. As sales increased, the business established a production facility and distribution center that supplies three retail stores. Soaps and bath products are manufactured in the production facility and are stocked in the warehouse for distribution to the retail stores. Employees at retail stores use mobile point of sale (MPOS) tablet devices to sell the products to customers. The company structure is a single legal entity with two sites as shown in the diagram below:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 18, "question_num": 1, "stem": "Introductory Info This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Wide World Importers is a distribution company whose primary customers are small boutique shops which sell globally-sourced products including unique or hand-crafted items such as perfumes and ceramicware. Through the Wide World Importers sales cycle, the commission-based sales team identifies opportunities and negotiates with shops by using a quoting process. The products may or may not already exist in the company's current product list. The company has the following divisions and areas of responsibility: Current environment - Wide World Importers use Dynamics 365 Finance and Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. There is a single legal entity. The primary distribution center for the company is located in Las Vegas, Nevada, USA. There is an additional warehouse in California which receives imported goods from container ships. When goods are received in California, the goods are transferred to Nevada for distribution. No orders are shipped directly from California. Requirements. Sales - The company has two teams of sales representatives: East and West. Each team has one representative for each of the following categories of goods: perfumes, ceramicware, and all other goods. Sales representatives are paid commissions based on sales. Commissions must be paid based on the home office location for customers. For example, commission for a customer that is headquartered in the Western United States is paid to the West group of sales representatives. Sales representatives are responsible for driving new business. Company executives must be able to see metrics that define the companies that the sales representatives is targeting, where there is potential to do business, and where quotes are being generated. Customer records must not be created until a sale is confirmed. The sales team quoted a new perfume for a customer named Customer1. The customer has shipping locations in the following regions: United States, Austria, and Japan. Sales must only be made to the US and Japan due to product ingredients. Automated checks must be put into place so that users do not have to remember to select the correct item. Requirements. Testing - The company periodically performs testing on ceramicware as it is received to determine whether the products contain lead. The company labels and markets ceramicware as Lead Free or Not for food use. Perfumes may contain restricted ingredients that cannot be sold to customers in the European Union. The company performs testing on perfumes and has processes to ensure that perfumes containing restricted ingredients are not sold to customers in Europe. Ten percent of all ceramicware items received must be tested for lead. The process for managing testing must be automated. There must be tolerances setup that define the acceptable amount of lead levels in a product. Requirements. Inventory management The inventory team must control costing of items by using FIFO principles. The finance team must be able to see updated FIFO adjustments throughout the month but will only settle FIFO for month-end reporting. Inventory close must be run at the end of each month. A report must be provided to the finance team that includes the physical quantities and inventory value for items, with totals at the bottom. The warehouse team needs a similar report but does not want the inventory value included. During inventory close, some items cannot be fully costed because the issue cannot be settled against the receipt. The finance team must know which items were excluded. Other inventory requirements - Inventory must be reserved against physical inventory. Items must be grouped so that the inventory costing can be posted to the ledger by using the following groups: perfumes, ceramicware, other goods. All goods are FIFO. Financial reports must be grouped by these three categories, even though transactions from all categories post to the same ledger accounts. Wide World Importers plans to import a specific type of pottery from a local company in Mexico that makes the goods. The pottery must be available in orange or red colors. The cost is the same regardless of the color selection. A new line of perfumes is being introduced. The procurement team must be able to identify which perfumes are men's or women's fragrances, and must be able to further categorize perfumes as Perfume, Eau de Perfume, Eau de Toilette, Eau de Cologne, or Eau Fraiche. You must set up a structure of products for classifying each item for purchase, sales, and reporting analysis. Issue - Customer service representatives report that some inventory shows as ordered reserved when the ordered reserved parameter is turned off. An item that typically carried is out of stock. A customer named Customer2 wants to place a special rush order for the item. This will result in a significantly increased cost from the supplier. The finance team does not want to have this special order affect the FIFO tiers. Question DRAG DROP - You need to configure the system to meet the inventory team cost control requirement. Which processes should you run? To answer, drag the appropriate processes to the correct requirements. Each process may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Select and Place: Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/cost-management/inventory-close", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 18, "question_num": 2, "stem": "HOTSPOT - You need to configure the inventory reports. Which configuration settings should you use? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 18, "question_num": 3, "stem": "HOTSPOT - You need to configure settlement reports for the finance team. Which processes should you use? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 18, "question_num": 4, "stem": "You need to identify the cause for the inventory issue reported by customer service representatives. What is the root cause?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Run inventory close process." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Ordered reserved box should be checked, this will disable quantities." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Turn on automatic reservation." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Ordered reserved quantity is due to marking." }, { "label": "E", "text": "Turn off automatic reservation." } ], "answer": "D" }, { "topic": 18, "question_num": 5, "stem": "HOTSPOT - You need to configure the system to meet the item testing requirements. How should you configure the system? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 19, "question_num": 1, "stem": "Introductory Info This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Adventure Works Cycles builds stock and custom mountain bikes and is headquartered in San Diego. It has the following assembly and warehouse locations: Denver, Colorado, United States San Diego, California, United States Budapest, Hungary Most manufacturing is outsourced, with each facility only assembling the bikes. Parts are stocked at all facilities and may be transferred between warehouses or legal entities. All of the parts are at standard cost. Current environment. Organizational structure The following diagram shows the structure of Adventure Works Cycles. Each of the physical locations in the United States (US) is a warehouse. Hungary assembles and distributes products to the rest of the European Union (EU). The EU legal entity is expected to add additional warehouse locations. All legal entities roll up to a financial consolidation company. Current environment. Purchasing - Higher quality tires that are used in new orders have become popular. Due to the volume of orders, the company wants to negotiate pricing with VendorC. The vendor agrees to a discounted price for 500 tires purchased within the next six months. Once the 500 tires have been purchased, the discount will be re - evaluated based on demand. Once a purchase is approved, for audit purposes it cannot be changed. Whenever possible, parts are purchased from vendors also within the EU. A purchase order was placed for a bike seat manufacturer in Italy. Parts for custom orders may not always be kept in stock and will need to be procured. Current environment. Purchase requisitions The following flow chart depicts the purchase requisition process: Requirements. Purchasing - Items for purchase requisitions are governed by each country. Each of the country-specific products will be grouped together for selection. Purchase orders must follow the requisition process. All existing purchase orders for brakes must account for the change to VendorB. Requirements. Inventory - Standard costs are based on purchase fluctuations within a single month. Tires use floating zones due to limited warehouse space. Requirements. Operations - Due to recent brake failures, Adventure Works Cycles plans to purchase brakes from VendorB instead of VendorA. Although the brakes from Vendor B will continue to use the same item number as the brakes from VendorA, the price is slightly higher from VendorB. Adventure Works Cycles will pay list price from VendorB. The order from VendorB needs approval and the usual approver for purchase requisitions is on vacation. All brakes from VendorA that are in stock must be tested. The process for brake testing must be implemented for all inbound orders. Quality orders must be automatically created upon receipt of the first shipment against a purchase order only. Inventory stocking locations must be consolidated after the brakes are tested. UserC needs to consolidate brake inventory after it has been cleared for sale. Ordering of the new brakes order will incur an additional cost because it is a rush order. Requirements. Custom orders - Custom orders are placed for items that do not exist in the item master. Hungary does not process custom orders. The United States does process custom paint orders. Most custom paint colors are special order and require purchase requisitions. Quotes must be obtained from a minimum of two suppliers per company policy and compared for shipping, costs, and other variables. Quotes will not be selected based on lowest price only. Issues - A special order for 2.6 high-end tires is received. This item is no longer in stock from the current vendor. Goods have been received in stock, but the matching invoice has not yet been received at the time of month close. UserA needs to set up pricing for the items purchased from VendorC and ensure that accounting validates the receipt and invoice against the agreement. UserB needs to send out a request for quotation (RFQ) for custom paint. The vendor will be selected based on pricing, volume discounts, and lead time. Question You need to segregate inventory for the brakes that are in inventory. Which two actions should you perform? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Assign a blocked status to the inbound purchase order from VendorA." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Create a disposition code." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Set default inventory status on the item." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Assign an item filter code." }, { "label": "E", "text": "Assign a blocked status to the inbound purchase order from VendorB." } ], "answer": "AD" }, { "topic": 19, "question_num": 2, "stem": "You need to set up testing for brakes to meet the operations requirements. Which two actions should you perform? Each correct answer presents part of the solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Set execution to after product receipt." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Set per updated quantity to yes." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Set execution to before product receipt." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Set per updated quantity to no. AD Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/inventory/enable-quality-management" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 19, "question_num": 3, "stem": "You need to test the existing brakes in inventory. What are two possible ways to achieve this goal? Each correct answer presents a complete solution. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point.", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Assign a Phantom bill of materials (BOM) line." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Create a manual quality order for existing inventory." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Assign brakes to an inventory status that is blocked." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Create an automatic quality order for existing inventory. BD Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/inventory/quality-orders" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 19, "question_num": 4, "stem": "You need to resolve the issue for UserC. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Change the inventory status only." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Change the inventory status and run the replenishment process." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Change the inventory status and complete a movement journal." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Create a transfer order and change the inventory status. A Reference: https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dynamics365/supply-chain/inventory/quality-orders" } ], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 20, "question_num": 1, "stem": "Introductory Info This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Wide World Importers is a distribution company whose primary customers are small boutique shops which sell globally-sourced products including unique or hand-crafted items such as perfumes and ceramicware. Through the Wide World Importers sales cycle, the commission-based sales team identifies opportunities and negotiates with shops by using a quoting process. The products may or may not already exist in the company's current product list. The company has the following divisions and areas of responsibility: Current environment - Wide World Importers use Dynamics 365 Finance and Dynamics 365 Supply Chain Management. There is a single legal entity. The primary distribution center for the company is located in Las Vegas, Nevada, USA. There is an additional warehouse in California which receives imported goods from container ships. When goods are received in California, the goods are transferred to Nevada for distribution. No orders are shipped directly from California. Requirements. Sales - The company has two teams of sales representatives: East and West. Each team has one representative for each of the following categories of goods: perfumes, ceramicware, and all other goods. Sales representatives are paid commissions based on sales. Commissions must be paid based on the home office location for customers. For example, commission for a customer that is headquartered in the Western United States is paid to the West group of sales representatives. Sales representatives are responsible for driving new business. Company executives must be able to see metrics that define the companies that the sales representatives is targeting, where there is potential to do business, and where quotes are being generated. Customer records must not be created until a sale is confirmed. The sales team quoted a new perfume for a customer named Customer1. The customer has shipping locations in the following regions: United States, Austria, and Japan. Sales must only be made to the US and Japan due to product ingredients. Automated checks must be put into place so that users do not have to remember to select the correct item. Requirements. Testing - The company periodically performs testing on ceramicware as it is received to determine whether the products contain lead. The company labels and markets ceramicware as Lead Free or Not for food use. Perfumes may contain restricted ingredients that cannot be sold to customers in the European Union. The company performs testing on perfumes and has processes to ensure that perfumes containing restricted ingredients are not sold to customers in Europe. Ten percent of all ceramicware items received must be tested for lead. The process for managing testing must be automated. There must be tolerances setup that define the acceptable amount of lead levels in a product. Requirements. Inventory management The inventory team must control costing of items by using FIFO principles. The finance team must be able to see updated FIFO adjustments throughout the month but will only settle FIFO for month-end reporting. Inventory close must be run at the end of each month. A report must be provided to the finance team that includes the physical quantities and inventory value for items, with totals at the bottom. The warehouse team needs a similar report but does not want the inventory value included. During inventory close, some items cannot be fully costed because the issue cannot be settled against the receipt. The finance team must know which items were excluded. Other inventory requirements - Inventory must be reserved against physical inventory. Items must be grouped so that the inventory costing can be posted to the ledger by using the following groups: perfumes, ceramicware, other goods. All goods are FIFO. Financial reports must be grouped by these three categories, even though transactions from all categories post to the same ledger accounts. Wide World Importers plans to import a specific type of pottery from a local company in Mexico that makes the goods. The pottery must be available in orange or red colors. The cost is the same regardless of the color selection. A new line of perfumes is being introduced. The procurement team must be able to identify which perfumes are men's or women's fragrances, and must be able to further categorize perfumes as Perfume, Eau de Perfume, Eau de Toilette, Eau de Cologne, or Eau Fraiche. You must set up a structure of products for classifying each item for purchase, sales, and reporting analysis. Issue - Customer service representatives report that some inventory shows as ordered reserved when the ordered reserved parameter is turned off. An item that typically carried is out of stock. A customer named Customer2 wants to place a special rush order for the item. This will result in a significantly increased cost from the supplier. The finance team does not want to have this special order affect the FIFO tiers. Question DRAG DROP - You need to configure the system to meet the metric requirement for sales representatives. How should you configure the system? To answer, drag the appropriate entities to the correct requirements. Each entity may be used once, more than once, or not at all. You may need to drag the split bar between panes or scroll to view content. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Select and Place:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 20, "question_num": 2, "stem": "HOTSPOT - You need to configure the system to support regional sales requirements. Which group assignments should you use? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 21, "question_num": 1, "stem": "Introductory Info This is a case study. Case studies are not timed separately. You can use as much exam time as you would like to complete each case. However, there may be additional case studies and sections on this exam. You must manage your time to ensure that you are able to complete all questions included on this exam in the time provided. To answer the questions included in a case study, you will need to reference information that is provided in the case study. Case studies might contain exhibits and other resources that provide more information about the scenario that is described in the case study. Each question is independent of the other questions in this case study. At the end of this case study, a review screen will appear. This screen allows you to review your answers and to make changes before you move to the next section of the exam. After you begin a new section, you cannot return to this section. To start the case study - To display the first question in this case study, click the Next button. Use the buttons in the left pane to explore the content of the case study before you answer the questions. Clicking these buttons displays information such as business requirements, existing environment, and problem statements. If the case study has an All Information tab, note that the information displayed is identical to the information displayed on the subsequent tabs. When you are ready to answer a question, click the Question button to return to the question. Background - Adventure Works Cycles builds stock and custom mountain bikes and is headquartered in San Diego. It has the following assembly and warehouse locations: Denver, Colorado, United States San Diego, California, United States Budapest, Hungary Most manufacturing is outsourced, with each facility only assembling the bikes. Parts are stocked at all facilities and may be transferred between warehouses or legal entities. All of the parts are at standard cost. Current environment. Organizational structure The following diagram shows the structure of Adventure Works Cycles. Each of the physical locations in the United States (US) is a warehouse. Hungary assembles and distributes products to the rest of the European Union (EU). The EU legal entity is expected to add additional warehouse locations. All legal entities roll up to a financial consolidation company. Current environment. Purchasing - Higher quality tires that are used in new orders have become popular. Due to the volume of orders, the company wants to negotiate pricing with VendorC. The vendor agrees to a discounted price for 500 tires purchased within the next six months. Once the 500 tires have been purchased, the discount will be re - evaluated based on demand. Once a purchase is approved, for audit purposes it cannot be changed. Whenever possible, parts are purchased from vendors also within the EU. A purchase order was placed for a bike seat manufacturer in Italy. Parts for custom orders may not always be kept in stock and will need to be procured. Current environment. Purchase requisitions The following flow chart depicts the purchase requisition process: Requirements. Purchasing - Items for purchase requisitions are governed by each country. Each of the country-specific products will be grouped together for selection. Purchase orders must follow the requisition process. All existing purchase orders for brakes must account for the change to VendorB. Requirements. Inventory - Standard costs are based on purchase fluctuations within a single month. Tires use floating zones due to limited warehouse space. Requirements. Operations - Due to recent brake failures, Adventure Works Cycles plans to purchase brakes from VendorB instead of VendorA. Although the brakes from Vendor B will continue to use the same item number as the brakes from VendorA, the price is slightly higher from VendorB. Adventure Works Cycles will pay list price from VendorB. The order from VendorB needs approval and the usual approver for purchase requisitions is on vacation. All brakes from VendorA that are in stock must be tested. The process for brake testing must be implemented for all inbound orders. Quality orders must be automatically created upon receipt of the first shipment against a purchase order only. Inventory stocking locations must be consolidated after the brakes are tested. UserC needs to consolidate brake inventory after it has been cleared for sale. Ordering of the new brakes order will incur an additional cost because it is a rush order. Requirements. Custom orders - Custom orders are placed for items that do not exist in the item master. Hungary does not process custom orders. The United States does process custom paint orders. Most custom paint colors are special order and require purchase requisitions. Quotes must be obtained from a minimum of two suppliers per company policy and compared for shipping, costs, and other variables. Quotes will not be selected based on lowest price only. Issues - A special order for 2.6 high-end tires is received. This item is no longer in stock from the current vendor. Goods have been received in stock, but the matching invoice has not yet been received at the time of month close. UserA needs to set up pricing for the items purchased from VendorC and ensure that accounting validates the receipt and invoice against the agreement. UserB needs to send out a request for quotation (RFQ) for custom paint. The vendor will be selected based on pricing, volume discounts, and lead time. Question You need to include the items from the purchase order in the Intrastat journal. What should you do?", "options": [ { "label": "A", "text": "Transfer the Product Receipt form to the Intrastat journal." }, { "label": "B", "text": "Create a free text invoice." }, { "label": "C", "text": "Transfer the invoice to the Intrastat journal." }, { "label": "D", "text": "Create a manual Intrastat journal transaction." } ], "answer": "A" }, { "topic": 21, "question_num": 2, "stem": "HOTSPOT - You need to meet the operational requirements for VendorB. What should you do? To answer, select the appropriate options in the area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 21, "question_num": 3, "stem": "HOTSPOT - You need to resolve the issue for UserB? Which options should you use? To answer, select the appropriate options in the area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area:", "options": [], "answer": "" }, { "topic": 21, "question_num": 4, "stem": "HOTSPOT - You need to order the high-end tires. What should you set up? To answer, select the appropriate options in the answer area. NOTE: Each correct selection is worth one point. Hot Area:", "options": [], "answer": "" } ]